Home

User`s Guide - Schneider Electric

1. For instructions on configuring a drop see Configuring a drop on page 184 3 Click the slot where the NOA611 00 will be placed to select it Click IO ADAPT then click NOA611 00 The NOA611 00 icon appears in the slot 194 Quantum Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop 5 Double click the NOA611 00 icon or with the NOA611 00 icon selected click the lower Edit The Slot Edit dialog box appears Slot Edit Head 0 Drop 1 Rack 1 Slot 3 x Card OK INOAG11 00 IBUS S Maste z Cancel IN 300006 300272 C pcp OUT 400003 400266 BIN Current Keying Card AL Current mA gt 700 a CES Modicon Help 6 Edit the NOA611 00 settings as necessary then click OK e For both In and Out type an initial address for the range assigned to the card NxT provides an address table automatically e Click either BIN Binary or BCD Binary Coded Decimal See your NOA611 00 user s manual for more information Click Card Config Configure the Output Timeout State according to the NOA611 00 user s manual then click OK The Card Configuration window closes 9 To close the Traffic Cop click OK Quantum Traffic Cop 195 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Micro 300 Series Traffic Cop The Micro Drop Summary displays a summary of currently configured I O modules Each drop in the Micro Traffic Co
2. Configurable mnemonics 349 Appendix B File Extensions ProWORX NxT User s Guide File extensions NxT requires many different types of files to operate You can determine the purpose of files in the NxT directory by their extensions The files marked with an asterisk make up a database Database files Extension Type of File CML Comment long data file CPF Comment long pointer and length file DCF Database configuration file DDF Descriptor data file DPF Descriptor pointer file LGF Log book note file NDF Short comment file TDF Title data file TSF ProWORX symbol file Controller memory files Extension LDF Type of File Logic data file LPF Logic pointer file MDF Memory data file XDF 352 File extensions Extended memory data file Report files Appendix B File Extensions Extension Type of File LOG Text log file from utilities like CODEGEN TXT Print to file output Loadables Extension Type of File MSL MSL loadables USL USL loadables Additional files Extension Type of File BLK Block data file CDT Temporary long comment data file CGF Codegen batch file for automating macro insertions DDB Descriptor data file used with blocking DIF Data interchange file DPB Descriptor pointer file used with blocking DSF Data setup file DSU Data setup
3. 5 When finished click outside of the field to save the changes If you don t want to save your edits press ESC to exit the field 210 Using the Documentation window Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Using the One Line Documentation window The One Line Documentation window shows your descriptors of logic elements but takes up very little space on your screen leaving you room to view complex networks gt To use the One Line Documentation window 1 On the File menu click Preferences The Preferences window appears Select the One Line Doc Window Enabled check box 3 Click OK If the Documentation Window is not visible in the Network Editor on the View menu click Documentation Window The One Line Documentation Window replaces the On Screen Documentation Window in the Network Editor fetish Descriptors appear here lee Double click this bar to ee 000019 Weld Stn Proximity Sensor up the device s comments in 7 the Documentation Editor ISA_35 Quantum 424 Seg 01 Documentation summary The Documentation Summary provides a view only display of descriptors short comments and symbols if the Symbols option is selected in Preferences for all available references The Documentation Summary also shows whether a symbol associated witha reference is made visible to Process Window Process Window is an MMI application that is available from Total Control Products Canada Inc gt To display
4. lt Register description gt lt Register radix gt lt Register offset gt lt n gt Input Flags lt Input Flag Register offset gt lt n gt lt Input Flag diagram format gt lt n gt Option lt Flag description gt lt First bit gt lt Last bit gt lt n gt lt Bit field gt lt Bit field description gt lt n gt End Input Flags lt n gt Output Flags lt Output Flag Register offset gt lt n gt lt Output Flag diagram format gt lt n gt Option lt Flag description gt lt First bit gt lt Last bit gt lt n gt lt Bit field gt lt Bit field description gt lt n gt End Output Flags lt n gt PCFL field descriptions The following table describes each field in the PCFL configuration file Field Description Function name A unique identifier for each PCFL subfunction The PCFL Editor uses this identifier to find the entry for a particular subfunction NOTE Don t make any changes to this PCFL subfunction name If you do the PCFL Editor won t be able to find the proper subfunction entry 256 Customizing the PCFL configuration file Field Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Description Function title The subfunction name which appears in the title bar of the PCFL Editor dialog box For example the Function title for the PCFL Analog Input instruction block is Analog Input You can use this field to find the entry for a desired subfunction Number of The number of r
5. Input Flag diagram format This section describes how the PCFL Editor draws the lines that connect bits to the flag descriptions in the Input Flags and Output Flags dialog boxes For more information on this field see the section following this table Flag description This section of the configuration file contains entries for each flag in the Input Flags Output Flags dialog boxes Each entry is one line This part of the flag entry contains the name or description of the flag This description appears in the Input Flags or Output Flags dialog box and for Input Flags as the option label in the Set Inputs dialog box First bit The bit offset for the first bit in the series of bits that make up the input output flag described by this line For example if the setting for this flag was stored in bits 2 and 3 the first bit would be 2 Last bit The bit offset for the last bit in the series of bits that make up the input output flag described by this line For example if the setting for this flag was stored in bits 2 and 3 the last bit would be 3 If the flag is composed of only one bit don t include the last bit and its preceding comma for this entry Bit field The values of individual bits within an input flag often indicate different things These lines of the configuration file indicate the possible settings for each flag and the bits that must be set to indicate that setting The Bit field conta
6. Like the other viewers the Graphical viewer also includes Settings and Operations menus to allow you to set triggers trending logging etc gt To insert a bitmap 1 Click anywhere in the Graphical viewer to place the bitmap cell where you want your bitmap 2 Right click on the cell and select Properties The Properties dialog box appears Using the Graphical view 293 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Select to add a bitmap to the current cell and configure its settings Select to include text Properties x X Bitmaps Enabled Address 00001 X Enable Editing o Bitmap Browse Cancel OFF Bitmap Browse ON Bitmap Browse with the bitmap or place I Text Enabled text in a cell anywhere in the window Select to include a Alignment C Top C Midde Bottom Color Sample Background Foreground register or discrete N Watch Enabled value to a bitmap or place a value in a cell anywhere in the window 3 Address 00001 Alignment Top Middle C Bottom Color Sample Background Foreground Window Setup Background Color M Background Help Configure the properties using the following information Bitmaps enabled Below are descriptions of the bitmap properties Address Type a Modicon discrete or analog address on states If you use an analog address you can specify a range of data values b I
7. SUB Use this line if the function contains subfunctions This defines the beginning of a set of editor pages for a new subfunction The number corresponds to the subfunction number There must be an equal number of SUB lines as defined by the SUBFUNCS line and they must appear in sequential order An END SUB must mark the end of this set of pages SUBFUNCS Certain functions such as EMTH may be configured to perform a variety of tasks or subfunctions This setting refers to the total number of subfunctions this function can perform For example EMTH may perform any one of 38 different subfunctions Therefore SUBFUNCS is always set to 38 for an EMTH user configured template If the function has no subfunctions e g ADD set SUBFUNCS to 0 SYMBOL FLAG Defines whether or not to display an address or a symbol Set to Y to display a symbol or N to display an address If no symbol is available the address is used 144 User Configurable Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Text Description WINDOWTABLE Creates a scrollable window enabling you to list R C T e o registers Use this function if you have a data list that cannot be contained on one screen Allows you to define the row column the nodes setting top middle or bottom the offset labels you can re use and labels you want to use Format your line in the template like WINDOWTABLE1 R C M O B ES L V where
8. Type the path and file name of the MUX file then click OK NxT saves the MUX file to your disk for a network of slave devices connected through a modem OK NxT saves the MUX file to your disk e Click Routing to edit the BM85 s address routing map To write your changes click OK to the BM85 for a network of slave devices connected through a modem It may take a few moments to configure the BM85 s ports according to your settings Configuring the Modbus ports ofa BM85 343 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Editing a BM85 s address routing map Each of the four Modbus ports on a BM85 has its own Address Routing Map When the BM85 receives a message at a Modbus port it compares the address of the message to the appropriate address routing map The BM85 then redirects the message to a Modbus Plus network or device according to the routing information it finds Use NxT to view and edit the BM85 s address routing maps You must set a port s Port Type to Master or XMaster in the BM85 Port Parameters window before the BM85 will use its address routing map gt To edit the Address Routing Map of a BM85 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor click Tools or click BM85 MUX Setup The Read BM85 Configuration dialog box appears 2 Follow the instructions on your screen to connect your computer to the BM85 3 Click Configure NxT reads the current configuration of your BM85 then displays it in the BM85 Por
9. gt To adda Peer Cop link 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears 2 Inthe Tree Control area of the window click Peer Cop Peer Cop details appear in the Details area of the window 3 Click Add a New Link When you add a new link the new link is also automatically added to the tree control display Each link includes a Global I O and Specific I O transfer Peer Cop extension 89 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Editing links in the Peer Cop extension You can edit the following components of the link e General link information e Global I O and e Specific I O General link information The three general components of a link are the Last Value Timeout and Head Number e Last Value specifies whether or not to hold the last value When On the input data area associated with an unhealthy transfer is left in its previous state i e the last value with a health of OK e Timeout specifies the health timeout interval The default value is 500ms This value specifies the minimum time period a Peer Cop configured communication must fail before the associated health bit is cleared Valid timeout values range from 20ms to 2 seconds If you type a value too big the value truncates to a multiple of 20 For example 230 truncates to 220 it is not rounded up to 240 e Head Number specifies the head number on a Quantum rack If you are using a Quan
10. gt To set the network colors 1 From the Network Editor window on the View menu click Network Display Setup The Network Display Setup dialog box appears 2 Click Colors The Network Color Setup dialog box appears Network Color Setup x Descriptor Color e Symbol Color Black Data Color Black Back Reference Color Black Cursor Background Color Blue Cursor Foreground Color Bright White M Logic Background Color Bright White M Ls Le This gives a preview of how your color scheme appears Le Le Logic Foreground Color Black z Power Flow Color Power Power Flow Color Black Power Flow Size Medium M the Online editor Offline Edit Color Light Blue T OK Cancel Default Help 3 For each Color box select a color for the network item In Power Flow Size select the width of the line used to show power flow from the drop down box 5 Click OK Customizing the network display 119 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Customiz ing the network editor cursor The Network Editor cursor can be set to a solid block default or a rectangular outline settings Display In both cases the color of the cursor and of selected text depend on in the Network Color Setup dialog box accessible from the Network Setup window gt To set the Network Editor cursor 1 From the Network Editor window on the View menu click Network Display Setup
11. Row Column From which register to start You can use T top node most common M middle node B bottom node Offset to node Use zero to include only one window table Maximum number of entries in the window table The number of registers in the window table The number of registers to be displayed One or more than N to a maximum of 17 When 17 registers are used a scroll bar appears You can display a scroll bar for less than 17 registers by entering a number that is less than or equal to N Indicates if you are going to reuse label The number of levels to follow are indicated when not reusing the label A maximum of 50 can be used For example WINDOWTABLE1 2 19 T 0 Z 10 11 0 10 Source 1 This line defines the label User Configurable Register editor 145 ProWORX NxT User s Guide URF template example FUNCTION function name HEIGHT 3 SUBFUNCS 0 NUMPAGE PAGE 1 PAGETITLE function name page 1 of 2 SCREENINF O NUMLINES 0 END 2 n REGISTERINFO NUMREGS 0 WINDOWTABLE1 2 19 T 0 Z 9 10 0 9 Description of lst register in decimal 1 the bolded numbers are the default radix Description of 2nd register in hexadecimal 2 h Description 3rd register in binary 3 Hh Description 4th register in ascii 4 Hh th register in floating point 5 Hh o o Description o Description o o Hh Description th r
12. aan After you choose a com Modem Type munication system from the list on the left its op tions appear on the right i Initialization Dial Command A T D Command Suffix 013 010 Hangup Command A H OK Cancel 3 Enter your settings then click OK e Adapter sets an identifying number for an SA85 Network Card Up to two SA85 cards numbered 0 or 1 can be installed A card s identifying number in NxT must be the same as in the Device command in the PC s CONFIG SYS file Default is 0 e Interrupt Sets in hexadecimal the location in the PC s memory of a software interrupt for an SA85 Network Card The interrupt vector in NxT must be the same as in the Device command in the PC s CONFIGSSYS file Default is 5C e Timeout Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message Default is 2 seconds Configuring Modbus Plus communications 41 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Configuring Ethernet Gateway communications Select this option if Modicon s EMBP Gateway bridges your computer s TCP IP Ethernet to your controller s Modbus Plus network Once configured for an Ethernet Gateway NxT behaves as if it were connected directly to a Modbus Plus network Your computer s Ethernet address is set in Windows by your network administrator as is its sub network mask address if necessary
13. e Inthe Tree Control select the link you wish to delete by clicking it then click Delete Link Inthe Tree Control select Peer Cop by clicking it then click Delete a Link The Delete Link window appears 3 Select the link you want to delete by clicking it Click OK The link is automatically deleted from the tree control display along with its accompanying Global and Specific I O Peer Cop extension 95 ProWORX NxT User s Guide SY MAX extension The SY MAX configuration extension allows you to properly access and configure up to six SY MAX RIO cards This extension is only available when using Quantum Rev 2 or later controllers gt To configure the SY MAX extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears Select the SY MAX extension from the Config Extensions tree If the SY MAX extension is not in the Config Extensions tree you have to add it Select Config Extensions on the tree click Add Extension then select SY MAX In Card Number select the particular SY MAX RIO card you want to configure The Module Drop Number Backplane Slot Retry Count and Timeout values change to reflect the current settings of the selected card The actual value for the Card Number has no effect as long as you choose a different Card Number for each SY MAX RIO card you configure 96 SY MAX extension In Module Drop N
14. gt To select and configure Ethernet Gateway communications 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or from the Offline Network Editor on the Controller menu click Communications Setup 2 From the Interface list on the left of the Communications Setup dialog box select Ethernet Gateway 3 Enter your settings then click OK e Gateway IP Address The TCP IP address of the computer linking your PC s Ethernet to your controller s Modbus Plus network e Timeout Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message Default is 2 seconds Configuring TCP IP Communications Some controllers can be equipped with TCP IP cards Select this option if both your computer and controller use TCP IP networking regardless of whether they are on the same network or are connected by a gateway Your PC s TCP IP address is set in Windows by your network administrator as are the gateway and sub network mask addresses if necessary If you use TCP IP networking to connect to your controllers e The Select Device dialog box doesn t accept controller addresses unless they are in standard TCP IP format four numbers ranging from 0 to 255 separated by periods for example 10 0 254 68 is valid e The Net Scan function in Select Device dialog boxes is unavailable 42 Configuring Ethernet Gateway communications Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller e Y
15. Logic traffic cop configuration loadables eee k ASCII state tables disabled address tables Relocate Logic Extended Memory Write Cancel Help 2 In Source type the path and file name of the source database If you re unsure of the path and file name click Browse and navigate to the database If you have a database open it appears here automatically Ensure this is the database you want to use before continuing 3 In Destination type the Modbus Plus routing path or Modbus address of the destination controller If you re unsure of the routing path or address click Net Scan incompatible controller type For example you cannot write to a Quantum b You cannot write to a controller from a database that is associated with an controller from a database configured for a Micro controller 4 Click the desired Write Type e Regular writes logic traffic cop configuration loadables ASCII state and disabled tables This option overwrites any existing addresses Writing to a controller 103 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Relocate Logic writes the contents of a database to the contents of the controller as long as addresses and function blocks in logic are supported in the destination controller You can choose to update either the Logic Coils Used ASCII and State Disabled tables or just the Logic and Coils Used e Extended Memory writes only the extended memory registers 5 Cl
16. 2 Ifthe PCFL Equation Editor dialog box displays a list of functions and operators ABS division and so on click Postfix Entry gt Tochange a specific equation register 1 Click the address of the register you want to change 2 Click Edit 3 Click the Postfix Code that you want to place in the selected register 4 Click OK Postfix codes The Postfix Codes have the following meanings Code Meaning Sade NOP nothing no operation n a ABS absolute value function 1 ADD addition operator 2 DIV division operator 2 EXP exponent function to the power of e 1 LN natural log function base e 1 LOG logarithm function base 10 1 MULT multiplication operator 2 NEG negation operator 1 POW power operator 2 SORT square root function 1 SUB subtraction operator 2 SIN sine function 1 Editing the PCFL equation block 253 ProWORX NxT User s Guide N Code Meaning umber of operands COS cosine function 1 TAN tangent function 1 ARCSIN arc sine function 1 ARCCOS arc cosine function 1 ARCTAN arc tangent function 1 Float Indicates that the following two registers contain a n a floating point number To change that number click the first of those two registers on the table then click Edit Integer Indicates that the following register contains an n a integer number To change that number click that register on the table then click Edi
17. 2 In Hold Up Time type the number of seconds for this I O drop to hold its I O values if communication from the 984 is lost 3 In ASCII Port type the ASCII Port used for ASCII messaging on this drop If the racks haven t been configured for the drop yet click Configure and select an interface then click OK to continue gt To insert a slot rack or drop 1 From the Traffic Cop window click Insert NxT displays the Insert Traffic Cop Item window Select the item to insert Click where it should be placed e Insert before The currently selected item is shifted right if it is a slot or down if it is a rack or a drop e Insert after Items after or below the currently selected item are shifted right or down You can press the INSERT and DELETE keys to insert or delete heads drops racks or slots 800 Series Traffic Cop 185 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt Toclear or delete a slot rack or drop 1 2 3 From the Traffic Cop window select the item to delete Click Delete NxT displays the Delete Traffic Cop Item window Select whether you are deleting a slot rack drop or all drops in the Traffic Cop Select an action then click OK e Delete Removes the item shifting the remaining items up rack or drop or left e Clear Clears the item and leaves it empty without shifting neighboring items You can press the INSERT and DELETE keys to insert or delete heads drops racks or
18. 3 View the results of the comparison LS Up to 1 000 database controller comparisons can be defined Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically 329 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To create a new entry in the comparison list 1 Type the time and date for NI the comparisons to start in these fields Each comparison between a controller and database makes up one entry in this list You can define up to 1 000 comparisons On the Tools menu click Compare then click Timed Compare The Timed Compare dialog box appears Current 09 32 07 05 06 1997 Compare Interval hrs Start At 09 26 02 05 06 1 997 Compare Status STOPPED Set the number of hours until the com parison repeats Device Address Database Compare Micro 512 1 C PROWORXANXTATESTZAIl Edit Entry Remove Enty Start Compare Close View Print Help Click Add Entry or double click an empty slot in the list The Open window appears Type the path and file name of the database to use or navigate to it then click OK The Compare window appears with the name in Master Database File To Controller Compare Compare Settings Master Database C PROWORXSANXTATEST2 Browse Compare All Compare To Compare Selected To Controller Select x ne Click Select to choose a controller The Select Device dialog box appears Type the address of the controller
19. Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Searching for specific documentation The Documentation Search function allows you to search for references descriptors blank descriptors and symbols gt To activate the search from the Documentation Editor 1 On the Display menu click Documentation Editor You can also click Edit from the Documentation Summary dialog box The Documentation Editor window appears Click Search The Documentation Search dialog box appears Documentation Search xi Search By Search Next Reference Descriptor Cancel C Blank Descriptor C Symbol Search For 16ee Help gt To search by reference 1 2 In Search By click Reference If you have performed a search before the address for the previous search appears in the Search For If necessary type a new address or reference Click Search Next After the search is performed the search results are displayed in the documentation fields in the Documentation Editor or selected in the Documentation Summary list If the search is successful the previous dialog box either the Documentation Summary or the Documentation Editor is repositioned to the matching record gt To search by descriptor 1 2 From the Documentation Search dialog box click Descriptor Type the descriptor text in Search For Unlike Search By Symbol the descriptor does not have to begin with the specified text in order for a match to be found Cl
20. This temporary column holds information during the conversion process 2 Inthe first cell of the unused column type TEXT A1 00000 This formula converts the numerical value in cell A1 into a text value which NxT can read When you press ENTER the text value appears in the cell where you entered the formula 3 Select the cell 4 On the Edit menu click Copy Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel 371 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 5 Select the temporary column by clicking its header For example if you entered the TEXT formula into the first cell of Column M now select all of Column M 6 Onthe Edit menu click Paste This operation pastes the TEXT formula copied from the first cell of the temporary column into all the other cells in the column Click Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo The temporary column now contains the same values as Column A but formatted as text instead of numbers Select the entire temporary column again On the Edit menu click Copy Select Column A 10 On the Edit menu click Paste Special then click Values The text values from your temporary column replace the numerical values in column A Click Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo 11 Select the entire temporary column 12 On the Edit menu click Clear then click All The values in your temporary column disappear C
21. disk the BM85 Port Parameters dialog box appears with the configuration information BM85 Port Parameters x MUX Version 1 01 MB Address 58 Parameter Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Type Master M Slave M Network M XMaster M e a om Baud Rate 3600 300 600 ml 120 Stop Bits 1 I 2 elif el 2 Parity Even x Odd None i Even M Mode RTU i ascen f ATU f fasen z Priority 4 zi 3 xf w 2 z Link Timeout i 200 3000 Modem Booster No z No E Yes E No z Below are the descriptions for each port parameter in the BM85 Port Parameters dialog box e Type Selects the Modbus device that attaches to the port e Master Select for a master device such as a PC e XMaster Select for devices in Silent Master mode e Slave Select for a slave device such as a PLC Network For a network of slave devices connected through a modem e Address Sets the address of a slave device from 1 to 247 This option is not available unless the port type is set to Slave Baud Rate Sets the speed of data transmission in bits per second The default is 9600 Stop Bits Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the receiving device for the next packet The default is 1 342 Configuring the Modbus ports of a BM85 Chapter 17 Configuring a BM85 Parity A
22. s Guide Multi Function Naming This option replaces function identifier constants in your ladder logic with four letter descriptions of the function operation Multi User Access Select this option if other users can edit your NxT databases over a network When you open a database NxT locks it so that no one else can edit it at the same time When this option is clear other users can access your databases even if you are already working in them Symbols This allows you to use symbols which you configure instead of addresses while editing ladder logic Display Editor for New Instructions NxT automatically displays the Edit Instruction dialog when you place a new instruction into logic so you can assign addresses to it immediately If this function is not enabled the Network Editor displays the instruction s unassigned addresses as question marks Keyboard Menu Options Enabled Functions that you normally access with keystroke combinations for example Goto Assembly Register are also placed in menus Emulate ProOWORXPLUS Hotkeys This option enables the following shortcut keys available in ProWORXPLUS the DOS version of ProWORX Nxt e ALT S to open the Search dialog box to the address highlighted by the logic cursor e ALT O to open the Locate Coil dialog box This hotkey only works if the logic cursor is highlighting a Oxxxx discrete function ALT R to open a Register Editor for the function block located at the
23. 00400 00450 x Used u Coil used Unused Documentation 00001 Initiate Transfer Close Find Free Help Select the address type 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx 4xxxx to display by clicking its corresponding tab Double click the address you want to use You re returned to the Network Editor The address you selected in the table is placed in the AR You can then use the assembly register to work with the address gt To enter an address directly into an instruction 1 From the Network Editor do one of the following e Select the instruction you want to edit then on the Edit menu click Edit Instruction e Double click the instruction you want to edit The Edit Instruction dialog box appears Select the instruction node where you want to enter the address by clicking it Click Used The Address Used Table appears Double click the address you want to add to your instruction The address is placed in the node field you selected in the Edit Instruction dialog box If the Address Used Table is not current a message asks you whether you want the table rebuilt Click OK Checking for used addresses 159 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Finding free addresses gt To find a free address 1 From the Address Used dialog box click the tab of the address type Oxxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx 4xxxx to search for 2 Click Find Free The Find Free Block dialog box appears Block Size Start Search At 00001 3 Select
24. 1 Battery Failed 0 for Micro 455 351 1 Memory Protect Off 1 AC Power On 1 16 Bit User Logic Max 2048 reference system 1 Single Sweep Invoked 1 Constant Sweep Invoked Close Help 3 To see how the bits changed over time click Toggle The status word bits are displayed in three states e Previous two scan cycles before the change occurred e Base one scan cycle before the change occurred e Next immediately after the change occurred When the View Status Bits window opens the Monitor shows the bits as they appeared before the change took place the BASE condition 4 Click Close when you have the information you require Monitoring the health of one device 321 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Checking the health of all controllers on a network This feature checks the health status of all the controllers on your network then displays any changes on the screen and records them to a log You can set the LAN Monitor to repeat its scan at regular intervals last time the Monitor ran not the current status of the controllers For example if you set the LAN Monitor to scan at one hour intervals when you start the Monitor it won t tell a controller is unhealthy or one hour later if the controller is still unhealthy The LAN monitor will tell you the controller has changed from unhealthy to healthy in that hour b The LAN Monitor only shows changes in your controllers health status fro
25. 15 character maximum Click OK The label is attached to the project Getting a read only copy of a project 403 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Undoing a check out If you don t want to keep the changes you made to the project since you last checked it out or to cancel the check out fxManager provides an Undo Check Out command LE You must be connected to the Server to undo a check out gt To undo a checkout 1 From the Project Manager select the project you checked out that you want to cancel Click Cal or from the Version menu select Undo Check Out The Undo Check Out dialog box appears Undo Check Out Project truck door conveyor Remove local copy Replace local copy Leave local copy as is Cancel Select the option s you want for this undo e Remove local copy default Deletes the copy of the project on your local computer e Replace local copy Replaces the local copy with a read only copy of the latest version on the Server e Keep checked out Keeps the project checked out so you can continue working on it after canceling the changes you made since you last checked it out This option is only available with the Replace local copy option e Leave local copy as is Keeps a read only copy of the project with the changes you made while it was checked out Click OK The project is returned to the Server unchanged 404 Undoing a check out Appendix G NxT and fx
26. Add Extension The Add Configuration Extension dialog box appears Select the extension you want to add by clicking it then click OK You re returned to the Configuration Extensions window Click OK to complete the addition 78 Using configuration extensions Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller gt To delete an extension 1 4 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears Click Delete Extension or right click in the Tree Control area then select Delete Extension The Delete Configuration Extension dialog box appears Click the extension you want to delete then click OK You are returned to the Configuration Extensions window Click OK to complete the deletion TCP IP extension Before your controller can connect to a TCP IP network you must install and set up the TCP IP configuration extension This extension lets the controller recognize its TCP IP communication card gt To set up the TCP IP configuration extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extention dialog box appears In the Tree Control area of the window click TCP IP The TCP IP configuration parameters appear in the Details area In the Card Number field select a communication card to set up b Different controllers support different numbers of communication cards e Quantum 113 Rev 2 and 2
27. Controller tab DCP Drop ID 00 OK Cancel Help Controller configuration General tab 55 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Set the following parameters for your controller Parameter General tab Left side of window Registers For each of the 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx and 4xxxx register fields type the number of registers the controller will use The controller polls all of these registers each scan so to keep your controller scanning quickly set up only as many registers as you need Segments Type the number of logic segments the controller will use I O Drops Different controllers use different I O drops e If you have a controller that uses Channels instead of I O Drops type the number the number of channels the controller I O will use Channels always come in pairs so this must be an even number e If you have a Micro series controller in parent mode type the number of children 0 to 4 associated with it e If you have a Micro series controller in child mode type the Child ID 1 to 4 I O Words Quantum controllers only type the maximum number of I O words that will be available for programming in the Traffic Cop Check your controller documentation for the appropriate values DCP Drop ID 680 685 685E 780 785 785E or 785L controllers only If another computer uses this controller for distributed control type the controller s Distributed Control Processor
28. Editing Operations 139 Editing Radix 140 CG eG Editing Values 139 Printing from 140 User Loadables Copying into Controllers 67 Creating a Library 69 Deleting 68 Displaying Manufacturer s Notes 70 Editing an Opcode 70 Rebuilding a Library 70 User Logic Size of 65 V Verify Device Selection System Preference 31 Viewing Health Status Words 321 Search Results 166 Views Customizing 117 W W190 Cable 362 367 Watch Dog Timer Configuring 58 Reset 135 Web site 10 Wiring Diagrams 359 25 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 362 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 25 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 25 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 Modem 365 25 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 584 Military Connector 368 9 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 362 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 9 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 9 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 Modem 365 9 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 IBM 5531 to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 367 IBM 5531 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 366 IBM 5531 to Modicon J478 Modem 367 IBM 5531 to Modicon x80 and x85 366 IBM AT Loopback Connector 368 IBM PC Loopback Connector 368 Working with Databases See Databases Working with Write Flash RAM Executive 109 Writing to a Cont
29. If you use the Undo command to cancel an action selecting Redo on the Edit menu performs the action again cancelling the Undo command Editing instructions in logic 129 ProWORX NxT User s Guide About address entry in NxT NxT formats most register addresses automatically For example if you type 4 then 7 ina blank address field a colon delimiter is added between the type and value as well as padding the value with zeroes The colon is used to select the destructive wrap mode in operation if after the 7 a 1 is typed the address field will contain 4 0071 Any additional digits will wrap the value In wrap mode when the backspace key is pressed the last character entered is removed from the right end of the value and a zero is inserted as the first digit in the value For example 4 0071 results in 4 0007 When pressing the HOME END or gt keys the colon is removed For example 4 0007 results in 40007 gt To edit an instruction in your logic 1 Do one of the following e Click the instruction to edit then on the Edit menu click Edit Instruction e Double click the instruction to edit e If you have the Display Editor for New Instructions option selected in the system Preferences simply add the new instruction to the network The Instruction Edit dialog box appears containing 10001 10049 30001 30099 40001 41800 Inst Help X Display for new instructions Help Top 30002 jet Middle Cancel Fun
30. Importing 221 FIS Files Exporting 224 Importing 221 MON Files 319 OPT Files 270 TEF Files DEF Files Importing Traffic Cop 222 URF Files 137 140 Template for 142 Numbers 25 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 428 Index 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 362 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 25 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 25 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 Modem 365 25 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 4xxxx Bit Descriptors 218 584 Adaptor Module 356 584 Military Connector 368 6 Digit Addressing System Preference 31 680 Adaptor Cable 356 6xxxx Registers 148 800 Terminal Block 183 9 Pin Adaptor Cable 356 9 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 362 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 9 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 Modem 365 9 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 A A120 Terminal Block 183 Access Control 386 Permissions 386 387 Add Watch Track Data Info System Preference 31 Adding Project to fxManager Server 400 Address Used Table 158 Address Contents Table Data Watch Window 277 Addresses Checking for Used 158 Default Addresses for New Cards 183 Disabled Displaying 174 Editing 130 Entering with the Assembly Register 129 Finding Free 160 Format in NxT 130 Global Replace 161 in Equation Networks 238 Searching for 165 Symbolic 164 Alwa
31. Lister 263 Controller Tables 267 Documentation Tables 265 Cross References 265 Font Changing 263 273 Formatting a Printout 269 Mismatch Tables 268 Network Printing Options 264 Print Setup Changing 274 Quick Picks Options 270 OPT Files 270 Loadables User 67 69 Loading Blocks of Logic 172 Locking Database Files 30 Log File Viewer 315 Log Files in the Data Watch Window 288 Recording Trend Spreadsheet data 289 Setup 288 Size of 288 Log Files Monitor Status 319 Logbook Entries 173 Logging On to fxManager Server 392 Logic Instructions Deleting 132 Editing 130 Entering 128 Assembly Register 129 Instruction List 129 Instruction Toolbar 128 Moving 132 Multiple Sub Function Instructions 131 Long Comments Copying 218 Copying its Number 218 Entering 216 in Documentation 208 Loopback Connector IBM AT 368 IBM PC 368 M Macro Databases See Macros Macro Editor Disabled Network Editor functions 308 Macro parameters 308 dialog box 309 Format 308 Macro Status Macro has changed 311 Macro not found 311 Rec xxx 311 Macros About 306 Backing Up and Restoring 307 Changed macros 311 CODEGEN automating insertions with 313 Creating 306 Deleting 310 Editing 308 Inserting into your database 309 313 Macro Overview display 310 Macro parameters 308 Opening existing 307 Removing from a database 310 Saving 307 Selecting a controller for 306 Status of inserted macros 311 Unlinking inserted
32. Row fi Column 01 Number of Descriptor Fields 9 Le Network Controller information i Confirm Address on Entry Yes C No No of Network Listing Fields 5 conc 2 Make changes to the summary information for the database Descriptor Field Information Le Inthe Description field type a short description of the database its purpose logic process etc e Inthe Page Header field type a title for the database This text will appear at the top of printouts from the database e In the Project field type a project identification code or number In the Client field type the name of a client Inthe Author field type the name s of the person s creating the database Editing the setup of adatabase 19 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 3 Make changes to the controller information for the database Inthe Controller Address field type the address of the controller that the database describes The format of the address depends on whether the controller is part of a Modbus Modbus Plus or Ethernet network NxT does not assign the address in this field to the controller it is for reference only To assign a Modbus address to a controller see Controller configuration Ports tab on page 60 Inthe Network Row and Column fields type the location of a ladder logic network The Online Editor jumps to this location when it starts up e Inthe Confirm Address on Entry field sel
33. Selectable 4 Channel Voltage Output B808 016 230 VAC 16 Point Output Module B873 001 4 20mA 1 5V 4 Channel Analog Input B809 016 230 VAC 16 Point Input Module B873 002 4 20mA 1 5V 4 Channel Analog Input B810 008 115 VAC 8 Isolated Output Module B873 011 10 V to 10 V 4 Channel Analog Input B814 001 NO Power Relay 8 Point Output Module B873 012 10 V to 10 V 4 Channel Analog Input B814 002 NC Power Relay 8 Point Output Module B873 200 V A Thermo RTD Strain Gauge Input B814 108 NO NC Power Relay 8 Point Output B875 001 4 20mA 1 5V 8 Channel Analog Input Module B817 116 115 VAC 16 Point Isolated Input Module B875 002 4 20mA 1 5V 8 Channel Analog Input B817 216 230 VAC 16 Point Isolated Input Module B875 011 10 V to 10 V 8 Channel Analog Input B818 032 24 VDC 32 Point Output True High B875 012 10 V to 10 V 8 Channel Analog Input B819 232 230 VAC 32 Point Input Module B875 101 Fast selectable 8 Channel Analog Input B820 008 10 60 VDC 8 Point Output True High B875 102 Fast selectable 8 Channel Analog Input B821 008 10 60 VDC 8 Point Input True High B875 111 Select 8 channel Differential Input B821 108 10 60 VDC 8 Point Input True High B875 200 V A Thermo RTD Strain Gauge Input B824 016 24 VDC 16 Point Output True High B877 111 Select 16 channel Single Ended Input B825 016 24 VDC 16 Point Input True High B881 001 24 VDC 16 Point Latched Input True High B826 032 24 VDC 32 Poi
34. Type the destination reference in Navigate By Click Next Available Click in the Long Comment box Press CTRL V The Long Comment is duplicated each time you paste Adding 4xxxx Bit descriptors The Add Bits functions is only enabled if the current reference is a 4xxxx address gt To add bit descriptors for a specific 4xxxx address 1 2 Type a 4xxxx address in the Navigate By entry field Click Add Bits The button is replaced with Remove Bits Adding 4xxxx Bit descriptors Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Documentation utilities Normal database editing functions may require you to move copy or delete documentation Moving documentation Move lets you select a range of documentation records to a new location gt To move documentation records 1 On the Display menu click Documentation Utilities The Documentation Utilities dialog box appears Documentation Utilities Move Source Range Start Copy Source Range End C Delete Destination Cancel Cleanup Help Select Move if it s not the selected function Type the starting address of the source range in Source Range Start A Source Range End is automatically entered To move more than one record change the Source Range End 4 Click Start Documentation records within the entered range are deleted from their old locations and placed in the new ones Existing documentation records in the destination range they are overwritten For ex
35. depending on the Adapter model Features of an Option Adapter are configured along with the Processor Adapter as far as controller configuration is concerned the division between the two is transparent A120 Series Traffic Cop 199 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 1 OBus M1 The I O base Cards on the I OBus The M1 760 00 Processor Adapter also provides a way to control a network of Interbus S cards over an I OBus The M1 760 00 becomes a master on the Interbus network Slave devices on a network of this type can be standard Interbus cards including Modicon cards configured for Interbus communications or Momentum I O bases with Interbus Communication Adapters mounted on them M1 760 00 Interbus compatible controller master devices slaves In an I OBus each Interbus S card is connected to its neighbor in a string Signals are passed from one card to the next card in line Node addresses are based on a card s virtual position in the I OBus network The first card connected to the I OBus master the M1 760 00 has an address of 1 Subsequent cards are numbered 2 3 and so on A maximum of 128 cards can be on your I OBus network Traffic Cop W Traffic Cop xi Base Modules Modicon Ibus Generic Ibus ae a Traffic Cop Base Modules Modicon Ibus Generic Ibus ADI 340 606 24 VDC 16 Point I P Module d p dule 1 0 Bus Node 001 40001 40005 BIN Interbus S ID 005
36. e Undoing a check out and e Deleting a project Checking out a project Before you can work on any project stored on the fxManager Server you ll need to check it out When you check out a project a copy is transferred from the Server to your local computer This process allows you to open and make changes to the project While you have a project checked out other users can only get a read only copy of the project Only the latest version of a project can be checked out but if you need to you can get a read only copy of previous versions Permission CheckInOut and it must be assigned to the project For more b To perform a Check Out the group you belong to must have the fxManager information see fxManager s main help gt To check out a project 1 From the Project Manager select the NxT project you want to check out 2 Click Bal or from the Version menu select Check Out Now you can open the project you ve checked out retrieve a read only copy of the project For more information see Getting a b If the project is already checked out by another user use Get Latest Version to read only copy of a project on page 403 396 Working with the Project Manager Appendix G NxT and fxManager Opening an NxT project Once you ve checked out a project you can open it from either the Project Manager or fxManager gt To open an NxT project 1 Check out the NxT project you want 2 Do one of the fol
37. s Guide 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 cable 25 pin female DB255 A ETS WlooccocOe8e e886 660 1 1 T 45 7 amp 8 20 23 23 1 4 95 7 6 6 20 Shield LJ LI HCI T Controller O sNoooooeooooootd 25 pin female DB255 1 a 25 pin 25 pin temale temale 4 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 9 pin female DESS Computer eTEN o Ieee e 1 1234 5 6 7 3 7 T Shield J GCILL YT Yo Controller O Mo ooCOeOGOO00A4 25 pin female DB 25S 45 7 6 8 20 LI LL a 25 pin female female 4 362 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 cable Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams 25 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 25 pin female DB 255 ea aE MOCCOOOSCCCEEO Computer o BOCCOCSeOO0000 A o Shield 5 C 123672045 12345678 L Controller o ER o 9 pin male DB9P 25 pin 9 pin female male 9 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 9 pin female D95 eE Shield 7 5 5 738 L arae E 9 pin male DB SF a 8 Lf oa fi i i m _ gt m 1 9 pin 9 pin female male 4 25 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 25 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 25 pin female DB25S E aT nooo ee 888e 5 Computer Os oooooeOCoooO sg 9 ee 2 3 4 5 amp F 8 2h 4 Caution Pind 417 4 3 F 6G 5 2 6 receives 5 from th
38. they cannot be changed from inside the Register Editor dialog box For more information on printing see Printing selected data Lister on page 263 Generic Register editor 155 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Register Contents utilities The Register Contents Utilities let you move or copy register contents within a file or between files You can also fill a block of registers with a data value gt To move the contents of one block of registers to another block 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor window appears From the Register Editor dialog box on the File menu click Utilities The Register Contents Utilities dialog box appears Register Contents Utilities x Source Start Source End Fill Destination Tal Le jee Click Move In the following boxes e Source Start Type the first register of the block to be moved Source End Type the last register of the block to be moved e Destination Type the first register of the destination block Click Start When finished click Cancel to close the dialog box 156 Generic Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To copy the contents of one block of registers to another block 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor dialog box appears 2 From the Register Editor dialog box click File then click Utilities
39. variable c D variable d A 32 5 3 OK Cancel Edit Post Fix Help Editing the PCFL equation block 249 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Click Postfix Entry to edit the equation registers directly Equation x 40015 VARA 40032 NOP 40049 NOP 40016 Int 16 Bit 40033 NOP 40050 NOP 40017 32 40034 NOP 40051 NOP 40018 SUB 40035 NOP 40052 NOP 40019 Int 16 Bit 40036 NOP 40053 NOP 40020 5 40037 NOP 40054 NOP 40021 MULT 40038 NOP 40055 NOP 40022 Int 16 Bit 40039 NOP 40056 NOP 40023 9 40040 NOP 40057 NOP 40024 DIV 40041 NOP 40058 NOP 40025 NOP 40042 NOP 40059 NOP 40026 NOP 40043 NOP 40060 NOP 40027 NOP 40044 NOP 40061 NOP 40028 NOP 40045 NOP 40062 NOP 40029 NOP 40046 NOP 40063 NOP 40030 NOP 40047 NOP 40064 NOP 4001 NOP 40043 nop aooe Mo OK Cancel Edit Equation Help Editing the PCFL equation as text With the PCFL Equation Editor you can enter an arithmetic formula in a regular left to right format technically known as infix notation The PCFL Editor converts the equation to the format expected by the PCFL block storing it in the equation registers gt To enter a PCFL equation as a string of text 1 From the PCFL Editor click Eqn Edit If the PCFL Equation Editor dialog box shows a table of registers click Equation The Equation Entry dialog box switches to Equation mode Type your equation in the text box Click OK If the PCFL Editor locates err
40. 1xxxx 3xxxx and 4xxxx references as well as the network itself Nxxxx gt To edit documentation in the Documentation Window 1 Ifthe documentation window does not appear in the Network Editor on the View menu Documentation Window The Documentation Window is displayed and a checkmark appears beside the Documentation Window option in the View menu If the Documentation Window in the View menu is grayed out you do not have an active database selected Open or create a database before continuing punch up away from a part The punch station field upper Limit 10018 is used to limit the travel Punch down request must not be on 00117 Descriptor field meor 00011 C The punch station motor up control moves the SS Short Comment Belt Forward Movment Long Comment field Le 2 Select the instruction in logic to document If you select a blank cell in logic the documentation you type applies to the network itself Any existing documentation for the selected is displayed 3 Click the box containing the documentation descriptor short comment or long comment you want to edit 4 Type the new text vad You can use the Cut CTRL X Copy CTRL C and Paste CTRL V tq between fields For example select text from a short comment copy it then paste it into the long comment Do not use the cut copy and paste buttons on the toolbar these functions only operate on the instructions themselves
41. About the status bar The Status Bar displays helpful information about the open database or in the Online Editor the selected controller In the Offline Editor the Status Bar shows you words used of number of bookmarks active database current segment those available placed in logic N N NXT_DEMO 9844145 Seg 01 Net 0002 0034_ Words Used 01090 07264 Program Marks 00 controller type current network editing mode In the Online Editor the Status Bar shows you number of bookmarks active database controller type controller status placed in logic N NXT_DEMO Device 001 Micro 984 Seg 01 Running Program Marks 00 controller address current segment editing mode 116 Using the Network Editor Customizing the network display The Network Display Setup dialog box tells NxT how to display each cell ina network There are four configurable display styles called views available These four views can be configured to display logic cells of user defined size with or without symbols descriptors addresses data values and back referencing information gt To configure a network view From the Network Editor window on the View menu click Network Display Setup The Network Display Setup dialog box appears 1 Select or clear to determine where coils are displayed Select to force the display to always show an entire network at a time With Custom Screen Setup cleared click to select one of os
42. Address 81 Setting Size of 58 TCP IP 79 Tree Controlin 78 Configurator 54 Configurator Smart 59 Configuring a BM85 339 Configuring Controllers Changing Type of 66 Controller Tab 64 Editing Hardware Details of 65 General Tab 55 Loadable Library Tab 69 Overview 54 Ports Tab 60 Setting the Type of 64 Simple ASCII Ports 62 Smart Configurator 59 User Loadables Tab 67 Configuring Mnemonics 132 Confirmation of Device Verification System Preference 31 of Instruction Deletions System Preference 31 of Instruction Overwrites System Preference 31 of Perform a Read System Preference 31 Connecting to Controllers Ethernet Gateway 42 Modbus 35 Modbus Plus 41 Modems 37 Network Scan 50 Overview 34 Ports Configuring 60 Selecting 44 TCP IP 42 Constant Sweep 175 Controller Address of 14 Controller Address Selection 397 lists in 399 Controller FLASH Transfering Internal FLASH 107 Controller FLASH Transferring PCMCIA 107 Controller Tables Printing 267 Controllers Cables for 359 Changing Type of 66 Configuring Controller Tab 64 General Tab 55 Loadable Library Tab 69 Overview 54 Ports Tab 60 Simple ASCII Ports 62 Smart Configurator 59 User Loadables Tab 67 Connecting to Ethernet Gateway 42 Modbus 35 Modbus Plus 41 Modems 37 Overview 34 TCP IP 42 Editing Hardware Details of 65 EEPROM Memory Transfer to 105 Flash RAM Executive transfers 108 FLASH RAM Memory Transfer to 106 I
43. Click to launch NxT 2 Help Online 2 Aun ep Shut Down 4 29PM e Click Start then Run Type the path of the folder where you installed NxT C ProWORX NXT by default followed by NXT for the Offline Editor or NXTON for the Online Editor For example if you installed NxT into its default location and want to start the Offline Editor at the Run prompt type c proworx nxt nxt e Ifyou created shortcuts to NxT s Online and Offline editors during the installation procedure double click the icon of the editor you want 6 Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 x Chapier 1 Welcome When you start either the Offline or Online Editor a minimized program called Graphics Server appears in the Taskbar next to the Editor s button A second minimized program appears in the Taskbar when you e Open a database in the Offline Editor in which case the button is labelled NxT Startup e Connect to a controller in the Online Editor in which case the button is labelled NxTOn Startup Astart 52 Graphics Server SANKT Startup JA ProWORX NxT B 3 14PM NxT requires the Graphics The Offline and Online editors This button shows the Offline Ed Server Do not force it to close require their respective Start itor If you minimize NxT click to manually up programs maximize restore the window Do not force either minimized program to close as NxT requires them to operate They close automatically when you e
44. Configuring ASCII messages Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller gt To edit the ASCII messages in a controller or database 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click ASCII The ASCII Messages window appears Select a message to edit then click Edit Message or double click a message to edit The Edit ASCII Message window appears Edit ASCII Message x Total Words Used 00010 of 00100 Group Insert Replace Choose whether new instructions overwrite existing ones or are in Current Message 0001 of 0100 serted into them Words in Message 010 of 134 Conveyor On ASCII Tools Text Int Lead 0 Bin Hex Oct ASCII Space Repeat Bytes Incl Excl Cancel Delete Play Back Help Select Insert to add new instructions before the selected instruction or Replace to overwrite the selected instruction with new instructions Enter your edits with the ASCII Tools These tools insert the codes that make up your ASCII message see descriptions be low Tool Description Text Enters up to 128 text characters except for 584 controllers which accept up to 254 text characters Spaces at the end of the text are ignored Int Inserts an integer field a placeholder for an integer which is defined in ladder logic by a WRIT instruction Lead 0 Inserts a leading zero integer field a placeholder for a leading zero integer which is defined in logic by a WR
45. Controller Health X 1 0 Health X RIO Health Miscompares 3 Loop Count 94 Loop Time 0 000 Ce words 29 Time ___ Word Description 0001 05 06 1997 0002 05 06 1997 0003 05 06 1997 10 27 51 10 27 51 10 27 51 0065 Run Light is ON 0067 Controller status word has changed 0069 Controller Stopped Device 001 Micro 512 1 Running MONITOR MON Select the status words to monitor e Controller Health Monitors words such as 984 status 911 states stop codes EOL pointers R I O timeouts ASCII message status and run status e J O Health Monitors the Module Health Table R O Health Monitors the Drop or Channel Status Table Click Start The Monitor begins continuously checking the health of your controller The Start button changes to Stop If a status change occurs the Monitor displays it on your screen and logs it toa file This file usually has the same name as the current database with the extension MON If you re working from the Startup Screen or Online Editor with no open database the file is called MONITOR MON If the Monitor finds a MON file for your database or a MONITOR MON file if you don t have a database it prompts you to add to the existing file or create a new one 4 To stop monitoring the controller click Stop Monitoring the health of one device 319 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To select another controller to monitor A Changin
46. Cosine of X radians COSD X Cosine of X degrees EXP X Calculates e approximately 2 7182818 to the Xth power FIX X Converts floating point number X to an integer FLOAT X Converts integer X to a floating point number LN X Natural base e logarithm of X LOG X Common base 10 logarithm of X SIN X Sine of X radians SIND X Sine of X degrees SQRT X Square root of X TAN X Tangent of X radians TAND X Tangent of X degrees Mathematical functions in equation networks 237 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using register address lists Click the Used to bring up a list of previously used addresses register addresses that have been used elsewhere in your logic database Click the Summary to bring up the Descriptor Summary display for the address currently selected This includes addresses for output coils and the enable contact If the cursor does not highlight a register address the Descriptor Summary will jump to address 00001 Addresses from both tables can be inserted directly into the equation gt Toinsert an address from the Previously Used Address table or Descriptor Summary 1 Move the cursor to the spot in the equation or to a coil address box where you want to insert the address Click Used or Summary The appropriate table appears Navigate through the table until you find the address you want to add to the equation 4 Double click that address The address is inserted at the current cu
47. Data Watch trend window for that PID The trend window tracks the PID s register values including its process variable set point and output variable over time plotting them ona graph You can have Trend windows for multiple PIDs open at the same time For more information on Trend windows see page 290 Adjusting a PID s set point 301 ProWORX NxT User s Guide PID Summary display The PID Summary window displays a table with the following information on each PID and PID2 block in the logic database e The location of the PID in the network e The register address for the PID s process variable set point and output variable and e A description of the PID as entered from the documentation editor see page 214 gt To view the PID Summary display 1 Ifyou aren t looking at the PID Tuner or PID View Networks displays on the Data menu click PID Summary The PID monitor dialog box appears 2 The PID Summary is one of three displays that can be shown in this window If the PID Summary display isn t the one that appears click Summary The PID Summary display appears 302 PID Summary display Chapter 13 Working with PID PID2 blocks PID View Networks display The PID View Networks display provides a quick look at where PID PID2 blocks are located in your logic networks You can t edit any logic from here but it does let you jump from one PID to another very quickly gt To view the PID V
48. Exponentiation Takes values to a specified power 40001 3 returns the integer value stored at 40001 taken to the third power Arithmetic operators Multiplication These require two values one before oa and one after the operator These Division values can be any valid expression n Addition For example 4 40003 results in four multiplied by the value stored at z Subtraction address 40003 234 Mathematical operations in equation networks Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks Bitwise operators amp AND The single bit result of an Bitwise operators work on binary AND operation is only true 1 if base 2 representations of values both bits are set to 1 e Inthe case of AND OR and XOR the computer applies the operator OR The single bit result of an OR to each digit in the two values operation is true 1 if either bit is 010 XOR 011 2 XOR 3in set to 1 The result is false 0 only if decimal numbers results in 001 both bits are set to 0 1 in decimal a XOR short for exclusive or The e In the case of shifting operators single bit result of an XOR ne computer e all digits in operation is false 0 if both bits are the binary representation of the the same true 1 otherwise number the given number of places to the left or right Digitson lt lt Left shift The result of 40001 lt lt 2 one side of the number are lost is the binary representati
49. FF 5F USL SVI FF DS1 FF Load gt gt To delete a loadable select it then click Delete Delete Select All Select Library OK Cancel Help Controller configuration User loadables tab 67 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To copy a user loadable into a controller or database 1 In the User Loadables tab click Select Library The Open dialog box appears Type the path and file name of the library or navigate to it then click OK NxT reads the loadables in the library and displays them in the left column Loadables are meant to be used only with a certain controller If you try to copy a loadable into the wrong type of controller you receive an error message The Library Type line tells you which family of controllers the library is meant for 584 A B X or x80 which includes controllers such as 381 685 785e and so on Select the loadables you want to place into your database or controller from the list Click Load NxT copies the loadables into the database or controller then displays them in the right column amp Each loadable is identified in the controller by a unique number called an opcode If a loadable s opcode is already used in the database or controller NxT prompts you to select a new one 5 Click OK To delete a user loadable from a controller or database A You can only delete a loadable from your controller
50. Flags The Output Flags dialog box appears Output Flags x Output Flags 400003 MSB LSB o000 0010 1100 0000 While online output flag labels that are On 1 Math Error appear yellow Crossed limits Under Range 248 Editing PCFL input output flags Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Editing the PCFL equation block The PCFL Editor provides two different methods of editing equations in the PCFL Equation block as a series of registers and as a line of text gt To edit a PCFL equation 1 2 Move the cursor onto a PCFL Equation instruction block To open the PCFL Equation Editor dialog box do one of the following e On the Data menu click Register Editor e Press CTRL R e Right click the PCFL block then select Register Editor The PCFL Editor dialog box appears Click Eqn Edit You can edit the PCFL equation in either infix left to right or postfix notation A toggle button at the bottom lets you change between the two formats e Click Equation to switch to regular left to right infix notation This is the easiest way to edit PCFL equations This is the default mode Equation x ABS absolute addition ri division EXP exponent LN natural log LOG logarithm SQRT square root subtract SIN sine od multiply negate 3 power cos cosine TAN tangent ARCSIN arc sine ARCCOS arc cosine ARCTAN arc tangent A variable a B variable b c
51. H Graph height B Maximum number of entries in the window the B represents the bottom node O Offset M Number of points on the graph P Offset HEIGHT This refers to the height of the register function block A height of one refers to a single node instruction for example SKP A height of three refers to a three node instruction for example ADD NUMLINES XXX The first digit stands for the line number of the location of the text on the screen For example Using the number 8 places the line of text on the eighth row of the screen Put text within the quotation marks To place the text in columns insert spaces between the first quotation mark and the first character A maximum of 18 text lines may exist each up to 78 characters long NUMPAGES Sets the number of pages for the function or subfunction NUMPAGES must always have a value of at least one and has no maximum 142 User Configurable Register editor Text Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Description NUMREGS You must define the number of registers you are placing on the page You may place from 0 to 50 registers Each register is defined as follows ROW COLUMN BASE VALUE OFFSET DATA TYPE BIT TO MODIFY SYMBOL FLAG NODE Xxx Use this line if the function contains subfunctions This sets where the subfunction number is defined in the Network Editor The three possible settings are TOP MIDDLE BOTTOM For example NODE
52. ID number 0 to 32 I O Time Slice Type the amount of time the controller will devote to peripheral port communication from 1 to 100 milliseconds The default is 10 ms for 984A B and X controllers and 20 ms for Quantum controllers Remote Channels 984A S901 984B S901 and 584 controllers only Select from 2 to 32 remote I O channels Channels always come in pairs so this setting must be an even number 56 Controller configuration General tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Parameters General tab Center of window Total Messages Controllers that support ASCII messaging only Type the total number of ASCII messages the controller will use Message Controllers that support ASCII messaging only Type the Words length in machine words of your controller s ASCII messages One machine word is equal to two ASCII characters ASCII Ports Type the number of ASCII ports on the controller This setting must be an even number B984 Select the type of B984 controller you have B884 or B886 Controller Input Latched Select this option if you want the controller to freeze the input state on power down Inputs remain frozen for one scan when the controller is powered back up Settling Time Group Settling Time allows you to set parameters for input digital filtering Each input value is polled through a filter based on a time window You can set the duration of the time window be
53. KON software You received the correct version with your Profibus hardware Network Software Also called Profibus DP PROFI KON DP SPU832 Profibus FMS PROFI KON FMS SPU932 When you save your work PROFI KON generates the CNF file required by the SPU931 software which you use in the next step Use PROFI KON DP to e Load device specific data from DDB files e Set Profibus Master Slave communication parameters and addresses e Edit bus parameters and e Check the configuration Use PROFI KON FMS to e Load device master data from DMD files e Edit bus parameters vectors communication relationships and object dictionaries and Define your network s topology Step 4 Start the SPU931 software you received with your Profibus hardware Navigate to and open the Profibus Station you created in Step 2 then the CNF file you created in Step 3 Map Profibus addresses to Modicon addresses Refer to the SPU931 manual for more information Save your work to your Profibus Station To set up a Profibus network you must have Modicon s SPU931 software You should have received the correct version of Modicon s SPU931 software with your Profibus hardware SPU931 requires two files e A CKG file created by the Profibus Utility as part of your Profibus Station and e A CNF file generated by the PROFI KON software Profibus extension 87 ProWORX NxT User s Guide SPU931 can only save a Profibus configuration to an ex
54. Module NOE511 00 Ethernet MMS Twisted Pair DAI740 00 230 VAC 16 Input Module NOE551 00 Ethernet MMS Fiber Optic DAM390 00 16 8 Bidirectional 24 VAC NOM212 10 MB Drop Interface Card DAM490 00 16 8 Bidirectional 48 VAC NOM2XX 00 MB Drop Interface Card Quantum cards 379 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Quantum cards Card Description Card Description DAM590 00 16 8 Bidirectional 120 VAC NOP911 00 Profibus FMS Interface Module DAO840 00 24 230 VAC 16 Output SERX53 00 Sequence Of Events Recorder Micro cards Card Description Card Description MIC128 16 IN 12 Relay OUT 24V DC MIC140 8 Bit Counter Interrupt Input MIC129 16 IN 8 Relay OUT 24V DC MIC141 4IN 2 OUT 12 Bit 0 10V MIC130 16 IN 4 Relay OUT 24V DC MIC142 4IN 2 OUT 12 Bit 1 5V MIC131 16 IN 8 Triac 4 Relay OUT 115V MIC143 4IN 2 OUT 12 Bit 10V MIC132 16 IN 8 Triac OUT 115V MIC144 4 IN 2 OUT 15 Bit 0 10V MIC133 16 IN 4 Relay OUT 115V MIC145 4IN 2 OUT 14 Bit 1 5V MIC134 16 IN 8 Triac 4 Relay OUT 230V MIC146 4IN 2 OUT 10V MIC135 16 IN 8 Triac OUT 230V MIC147 16 Bit Timer Count Value MIC136 16 IN 4 Relay OUT 230V MIC148 1 Word IN 1 Word OUT MIC137 16 IN 12 FET OUT 24V DC MIC149 2 Words IN 2 Words OUT MIC138 16 IN 8 FET OUT 24V DC MIC150 4 Words IN 4 Words OUT MIC139 16 IN 4 FET OUT 24V DC MIC151 8 Words IN 8 Words OUT 380 Micro cards Momentum M1 and I
55. Process Variable is likely to change over time Manual You can change the Set Point using the Adjust button 67 66 Adjust This area lists the register address left and cur Force Input Contact rent value right of the PID s Process Variable Set mueran ME Point and Output Variable SEAU ulebs The PID s descriptor as entered in the Documentation WPS CHIE CSE am Editor see Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC on Bit Movement Timer Reg page 207 From the PID face plate you can e Click Manual to toggle the PID s operating mode between Auto and Manual e Click Adjust to modify the PID s Set Point in Auto mode or Output Value in Manual mode e Click Trend to open up a Trend window for this PID e Select Force Input Contact to force on the PID s input contact Switching to Manual mode temporarily halts the self correcting operation of the PID block This lets you manually change the register settings to get a better idea of how your PID works Switching back to Auto mode returns the PID to regular programming gt To access the PID Tuner Face Plate display 1 If you aren t looking at the PID Summary or PID View Networks displays on the Data menu click PID Summary The PID monitor dialog box appears 300 The PID tuner face plate display Chapter 13 Working with PID PID2 blocks 2 The PID Tuner is one of three displays that can be shown in this window If the PID Tuner display isn t t
56. Protected addresses list click Edit List Click OK If you typed a new Supervisor Password you re prompted to type the password again before the new settings are accepted If you forget your password contact Customer Support For more information on contacting Customer Support see page 10 Editing the protected register address list You change the list of protected addresses from the Edit Protected Registers dialog box A If Enable Protected Registers is cleared in the Security Options dialog box the address ranges you enter here will have no effect To secure registers in all databases From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen on the File menu click Security Editing the protected register address list 25 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Click Edit List The Edit Protected Registers dialog box appears Protect Specific Database Protect Online Without a Database Database D DB DATA Browse 4x address range to protect Protected Ranges From 4 00005 400001 400002 400003 400004 To Add Delete OK Cancel Hl Select Protect Online Without a Database Type the first address of the range in the From box Type the last address of the range in the To box The protected address ranges apply regardless of which if any database is currently open and of whether ProWORX NxT is online or offline Thus you must type an entire six digit address in the From
57. System window opens select the General tab Your version of Windows is listed under the heading System Windows 3 1 or NT 3 51 From the Program Manager on the Help menu click About the Program Manager 10 Customer support 2 Working with a Database In this chapter Working with a database Overview 12 Creating a new database 13 Opening an existing database 17 Editing the setup of adatabase 19 Saving and deleting a database 21 Backing up and restoring a database offline only 22 Keeping NxT secure 24 Year 2000 compatibility check 28 Setting system preferences 29 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Working with a database Overview ProWORX NxT holds information about each of your controllers in a database The database consists of a group of files which store e The controller s configuration e Its networks of ladder logic and e Descriptors of the controller and ladder logic The files making up one database have the same file name but different file extensions 2 To learn how these file extensions identify the parts of a database see Appendix B File Extensions on page 351 To work with a controller offline you must create a database for it This database stores the controller s Traffic Cop and configuration information its ladder logic and descriptors of the controller and ladder logic As you work the Offline Editor modifies this data Because the Offline Editor is not connected directly to the co
58. The Compare dialog box appears File To File Compare Compare Settings Master Database C PROWORXANATATEST2 Browse Compare All Compare To To File IC PROWORX NXTATEST3 Browse O Compare Selected To Controller Select Close Help gt To change the database from the default database 1 Click Browse The Open dialog box appears 2 Type the path and file name of the database to use or click Browse to navigate to it then click OK The name appears in Master Database gt To compare your master database to another database 1 Click To File 2 To choose your second database click Browse The Open dialog box appears 3 Type the path and file name of the database to use or navigate to it then click OK The name appears in To File gt To compare your master database to the memory of a controller 1 Select To Controller 2 To choose a controller click Select The Select Device dialog box appears 3 Type the address of the controller or click Net Scan to select a controller from a graphical display For more instructions on using Net Scan see Performing a 8 7 8 network scan on page 50 4 Click OK The type of the controller appears in To Controller Using the on demand compare function 327 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To choose parameters to compare 1 To compare all parameters select Compare All 2 To choose parameters to compare select Compare
59. The Extended Memory Register Editor window appears From the Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box click File then click Utilities The Extended Memory Utilities dialog box appears Select Copy Enter the following fields e Source Start Type the first register of the block to be copied e Source End Type the last register of the block to be copied e Source File Type the number of the file containing the source registers e Destination Start Type the first register of the destination block e Destination End Type the last register of the destination block e Destination File Type the number of the file containing the destination registers Click Start When finished click Cancel to close the dialog box Extended Memory Register editor 151 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To fill a register 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Extended Memory The Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box appears 2 From the Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box click File then click Utilities The Extended Memory Utilities dialog box appears Select Fill In the following boxes e Range Start Type the first register in the block to be filled e Range End Type the last register in the block to be filled e File Range Start Type the first file of the block to be filled File Range End Type the last file of the block to be filled e Fill Value Type the value to place in the contents of each
60. The Monitor only shows changes in a controllers health status as the Monitor gt To continuously monitor the status of one controller 1 On the Tools menu click Monitor then click Monitor Device e If you have selected a controller in the Main Screen with the Controller menu s Select Device command the Monitor analyzes that controller e If you have selected a controller in the Network Editor with the Controller menu s Change Device command the Monitor analyzes that controller If you haven t selected a controller the Select Device dialog box appears Type the address of the controller to analyze or click Net Scan to select one from a graphical display The Net Scan window has a separate Monitor function to check that its graphical LE depiction of status lights matches the controllers For more information see Performing a network scan on page 50 318 Monitoring the health of your hardware The Monitor Bar shows the number of words you are monitoring the number of state changes in those words the number of times they have been checked and the amount of time in seconds it takes to complete one check Changes in controller health aA are reported date and time stamped then logged to a file The Status Bar displays the name of the log file and the controller s ad dress type and state Chapter 15 Monitoring your Hardware The Monitor Status window appears r Status Words X
61. The Network Display Setup dialog box appears Click Cursor The Network Cursor Setup dialog box appears Click the style Solid or Outline you prefer for the Network Cursor then click OK Network editor panel descriptions Back Referencing panel The Back Referencing panel displays the I O card location and data if they exist for a selected address in logic The 800 Quantum and A120 cards if available are also shown You can drag and drop these instructions right into your logic lt 10001 DOn 10002 OFF 10003 OFF 10004 OFF 10005 Off 10006 OFF 10007 OFF 10008 OFF The Back Reference panel keeps track of your physical I O by obtaining the physical location of an address used in the network logic If a physical location for example I O point ex ists it is displayed in the form of Head Quan tum Drop Rack and Slot for an S908 system or Channel Slot for a 584 or S901 system XMRD PID2 LAB JSR RET EMTH BLKT MSTR TBLK CKSM AD16 SU16 MU16 DY16 gt To display the Back Referencing panel e Click BRef directly under the AR 120 Network editor panel descriptions Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Instruction List panel The Instruction List contains all available logic instructions You can use the instruction list to drag and drop instructions into logic or onto the instruction bar gt To display the Instruction List e Click Inst directly under the AR gt To ente
62. VAC 16 Point O P Module IBUS 0401 DFT 4 Word Output Module ADO730 50 24 VAC 8 Point O P Module IBUS 0402 DFT 4 Word Input Module ADO740 50 230 VAC 16 Point O P Module IBUS 0403 DFT 4 Word Bidirectional Module AEC920 00 High Speed Counter 50khz IBUS 0431 DFT 4 Word Output Module AMM090 00 24 VDC 4 In 2 Out Bidirectional IBUS 0432 DFT 4 Word Input Module BAI036 00 8 Channel Analog I P Module IBUS 0433 DFT 4 Word Bidirectional Module BAM096 00 4I P 20 P Analog Module IBUS 0501 DFT 5 Word Output Module BAO126 00 4 Channel Analog O P Module IBUS 0502 DFT 5 Word Input Module BDI346 00 24 VDC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0503 DFT 5 Word Bidirectional Module BDI356 00 24 VDC 32 Point I P Module IBUS 0531 DFT 1 Word Output Module BDI546 50 120 VAC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0532 DFT 1 Word Input Module BDI746 50 230 VAC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0533 DFT 1 Word Bidirectional Module BDM346 00 24 VDC 16 In 16 Out IBUS 0633 DFT 8 Word Bidirectional Module BDM346 30 8 In 8 Out Relay IBUS 1233 DFT 16 Word Bidirectional Module BDO346 00 24 VDC 16 Point O P Module Momentum M1 and Interbus cards 381 ProWORX NxT User s Guide SY MAX cards Card Description Card Description RIM101 16 Function 120V AC DC Input ROM122 4 Function Isolated Output RIM121 4 Function Analog Input ROM131 Stepper Motor Controller Module RIM123 8 Channel High Speed Analog Input ROM141 Mult
63. a Click a miscompare Print Section Miscompares Print Section Miscompares Select the MIscom summary to select it Se Sea ee pare summaries then click View to see x pS ae UE Print boxes then details x Controller Configuration es x Coil State click Print Selected x User Loadables No x Input State No to print their details x Traffic Cop No x Input Register Contents No x Segment Scheduler No x Holding Register Contents Yes x ASCII Port Parameters N A fx Coil Disable No x ASCII Messages N A x Input Disable No Print Selected Close Help N gY Press TAB then the arrow keys to move the selection bar to the miscompare to B view Press ENTER to view it Press SPACEBAR to select or clear its Print box 2 For more detailed instructions about this window see Using the Compare Summary window on page 333 Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically Like the On Demand Compare function the Timed Compare finds and highlights differences between a database and a controller s memory However the Timed Compare does not compare two databases Once configured the Timed Compare repeats the comparison automatically at the interval you set When the comparison is complete NxT displays the findings records them to a log and if you want sends them to a printer Follow these three steps to perform a Timed Compare 1 Create comparison entries 2 Set and start the interval timer
64. at this level Selecting a MIC141 4 Channel In 2 Channel Out For example lets you toggle between BIN and BCD 200 500 Series Traffic Cop The 200 500 Series I O screen is an S908 representation of the connection to a J290 J291 interface device The 200 Series drop contains racks 2 to 5 For each slotin the rack NxT displays the slot number type input or output reference address range the associated addresses in logic data type discrete or analog and the health status OK or of the card The health status is only available if the controller is running and channels are not explicitly displayed gt To configure a slot 1 Select the drop and rack containing the slot you want to edit from the tree control The rack appears in the Edit Rack area of the window Select the slot to edit and click Edit or double click the slot Type the first address of the table associated with this input or output point then click OK For example suppose you are entering an address table for a 16 IN slot on a J290 You must associate this slot with a 16 bit table of discretes or one 16 bit register If you are entering a register select the input type binary or BCD Other functions Data Click to view the address contents the register value or the state of each discrete in the table Doc Click to edit documentation for each slot Insert Click to delete an item slot rack or drop from the Traffic Cop Auto Addressi
65. card to the end of the I O Bus select the blank line following the last card on the list Click Insert The Slot Edit dialog box appears Configure the slot card as described in the following instructions gt To configure a slot card in the Slot Edit dialog box 1 If necessary in the Card box select the card for this slot If you are configuring cards in slots other than the LCL LoCaL node this list will include supported Interbus S cards Otherwise you will only be able to insert Momentum I O bases In the address boxes IN and OUT type the starting address for the address range assigned to this card If Auto Addressing is turned on a set of address ranges are selected for you automatically Momentum M1 I O systems 201 ProWORX NxT User s Guide For example if you configure an ADI540 00 a Discrete Input card with 16 inputs In the IN field type the initial address of a 16 address table 1xxxxx for this card The final address is calculated On some cards the initial address for a table of I O points must begin on a word LS boundary That is it must be one more than a multiple of 16 like 300001 or 100017 If you type a starting address that is not on a word boundary NxT will adjust the address down to the nearest boundary 3 If necessary click BIN or BCD depending on how the integer value is stored BIN indicates straight binary representation and BCD indicates Binary Coded Decimal 4 Clic
66. color used to plot the data point on the trend The pair is also underlined with the pen style used to plot the data value You can set up the addresses to be viewed in the Data Watch View or you can select one of the tracking functions available from the Data menu in the Network Editor window gt To enter an address into the Address Contents table 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu double click Data Watch Window The Data Watch window appears showing the Data Watch view You have the option of selecting a different view 2 Type the address that you want to track LE You can t enter a symbol Data Watch Window allows reference numbers only 3 Click the cell in the Address Contents table where you want the address displayed 4 Press ENTER About the Assembly Register in the Data Watch Window The Assembly Register AR in the Data Watch dialog box is used to enter addresses into the Data Watch dialog box This is separate from the Assembly Register in the Network Editor You re not entering addresses directly into the Network Editor About the Address Contents table 277 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Displaying the Data Watch Window There are several methods of displaying the Data Watch Window from the Network Editor Data menu e Clicking Data Watch Window opens the Data Watch Window and lets you enter the addresses to be tracked by the Data Watch Window application You cannot select addr
67. configuration of your BM85 then displays it in the BM85 Port Parameters window For more information see Configuring the Modbus ports of a BM85 on page 342 340 Configuring a BM85 Bridge multiplexer Chapter 17 Configuring a BM85 gt To load a MUX file for editing 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor click Tools then click BM85 MUX Setup The Read BM85 Configuration dialog box appears Read BM85 Configuration x 1 Set MODBUS Port Configuration switches on BM85 to CONFIGURE PORT 1 9600 BAUD NO PARITY 1 STOP BIT All off 2 Connect cable to MODBUS PORT 1 on BM85 3 If BM85 was already in CONFIGURE mode click the Configure button If not or not sure turn BM85 OFF and then ON Configure Cancel L Help Follow the instructions as they appear to connect your PC to the BM85 Click Load MUX File The Select MUX Setup File window appears Type the path and file name of the MUX file or navigate to it then click OK NxT loads the MUX file then displays it in the BM85 Port Parameters window Reading or loading a BM85 configuration 341 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Configuring the Modbus ports of a BM85 With ProWORX NxT you can configure each of a BM85 s four ports edit the ports Address Routing Maps and save your settings to disk as a MUX file which can be loaded later After reading the configuration from a BM85 or loading a saved MUX file from
68. cur rent one Select a device then click OK D ET Click Print to print out the result of a network scan In the Select Device window click Net Scan NxT displays the Network Scan window and begins to search for devices fj Network Scan x Routing 2 TE z hice l OK Peri Port Stop 3 OK Cancel Scan Prev Lan Monitor Print Help You do not have to wait for NxT to interrogate each device address When NxT finds and displays the device you want click Cancel to stop the scan To rescan the network click Scan Double click the graphic of a device to select it or click the graphic then click OK e If you selected Modbus Plus or Ethernet Gateway in the Communications Setup dialog box selecting a bridge or bridge multiplexer scans the network attached to that device 50 Performing a network scan Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller To scan for devices one Local Area Network LAN above the current one e Click Prev LAN For example if you typed 10 15 9 as the base routing path for a scan click Prev LAN to scan for devices with a base routing path of 10 15 To check that status lights in the graphics match your controllers 1 Click Monitor NxT scans the controllers continuously to make sure that the status lights in the on screen graphics show the actual condition of your controllers The graphics correctly show the Run and Battery Low lights on the co
69. decompressed Backing up and restoring a database offline only 23 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Keeping NxT secure The NxT Security Settings restrict access to certain functions of ProWORX NxT A password is required to change the settings to make those functions accessible This can be useful if multiple users are likely to work on the same machine and you don t want all of them to have access to every single feature If the SecurWORX or fxManager products from Total Control Products Canada Inc are installed the NxT Security Settings will have no effect Oa For more information on fxManager see Appendix G NxT and fxManager on page 383 gt To change the security settings 1 Do one of the following e From the main startup screen on the File menu click Security e Attempt to access a restricted function and click Yes when NxT asks if you want to change the Security Settings Type the Supervisor Password If this is the first time anyone has tried to access the Security Settings the password is PROWORX The Security Options dialog box appears It is strongly recommended that you change the default password as soon as possible Type anew Supervisor Password if desired The password can be up to 32 characters long Type the same thing in Confirm Password Select or clear the desired Security Options Selecting an option allows unlimited access to the given function Clearing an option pre
70. default data type is unsigned 16 bit integer So since the above value is a fraction and therefore must be a floating point number it would have to appear as 1 35E 4F With no data type suffix numbers in exponential notation are assumed to be integers For example 1 35E 2 represents the unsigned 16 bit integer value 135 Exponential notation is particularly useful for very large integers Mathematical operations in equation networks The following table lists the mathematical operations you can include in your equation Assignment operator Assignment The assignment operator is used to assign a storage place for the results of the equation All equations will use the assignment operator The format is ADDRESS EXPRESSION Where ADDRESS is a valid register address and EXPRESSION is a valid value or expression assigned to the address Mathematical operations in equation networks 233 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Unary operators Negation The result is 1 times the Unary means single so unary value operators are used on only one value 7 The unary operator is placed just S Ones complement This works on before the value or expression to the binary representation of a value which it is applied For example all 1s are changed to Os and vice 30002 returns 1 times the number versa stored at address 30002 Exponentiation operator a
71. e Extension Overhead TCP IP 100 words e Data Protect 8 words e 980 Address 8 words Quantum Hot Standby 17 words e VME Bus 9 words Profibus Approximately 4096 words check your Profibus manual for details Peer Cop 5 words e Links 3 words per link plus e Global Output 4 words per link e Global Input 2 words overhead plus for each of up to 64 devices 1 twice the number of up to 8 sub entries max 8 The maximum is 2 64 1 2 8 1090 words e Specific Output 2 words overhead plus 2 words for each of up to 64 devices The maximum is 2 2 64 130 words e Specific Input 2 words overhead plus 2 words for each of up to 64 devices The maximum is 2 2 64 130 words e SY MAX 52 words Skips Select this option to enable skips segments can be skipped during solves 58 Controller configuration General tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Smart Configurator online only While online when you change the settings for a previously configured controller ProWORX NxT can attempt a Smart Configuration This lets you make configuration changes without losing any logic or Traffic Cop information stored in the controller The Smart Configurator prevents you from saving changes to the controller if e A reduction in controller memory for a particular setting reduces it below the amount used by logic For example the controller might contain logic addresses up to 10160 but
72. field The possible event types are Logic the logic was edited Doc the documentation was edited Config the configuration was edited TCop the Traffic Cop was edited Data the data memory was edited ASCII the ASCII data was edited Config_Ext the configuration extension was edited Ext_Mem the extended memory was edited OnlineEdit 390 Audit Trail Logs a record when changes are made to a controller during an Online session and specifies the type of change made in the Event Description field The possible edit types are Logic the logic was edited Doc the documentation was edited Config the configuration was edited TCop the Traffic Cop was edited Data the data memory was edited ASCII the ASCII data was edited Config_Ext the configuration extension was edited Ext_Mem the extended memory was edited Appendix G NxT and fxManager fxManager Audit Trail settings Below are the fxManager actions you can record in an Audit Trail Set conditions to True to log a record Property Description CreateProject Logs a record each time a project is added to the Server GetFile Logs a record each time a read only copy of a project is retrieved get from the Server CheckInOut Logs a record each time a file is checked in checked out or an undo check out is performed LogOnOff Logs a record each time a user logs on to or off the Server SetupChanges Logs a record each time any
73. files ProWORX ASCII FIL files containing descriptors short comments and page titles exported from databases When importing an FIL file you can add the new information to your database without overwriting any existing data Overlay the new information onto your existing data overwriting it where necessary or replace all existing data with the new information ProWORX Symbol FIS ProWORX products generate this type of file when exporting symbol and controller address information Updoc ASCII NxT requires both the ASN and ASR files from the Updoc database to import the documentation successfully Updoc descriptors overwrite all information in the first six descriptor fields of your NxT database If your database has fewer than six descriptor fields an error message appears during the import process To change the number of fields in your database on the File menu click Utilities then click Database Setup For more information see Editing the setup of a database on page 19 Graysoft NxT requires both the LAB and HDR files from the Graysoft database to import the documentation successfully Graysoft descriptors overwrite all information in the first three descriptor fields of your NxT database Ladder Doctor NxT requires the TXT file from the Ladder Doctor database to import the documentation successfully Ladder Doctor descriptors overwrite all information in the first four descriptor fields of your NxT d
74. function lets you toggle the Network Editor display between power flow and a combination of power state flow e Power flow An instruction only passes power is selected if it solves true and if the instructions to the left of it also pass power e State flow An instruction is selected if it solves true regardless of whether instructions upstream are passing power State flow lets you see the state of each contact or coil immediately without having to use the Data Watch window State flow is slightly slower than power flow because it requires NxT to poll the PLC and determine the state of each instruction gt To toggle between Power flow and Power State flow e On the View menu click State Flow Setting the update rate online only Online allows the update rate or poll rate to be specified for data server updates This Update Rate is used by all data gathering functions in NxT but not directly in the Data Watch window such as the traffic cop terminal block and register editors Some systems may become sluggish with requests for data happening as fast as the system can manage These multiple requests will slow the system response speed down By setting the Update Rate lower scrolling to the left you free your system to respond to other tasks The Update Rate set in the Network Editor effectively limits the Update Rate in the Data Watch window This is because the Data Watch window polls NxT not the controller di
75. information setting the number and length of the database s descriptor fields and specifying the type of controller the database describes and its options its address additional memory I O cards etc To create a new database in the Online Editor you must be attached to a controller You are prompted for summary information and the number and length of descriptor fields you want but not for a controller type or options the Online Editor reads this information from the controller itself The first time you open the database in the Offline Editor you are prompted for the additional controller information Part 1 For both the online and offline editors gt To create a new database 1 The New dialog box appears when you do one of the following e From the Title Screen of the Offline Editor on the File menu click New e From the Network Editor on the File menu click New e Inthe Network Editor click on the toolbar 2 Typea path and file name for the new database Creating anew database 13 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 3 Click OK The Database Setup dialog box appears Summary information Controller information i Database Setup x Page Header Sample Database Description ProW ORX NxT Sample Database Cance Project Client Author Controller Address 45 Descriptor Field Width 15 M Network 0001 Row fi Column
76. is displayed in a cell of the table with the format NNNN R YYYY where NNN is the network number R is the row within the network and YYYY is the function name gt Togo to a search result 1 From the Search Results Table select the result to whose location you want to go 2 Click Goto NxT displays the network and segment with the matching cell selected 3 To return to the search results table click Results 166 Searching logic Retracing searches Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor The Search panel appears in the top right corner of the Network Editor after you Goto a location in the Search Results table The Search panel can be dragged by the title bar to a different location Once positioned the panel will remain in place until you exit ProWORX NxT Match 002 008 This panel allows you to navigate through logic from search match to search match gt To view locations of search matches using the search panel Do any of the following Prev Click to move to the logic location of the previous match Next Click to move the logic to the next search match Mark Click to add the logic location of the current search match to the mark table Stay Click to stay at the current logic location and cancel display of the search panel Cancel Click to quit using the search panel You are returned to the Network Editor in the logic location you were in before the search Searching logic 167 P
77. logic or selected text field Change View ee between four configured views of the BJ network Search E Displays the Search window where you can i search logic for specific items addresses data values Global Replace is Offline only Allows global address changing Change Device i Online only Lets you select a different controller Traffic Cop Displays the Traffic Cop window where you H configure your I O Configurator Opens the Controller Configuration window gE which has a set of tabbed pages used to select and configure a controller Documentation A Available only with an active database Editor K Displays the Documentation Editor where you can edit all documentation components Register Editor E a S Register Editor window for the 2 selected cell Goto Offline K Available in Online only Switches NxT to Offline Mode when running the Offline Online system Using the Network Editor 115 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Goto Online Available in Offline only Switches NxT to Online Mode when running the Offline Online system Help Displays the NxT online help for the selected 2 window or item Shortcut menus Several functions can also be accessed from a shortcut menu Right click anywhere in the Network Editor and the shortcut menu appears Functions accessible from the shortcut menu are e Cut Copy and Paste e Find e Set Mark e Documentation Editor e Register Editor e Instruction Help
78. mode Single Sweep mode sets the controller to scan and solve logic and update I O for a set number of scans only When the sweep is finished the controller stops solving logic and updating I O waits until you manually trigger the sweep The Single Sweep function should not be used to debug controls on machine A tools processes or material handling systems when they are active Once the set number of scans is solved all outputs are frozen in their last state Since no logic solving is occurring all input information is ignored This can result in unsafe hazardous and destructive operation of the machine or process connected to the controller 176 Performing a sweep online only Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To perform a Single Sweep 1 2 3 From the Online Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Sweep The Sweep Mode dialog box appears Sweep Mode x Sweep Mode Parameters weep Time 10 200 ms 00 x10 Constant if 4i O None Scans 1 15 ft i OK Cancel Help In Sweep Mode select Single Sweep In Time type the target time in tens of milliseconds for each scan If the actual scan time is less than the target scan time the controller waits for the target scan time to elapse before performing the next scan If the actual scan time is more than the target scan time the controller continues on with the next scan This lets you s
79. number of seconds before trying to communicate again Trace An operation in the Network Editor that locates a specified output coil in the network logic Traffic Cop A programmable controller s internal configuration that maps logic element addresses to physical I O cards Glossary of Terms 425 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Traffic Cop Table A table used by the Traffic Cop that contains the configuration of the programmable controller I O cards and their corresponding network element addresses Used Table A list of all I O addresses in a controller indicating which addresses are being used in instructions and which have not Utility A computer program included in a software package but run separately from the package s main program Vertical Form Control Unit A device usually programmed by a paper tape loop that controls pagination on line printers It is also called a Vertical Form Unit Word 16 bits of data two bytes Also called a machine word 426 Glossary of Terms Index ProWORX NxT User s Guide Symbols BLK Files Exporting 171 Importing 172 CGF Files 313 DAT See PCFL DAT DBF Files Exporting Documentation to 224 Importing Documentation from 222 DIF Files and Excel 370 Exporting Documentation to 224 Importing Documentation from 222 DPF Files Rebuilding from DDF Files 175 DWW Files 282 Exporting to DIF 283 See Log Files DXF Files 204 FIL Files Exporting 224
80. of the trend You can go N TE Sat Y a eosso _ The vertical cursor is plotted The line style 3 bo A O AY _ shown at the leading edge DPN KY ra EEEE ST ee basaan d shown under each address TO oS a Ta backwards through the trend by pressing lt Do ing so moves the trace bar 13 53 20 925 back through the trend i and the sample time data 09 05 1997 13 53 20 441 Data Record 000373 000373 Trigger Disabled Clamps Disabled Values are shown in the Quantum 213 4 Runnina Program status bar You can plot up to 60 values at a time For up to 9 discretes square waves are LE set to 1 9 the height of the trend display For more than nine discretes the square waves are resized as necessary to fit Each plotted line has a unique color which corresponds to the address being plotted Discretes are plotted as on or off producing the expected square wave Note that discretes are spread out vertically across the trend If you plot nine or fewer discretes each discrete is shown at one ninths the height of the display If you plot more than nine discretes the trend sizes the square waves evenly Using the Trend view 291 ProWORX NxT User s Guide There are time values at the bottom left and bottom right corners of the trend These values show the range of time over which the trend is plotted You can adjust the time range shown on the trend in the Settings menu You can
81. only Select Mode Single The controller is independent not ina parent child relationship e Parent The controller is the parent in a parent child relationship e Child The controller is the child in a parent child relationship 3 When you are finished click OK Controller configuration Controller tab 65 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Changing the type of controller for your database Change your controller type You may need to do this if you replace an older controller with a new one say that is faster or handles more I O but want to keep the same ladder logic or if the wrong controller type was selected while setting up a database For example you can convert a database from a 584 controller to a 984 controller or from S901 remote I O to S908 RI O new controller or NxT does not allow the change For information on adjusting the General tab settings see Controller configuration General tab on page 55 b The settings in the Configuration Window General tab must be valid for the gt To change the controller type for a database Offline Editor only 1 In the Controller tab click Change Controller Type The Change Controller Type dialog box appears 2 From the list on the left select a controller group A list of controllers in that group appears on the right 3 From the list on the right select the type of controller for the database then click OK 66 Controller config
82. or PS 2 computer with a 25 pin male DB25P serial port to a 584 processor A Modicon W190 Cable the cable used to connect a 584 to a P190 Programming Terminal is also required Plug the Modbus Cable s female connector into your computer s serial port and the male connector to either end of the 584 Adaptor Module Plug the other end of the 584 Adaptor Module into the W190 Cable Plug the W190 Cable s circular connector into the 584 controller s Modbus port IBM AT to Modicon 584 357 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using other computers Follow the directions on the preceding pages if your computer has a serial port that is compatible with an IBM AT PC XT or PS 2 computer If not your computer dealer may be able to supply an adaptor cable that terminates in a PC compatible connector Connect the cable to your computer then follow the instructions on the preceding pages Always verify the connector location type and pinout before connecting anything to your computer Both serial and parallel ports may be terminated in 25 pin connectors and both serial and video ports may be terminated in 9 pin connectors If you are in doubt about which port to use consult the documentation included with your computer or your computer dealer Some computers may be configured as Data Communications Equipment DCE rather than the Data Terminal Equipment DTE configuration used by IBM Contact Customer Support about obtaining a DCE to DTE adap
83. or while you are working with a controller online To backup or restore an active database first close it it s saved automatically then follow the procedures below gt To back up a database 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen on the File menu click Database Backup Restore The Database Backup Restore dialog box appears f Select a database and Backup Database C PROWORX NXT DEMO Browse _ZIP file here Select either the Backup O Restore Zip Location C PROWORX NXT DEMO 4 Browse or Restore function Start Cancel Help Click Backup 3 Type the path and file name with a DCF extension of the database to back up or click Browse to navigate to it 4 Type the path where the compressed ZIP backup file is to be created or click Browse to select a path 5 Click Start A temporary DOS window appears and the database files are compressed 22 Backing up and restoring a database offline only Chapter 2 Working with a Database gt To restore a database 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen on the File menu click Database Backup Restore The Database Backup Restore window appears Click Restore Type the path and file name of the compressed ZIP backup file to restore or click Browse to navigate to it Type the path where you want to restore database or click Browse to navigate Click Start A temporary DOS window appears and the database files are
84. performed and a Results Table appears All locations in logic with the found addresses are displayed Displaying disabled addresses You can search for disabled discrete addresses If any are found the Disabled Address table dialog box is displayed gt To display the Disabled Address table 1 2 3 4 5 From the Search dialog box click Disabled Table Click Search If disabled addresses are found NxT displays the Disabled Table Click the address you want to go to Click Find Addr A search is performed for the disabled address and the Results Table is displayed 174 Searching for duplicate coils offline only Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Locating coils from contacts The Locate Coil function allows you to find contact and coil relationships To locate a coil in this case means to search for the output coil associated with a selected contact gt To locate a coil 1 From the network window select a contact with a coil address 2 On the Search menu click Locate Coil Rebuilding a database The Rebuild Database function reconstructs the descriptor pointer file DPF from the existing descriptor data file DDF This may be necessary if the DPF file is ever corrupted or accidentally erased gt To rebuild a database 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Rebuild Database You are prompted for confirmation 2 Click Yes Performing a sweep online o
85. ports according to your settings Editing a BM85 s address routing map 345 Appendix A Mnemonics ProWORX NxT User s Guide Configurable mnemonics Use mnemonics to enter ladder logic instructions in the Network Editor To edit a mnemonic on the File menu click Utilities then click Mnemonics No Mnemonic Description 01 NO Normally Open 02 NC l Normally Closed 03 PTC P Off to On 04 NTC N On to Off 05 VTO OPEN Vertical Open 06 VTS SHRT Vertical Shunt 07 HSH SHRT Horizontal Shunt 08 CNR Normal Coil 09 CR L Latched Coil 10 SKP SKP Skip Function 11 UCT UCTR Up Counter 12 DCT DCTR Down Counter 13 T1 T1 0 Timer seconds 14 TO T0 1 Timer tenths 15 T T 01 Timer hundredths 16 ADD ADD Addition 17 SUB SUB Subtraction 18 MUL MULT Multiplication 19 DIV DIV Division 20 RT R gt T Register to Table 21 TR T gt R Table to Register 348 Configurable mnemonics Appendix A Mnemonics No Mnemonic Description 22 TT T gt T Table to Table 23 BLK BLKM Block Move 24 FIN FIN First In 25 FOU FOUT First Out 26 SRC SRCH Table Search 27 STA STAT System Status 28 AND AND Logical And 29 OR OR Inclusive Or 30 CMP CMPR Logical Compare 31 SEN SENS Logical Bit Sense 32 MBI MBIT Logical Bit Modify 33 COM COMP Logical Complement 34 XOR XOR Exclusive Or 35 BRO BROT Logical Bit Rotate
86. ranges per parameter Range 4 aill 9 Click OK You are returned to the Timed Compare dialog box gt To edit an entry in the Timed Compare list 1 In the Timed Compare dialog box select entry to edit then click Edit Entry or double click the entry to edit The Compare window appears Change the entry Click OK You re returned to the Timed Compare window with the edited entry in the list Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically 331 ProWORX NxT User s Guide A gt To delete an entry from the Timed Compare list Deleted entries cannot be recovered 1 Inthe Timed Compare dialog box click the entry to remove 2 Click Remove Entry To set the start time and interval for a Timed Compare 1 Inthe Timed Compare dialog box type the time and date for the comparisons to begin in the Start At fields e In the left field type hours minutes seconds e In the right field type month day year 2 Click Ll to set the interval between comparisons in hours The interval cannot be less than one hour or more than 9999 hours To start or stop a Timed Compare 1 Inthe Timed Compare dialog box click Start Compare There must be at least one entry in the Comparison list before the timer starts When the Start At time and date match the actual time and date NxT performs the comparisons in the Entries list The results are recorded to log files NxT then starts a timer and waits the spe
87. receives data from and transmits instructions to the Interbus S I O devices Set up the NOA611 00 card through the Quantum Traffic Cop gt To set up an NOA611 00 card in the Quantum Traffic Cop Before continuing you must have configured your database for a Quantum controller see Controller configuration Controller tab on page 64 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Traffic Cop or click in the toolbar The Quantum Traffic Cop appears YA Traffic Cop DiseIn Disc Out Aniin AnlOut IntlO Motion Pwr BES Controller Quantum Traffic Cop Edit Drop pome E N0N21210 ir 1 Quantum CRP931 00 WRack 1 CRP932 00 CRA931 00 CRA932 00 CRA211 10 CRA211 20 CRA212 10 CRA212 20 CHS110 00 NOA611 00 NOE211 00 9 NOE251 00 ime 3 ASCII Port 0 IA Example To place an NOA611 00 card select the local drop and the slot where it will be placed then click NOA611 on the IO Adpt menu You can also select a slot click Edit then choose the NOA61 1 00 from the drop down list i 00001 300267 400001 400264 BIN NOAG11 00 Interbus S Master Module Edit Terminal Card Help Card Config lin 0000 1024 Out 0000 1024 Power Avail 3780m4 2 Inthe Traffic Cop window click the Quantum Series local drop to select it The NOA611 00 must be placed in a local drop Note that the drop must be configured before you can place items into it
88. register address in this panel Edit Equation Network Enable Contact 4dr Ono iF Nc Y Shor a m pen HEIGHT Nodes Used 14 81 0001 40002U COS 40003UL 000135F 7 Cois Oae ance Sure Solved OK These buttons food Switch be Result lt 0 tween four different pan els in the Equation Net work Editor Coils Result 0 Result gt 0 Error FOORE shown Op erators Func tions and Summary Help Symbols The equation appears in this editor You can type the equa tion in directly if you wish Click for a list of previously used addresses mary Click to view the Descriptor Sum The register addresses for the Equation Network s output coils are set in the Coils panel While you can type in the equation from the keyboard three list panels For example the Operators Functions and Symbols panels let you insert items directly into your equation gt To add an item from a list panel to your Equation Network 1 Select the list panel from which you want to add an item 2 Move the equation cursor to where you want to add the item 3 Inthe list box double click the item you want to add If any text within the equation is selected the new item will replace it Or Drag the item from the panel onto the equation or address box The Equation Network Editor display 229 ProWORX N
89. symbol for it e Address The Modicon address that is substituted for the parameter preceding it on the same line 316 CGF batch file descriptions 15 Monitoring your Hardware In this chapter Monitoring the health of your hardware 318 Monitoring the health of one device 318 Checking the health of all controllers on a network 322 Viewing a controller s health log 323 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Monitoring the health of your hardware With ProWORX NxT you can easily monitor the health of your controllers and I O systems You can continuously monitor one device schedule routine checks of your entire network log health data to a file and see the status bits of a controller s memory Together these features alert you to changes in controller health and help you track down intermittent faults Monitoring the health of one device Use this feature to monitor a controller s health from your PC instead of manually checking status words or hardware indicators In this mode the Monitor polls the controller s health continuously until you stop it The Monitor displays any changes in a controller s health on the screen and records them to a log runs not what the status is when monitoring begins For example suppose you begin monitoring an unhealthy controller When you start the Monitor it does not notify you that the controller is unhealthy but does let you know if the controller changes from unhealthy to healthy b
90. symbols into the descriptor starting with a dollar sign Descriptor Descriptor This is the descriptor field in the Documentation Editor Type symbols by preceding the symbol text with a for 30016 See below for a list of symbols and their corresponding text The symbol can be in any descriptor field Using the I O Drawing Generator 203 ProWORX NxT User s Guide The following is a list of all symbols you can use D R D _o 10 1 Qe oe 2 LTR SNG FLSNO oc 0 ame Seat Coens a LTG FSNC FLSNC D E a aa aes o PBNO eeu pa a lo C aa 5 PBNC oS PSNC TGSNO eo pe ga 0 CRNO PSNO Sse e o o 1 0 TGSNC CRNC l TASNO Q Z HORN oe ea TASNC PRSNC LSNO Displaying I O drawings gt To display I O drawings 1 From the Network Editor on the Display menu I O Drawing Generator The I O Drawing Generator dialog box appears 2 Click Display The I O Drawing Display dialog box appears 1 0 Drawing Display x HEAD 0 DROP 1 RACK 1 SLOT 4 ATI 030 00 8 CHANNEL THERMOCOUPLE INPUT fancy D H Help Once the final DXF drawings are created they can be imported using your CAD program 204 Displaying I O drawings Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop To pan across the drawing 1 Click Pan 2 Click at the location you want to be begin your pan view 3 Drag the cursor to another location in the drawing and release the mouse button Th
91. the Documentation Summary window 1 From the Network Editor on the Display menu click Documentation Summary or from the Documentation Editor Instruction Editor Equation Network Editor or Add Symbol window click Summary Using the One Line Documentation window 211 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Oxxxx Txxxx 3uxxx Axxxx Gffixxxx Nxxxx Lxxx Sxx Macro Al Symbols Reference Descriptor 10001 10002 10003 19004 109005 10006 19007 190008 10009 10010 10011 19012 10013 190014 19015 Short Comment On Off Switch Reset Switch PBNC Paint Station Sensor FSNC Belt 2 Low Sensor CRNO PSNO Station 1 Home Lmt Switch FSNO Station 1 Load Lmt Switch LSNO Roll Form Station Sensor LSNC Punch Stn Proximity Sensor CRNC Belt 4 Low Sensor SOL TGSNC Station 2 Home Lmt Switch TGSNO Station 2 Load Lmt Switch FLSNO Punch Stn Lower Lmt Switch PRSNO Welding On Switch FLSNO F zl conveyor belt number 1 motor control This belt transfers parts past Cancel Edit Search Help 2 Select the reference type you want to view from the horizontal tab list e Reference Click to view all references of one type regardless of whether the reference has any documentation e Symbol Click to view only references which are associated with a symbol If Symbols are turned off in System Preferences the Symbol and MMI columns don t appear 212 Documentation summary
92. the configurable views then wenei Symbol select one of six preset views These fields are positioned above or below the instruc tion where they would ap pear in the network display Network Display Setup I Show coils in solve column F Always fit 7 rows by 11 columns View1 View2 View3 View 4 Custom Screen Setup Symbol Symbol Deseriptor1 Backref Deseriptor2 Descriptors Descriptor 1 000001 000001 000001 Column Width 7 3 Do one of the following views manually Clear x Desc 1 M Data x T Add F Clear x if Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Cancel Click to select colors for Net Colors work Editor elements Cursor Click to select the cursor style for the Network Editor Type or select the display width for each column of network logic With Custom Screen Setup cleared click one of the six preset With Custom Screen Setup selected set up your own view The symbol represents an instruction block as it appears in the Network Editor Up to 5 lines are available for each element 3 lines above the instruction and 2 below it For each line select one of the following The instruction s address Customizing the network display 117 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Back referencing information e One of nine possible descriptors e The address s data e Up to two lines of symbol text e Clear leave the
93. the radix of data in the Address Contents table Creating opening importing and exporting Data Watch Window files Exporting a DWW file to a DIF file Setting triggers Clamping data Disabling forcing discretes Editing register contents Setting the sample rate The Sample Rate function lets you set how often the Data Watch Window will sample data provided by the separate NxT application Note that this does not directly set the rate at which NxT samples data from the controller The frequency can be set in either milliseconds or seconds Note that the sample rate is a target value only Depending upon how busy the system is the actual sample rate may be slower Factors which commonly slow up the sample rate are The number of addresses tracked by the Data Watch Window The refresh rate set in the Network Editor Other concurrent processes applications operating system tasks etc General procedures 279 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt Toset the sample rate 1 From any view of the Data Watch Window click Settings then click Sample Rate The Sample Rate dialog box appears Sample Rate x OK Cancel Help In Frequency type the target sample rate in seconds or milliseconds From the units drop down box select whether the sample rate is in milliseconds or seconds then click OK Adding addresses to the Address Contents table You can fill the next cell previous cell or a
94. the table 1 Select the row ahead of where you want the new row to be inserted 2 Click Insert NxT adds a row with a Watchdog Timer Reset as the default control You can then edit the row as required gt To delete a row from the table 1 Click the row to delete 2 Click Delete NxT prompts you to confirm the deletion 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion The rows following the deleted row are shifted up Using the Segment Scheduler 135 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Moving networks in segments gt To move networks across segment boundaries 1 From the Segment Summary window select the segment containing the network you want to move Click Move The Move Networks in Segment window appears Type the number of the networks to move Do one of the following e Forward Click to move the network to the next segment e Backward Click to move the network to the previous segment 5 Click OK 136 Moving networks in segments Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Editing register contents The Register Editor lets you edit register contents in a table format You can enter data for the register as binary hexadecimal ASCII IEEE floating point or 5 digit decimal Some instructions have special data representations For example EMTH shows the equation and results in floating point form and a maximum of 10 variables per equation are allowed The IEEE floating point number used with instructions supporting 32 bit f
95. the toolbar you have the option of adding it 128 Editing instructions in logic Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To place an instruction in the Instruction bar e Drag the instruction from the Instruction List to the instruction bar gt Toenter instructions using the Instruction list e Drag the instruction to insert from the Instruction List to its destination cell in the network gt Toenter instructions using the assembly register 1 Click the Assembly Register The cursor appears in the AR field 2 Type the instruction mnemonic 3 Select the cell in logic by clicking it where you want to place the instruction then press ENTER gt Toenter addresses using the assembly register 1 Click the Assembly Register The cursor appears in the AR field 2 Type the address into the AR If the Back Referencing panel is currently displayed you can enter the address by clicking numbers in the numeric keypad at the bottom of the panel 3 Press CTRL ENTER or drag the instruction from the AR field title to its destination cell in the network Undoing changes to a network offline only When you make changes to a network always keep in mind that you can only undo the last change you made Also you can only Undo an action while you remain in the same network If you move to another network the Undo command is not available gt To Undo an action e On the Edit menu click Undo or click in the toolbar
96. then select the file from the Quick Picks window gt To save custom print settings to a file 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup 2 Configure your print settings 3 Click User Configured The Quick Picks dialog box appears System User Configured File Browse Cancel Save Help i Click User Configured Click Save The Save to User Configured OPT File window appears Type the path and file name with the OPT extension of the file to save then click OK If the file does not exist it is created If the file already exists you re prompted to overwrite it 270 Quick picks Chapter 11 Printing gt To open a custom print settings file 1 2 3 4 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup Click Quick Picks The Quick Picks dialog box appears Click User Configured Select a settings file to load from the drop down list or type its path and file name with the OPT extension then click OK gt Tomodify a custom Lister settings file 1 2 Open the OPT file you want to modify see above for steps on opening the file In the Quick Picks window click OK You re returned to Lister 3 Make the modifications to the Lister settings See above for information on changing the Lister settings 4 Print preview In the Lister window click Save Settings Print preview lets you see your data looks before you send it to t
97. where you define the security access for the fxManager Server operations performed in fxManager and to all NxT projects stored on the Server The Audit Trail section organizes all the Audit Trail settings and report templates stored on the fxManager Server The Scheduler is an optional add on to fxManager that manages and executes scheduled events These scheduled events are stored and controlled by the fxManager Server 21x Projects My Computer Server ProwORX NxT passenger door conveyor gt a door conveyor Define Audit Trail settings and fe wrk eins a access report templates from IE exterior assembly this section of fxManager Be Waltz 2 xx Q Access Control Groups Users Ba Audit Trail From here you can set up Settings events to be carried out by 5 Report Templates the Scheduler E83 Scheduler Event List x logic compare PLC backup 2 Infoview 2B fxM anager For more information on any of these features see fxManager s main help About fxManager 385 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Access Control Using fxManager a Server administrator s can e Create and manage groups e Add users to groups and e Assign permissions to groups to allow or prevent access to NxT projects or fxManager operations Users can belong to one or more groups and in turn inherit the permissions assigned to the groups to which they are a member You configure Access Control through
98. you tried to reconfigure the number of 1xxxx addresses to 32 e Modules are deleted that are used in logic If this happens you have two choices e Make changes to your new configuration so that the addresses currently used in the controller fall within the appropriate address ranges or e Send configuration changes to the controller without attempting a Smart Configuration You will lose all logic and Traffic Cop information stored in the controller gt To change your configuration without a loss of information 1 The Smart Configurator dialog box displays the required address ranges for a successful Smart Configuration Make a note of the values displayed in the Conf column 2 Click Configurator to return to the controller configuration dialog box This resets the configuration values to their original values 3 Allocate controller memory again making sure the amount for each address type meets or exceeds the values required For example if you need 100 3xxxx registers you would have to allocate at least 100 addresses in the 3xxxx section Click OK You re prompted to attempt a Smart Configuration 5 Click Yes The new configuration is saved with no loss of logic data Controller configuration General tab 59 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To change your configuration accepting a loss of information 1 Click Configurator to return to the Controller Configuration dialog box This resets the configu
99. 0004 00034 Dec Source 0005 00078 Dec Description Address Symbol Data Destination 0001 40100 00050 Dec Destination 0002 40101 00200 Dec Destination 0003 40102 00092 Dec Destination 0004 40103 00034 Dec Destination 0005 40104 00078 Dec Destination Values 250 xO Bgg ae eo 123 45 67 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 A 22 40033 Start of 22 Timer Registers Close Edit Doc Radix Help 3 Do one of the following e Select the row either the Description Address Symbol or Data field of the register to edit and click Edit e Double click the row either the Description Address Symbol or Data field of the register to edit An edit window appears specific to the radix of the your selection the radix of each register is displayed in the table s Data field 4 In Register Value type the value to be placed into the register using the appropriate radix If you are typing a binary value you cannot type in the new value directly Instead set the state of individual bits by selecting it and clicking either Set 1 or Reset 0 You can also click Set All to set all bits to 1 or Reset All to set all bits to 0 5 Click OK 138 User Configurable Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To edit a register value using the Assembly Register 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor window appears Click in t
100. 01 Number of Descriptor Fields 9 M Descriptor Field Information Confirm Address on Entry Yes C No No of Network Listing Fields 5 EI Enter summary information for the database In the Description field type a short description of the database its purpose logic process etc In the Page Header field type a title for the database This text will appear at the top of printouts from the database In the Project field type a project identification code or number In the Client field type the name of a client In the Author field type the name s of the person s creating the database Enter information about the controller for this database In the Controller Address field type the address of the controller that the database describes The format of the address depends on whether the controller is part of a Modbus Modbus Plus or Ethernet network NxT does not assign the address in this field to the controller it is for reference only To assign a Modbus address to a controller see Controller configuration Ports tab on page 60 In the Network Row and Column fields type the location of a ladder logic network The Online Editor jumps to this location when it starts up 14 Part 1 For both the online and offline editors Chapter 2 Working with a Database e Inthe Confirm Address on Entry field select whether NxT automatically connects to the controller in the Controll
101. 08 is created without logic Once the project is created you ll need to edit it to set the correct PLC type for the project Projects created while disconnected are called local projects The local projects are only added to your local hard drive not to the Server To add a project to the Server you must reconnect to the Server then check in the project Audit Trail doesn t log actions that occur in a local project To log actions check project in to the Server the next time you log on in connected mode For more information on local projects see fxManager s main help gt Tocreate a project 1 Inthe fxManager tab of the Navigator right click on the Nar ProWORX NxT folder To create a project the fxManager permission EditProjectList for your group must be set to True See your administrator if this permission is set to False 2 Select New The New Project dialog box appears Enter the name of the new project driver door conveyor Enter a name for the NxT database drivr_dr Check out Comment This database project operates the conveyor for the assembly of the driver s door 3 Type the name of your new project 32 character maximum 4 Type the name of the NxT database 8 character maximum 398 Creating a project Appendix G NxT and fxManager 5 Do one of the following e Select the Check out check box default to edit the project or add groups to the project once it s create
102. 13 Rev 2 controllers support two cards e Quantum 424 Rev 2 supports up to six e M1E Momentum controllers only support one card and the Head Number is fixed at 1 In the Head Number field type the number from 1 16 of the slot where the communication card is installed If you have not yet installed a communications card or you do not want use an installed card type 0 Type the TCP IP address you want the card to have into the Internet Address field TCP IP extension 79 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 9 If your network uses a sub network mask type its address into the Sub Network Mask field This address is assigned by your network administrator when a network gateway is set up It in conjunction with the TCP IP address identifies which network the controller is on If a gateway connects the PLC to your PC s network type its address in the Gateway field A gateway connects two networks that would not normally be able to communicate with each other Its address is assigned by your network administrator when the gateway is set up Select the framing protocol your network uses Your network administrator determines this protocol when the network is set up Click OK Data Protect extension Data Protect is used to protect specific Oxxxx and 4xxxx references from being modified by Process Monitoring and Control software Write access is allowed for all Oxxxx and 4xxxx references within the specified block Refer
103. 2 Configuring the controller address selection lists 399 ProWORX NxT User s Guide This lets the user select Modbus Port 1 which connects to Modbus address 1 or Modbus Port 2 which connects to Modbus address 3 Example 2 Configuring selections for the Modbus Plus list If the property ModbusPlusRouting of an NxT project is set to 1 MB Routing 1 10 1 MB Routing 2 This lets the user select MB Routing 1 which connects to Modbus Plus routing address 1 or MB Routing 2 which connects to Modbus Plus routing address 10 1 Example 3 Configuring selections for the TCP IP list If the property TCPIPAddress of an NxT project is set to 10 10 10 10 IP Address This lets the user select only IP Address which connects to TCP IP address 10 10 10 10 Adding a project to an fxManager Server Projects can only be added to a Server from fxManager This is also useful when transferring or importing a project between Servers When you add a project to a Server an Administrators group is automatically assigned to it This allows an administrator to set up groups users and permissions for the project Projects added while disconnected are called local projects Local projects are only added to your local hard drive not to the Server To add a project to the Server you must reconnect to the Server then check in the project 400 Adding a project to an fxM
104. 27 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To edit logic in Offline Edit mode e Use the same editing conventions and procedures as the NxT Offline editor does Remember however that you cannot edit more than one network without either cancelling the edit or writing the edit to the controller The Program Mode Monitor Mode rules still apply to Offline Edit Mode You cannot edit logic in Offline Edit Mode unless NxT is also in Program Mode gt Toexit Offline Edit mode 1 Do any of the following e From the Network Editor on the Edit menu click Offline Edit Mode e Exit the Network Editor e Access another section of ProOWORX NxT for example the Traffic Cop 2 NxT then prompts you about writing your changes to the controller e If you click Yes NxT will check the new network for undefined addresses and duplicate coils If none are found NxT deletes the original network in the controller and sends the new network created in Offline Mode to the controller e If you click No NxT returns to Program Mode e If you click Cancel NxT returns to Offline Edit Mode Entering instructions You can enter instructions into your network logic using the Instruction Bar Instruction List and Assembly Register AR gt To enter instructions using the Instruction toolbar 1 Select the cell where you want the instruction to be entered 2 Click the instruction in the Instruction toolbar LS If the instruction is not on
105. 31 Edit Data Card Config BIN BCD Card Help i 1 0 Points 0128 2048 Words Used 00037 00153 The main window of the M1 Traffic Cop lists all modules currently inserted into the Momentum network For M1 7x0 x0 controllers there is only a single entry the LCL or LoCaL node This is the I O base onto which the controller is mounted 200 Momentum M1 I O systems Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop With M1 760 00 controllers you can also add Interbus S cards in a string of nodes that is slots called the I OBus These can be Modicon cards configured for Interbus communications other Momentum I O bases with an Interbus adapter or third party Interbus S cards gt To view the configuration of a particular slot From the Momentum Traffic Cop either double click the slot or select the slot and click Edit The Slot Edit dialog box appears The LCL or LoCaL node is the I O base onto which the M1 controller is mounted When using M1 7x0 x0 controllers this is the only node you can configure When selecting a node on an I O Bus connected to an M1 760 00 controller you can only select slots greater than one if a card exists for all previous slots in the string For example you can only add a card into slot 3 if cards have already been added for slots 1 and 2 gt To add a card to the I OBus 1 From the Traffic Cop select the card in the position following the one where the new card will be inserted To add a
106. 53 10 24 VDC True Low 32 Output Module CPS 511 125V DC Power Supply 3A DDO843 00 10 60 VDC 16 Output CPS 524 125V DC Power Supply 8A DDO885 00 125 VDC 12 Point O P Module CPU 113 2 Controller DRA840 00 16 Output Relay CPU 113 3 Controller DRC830 00 8 Output ISO Relay CPU 213 4 Controller EHC105 00 High Speed Counter 5 Channel CPU 424 X Controller EHC202 00 High Speed Counter CPU 534 Controller ESI062 10 2 Channel ASCII Interface CRA211 10 DIO Drop MB GPS100 00 IRIG B Time Sync Interface CRA211 20 DIO Drop MB HLI340 00 Hi Speed Latch Interrupt CRA212 10 DIO Drop MB MMB102 00 Two axis motion with incremental CRA212 20 DIO Drop MB MMB104 00 Four axis motion with incremental CRA931 00 RIO Drop S908 MMC120 0X 2 Axis Motion Control CRA932 00 RIO Drop 5908 MMD102 00 Two axis absolute motion CRP811 00 Profibus DP Interface Module MMD104 00 Four axis absolute motion CRP931 00 RIO Head S908 MSB101 00 Motion Inc Enc CRP932 00 RIO Head S908 MSC101 00 Motion Enc Res DAI340 00 24 VAC ISO 16 Input Module NOA611 00 Interbus S Master Module DAI353 00 24 48 VAC 32 Input Module NOA611 10 __ Interbus S Master with PCP DAI440 00 48 VAC 2x8 Input Module NOE211 00 Ethernet TCP IP Twisted Pair DAI453 00 48 VAC 32 Input Module NOE251 00 Ethernet TCP IP Fiber Optic DAI540 00 115 VAC 16 Input Module Isolated NOE311 00 Ethernet SY MAX Twisted Pair DAI543 00 2x8 115 VAC Input Module NOE351 00 Ethernet SY MAX Fiber Optic DAI553 00 115 VAC 32 Input
107. 7 Seconds 100 Configuring the hardware or time of day clock 5 Working with Controllers In this chapter Working with the controller 102 Reading fromacontroller 102 Writing to a controller 103 Initializing logic in a controller 104 Transferring memory contents to controller EEPROM 105 Transferring memory contents to Flash RAM 106 Transfer internal flash or PCMCIA to controller flash 107 Transferring the Flash RAM executive 108 Stopping the controller 110 Starting the controller 111 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Working with the controller Reading from a controller The Read from Controller function transfers memory contents from a programmable controller into a designated database It is strongly recommended that you use this function to backup the contents of a controller before working with it online gt To read from the controller 1 Type the device address here Click Net Scan to dis play all currently available devices From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Read from Controller The Read from Controller dialog box appears Read from Controller Ea Source Destination Quantum 4247x C PROWORX NXT QUANTUM Net Scan Browse Read Type Type the path and file name where the read in formation is to be stored Youcan click Browse to select an existing data Regular Extended Memory base Read Cancel He
108. 8 Dec 00008 Dec an Time Dae 100077 100076 iooors aos oe On 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec l lx 401515 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec 00000 Dec Data Record 000373 000373 Trigger Disabled Clamps Disabled Quantum 213 4 Running Program view on page 288 LE You can record data to file in the Spreadsheet view See Using the Data Logger 292 Using the Spreadsheet view Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Using the Graphical view Use the Graphical viewer to create graphical representations of register contents and discrete values You can add your own bitmaps or choose from the library of bitmaps that are included with the Graphical viewer gt To access the Graphical viewer 1 From the Network Editor select Data Watch Window on the Data menu 2 On the View menu select Graphical A blank window appears witha bitmap cell in the right uppermost corner Click anywhere to place the bitmap coi i 14020 0ff 00809 0n 10024 0ff The bitmap cellis ________ Fluid Valve Tank where your bitmap will appear 00809 0n ram Jv Valve 10024 0ff Data Record 000264 000265 Trigger Disabled Clamps Disabled
109. AD XMRD and WRITE XMWT blocks The extended memory area is divided into a maximum of 10 files each containing up to 10 000 registers You can enter data in 5 digit decimal hexadecimal binary or ASCII radices gt To edit a register value using the edit window 1 2 From the Network Editor select the instruction to edit On the Data menu click Extended Memory The Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box appears ki Extended Memory Register Editor xi File Register Extended Memory File 01 aj AR Register Binary Dec Hex ASCII 601 0000 00000000 00000000 QQAQN i 601 0001 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0002 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0003 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0004 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0005 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0006 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0007 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0008 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0009 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0010 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0011 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0012 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0013 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0014 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0015 00000000 00000000 00000 601 0000 Close Edit Doc Help In the Extended Memory File field select the memory file containing the registers you want to edit Select the radix value of the register to edit and click Edit or double click the radix of the register to edit The Edit window appears for the radix selected In Register Value type the
110. An Edit dialog box appears based on the radix of the register you want to edit The Edit dialog box for binary values is especially different from that of other radixes For information on editing binary values see page 246 3 Do one of the following then click OK e Type the new input value for the register e Type binary values bit by bit in the Edit Binary dialog box Editing PCFL registers 245 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Type values in other radixes in the supplied text box To get help on a specific PCFL instruction click Inst Help for help on the currently displayed PCFL instruction block function gt To edita binary value 1 Inthe Binary box click the bit you want to change 2 Do one of the following then click OK e Set Click to change the bit to 1 e Reset Click to change the bit to 0 You can also change all the bits at the same time e Set All Click to change all bits to 1 e Reset All Click to change all bits to 0 Editing PCFL input output flags The Input and Output flags of many different PCFL subfunctions are stored in the same register However each subfunction interprets the flags differently When editing Input Output flags the PCFL Editor automatically determines the meaning of each flag for the PCFL subfunction being edited Most PCFL flags use one bit of information and can be set to only two values usually on and off Input flags with more than two settings use multip
111. Authorizing ProWORX NxT f Chapter 1 Welcome To authorize NxT with a hardware key 1 Locate the hardware key and the 31 2 disk labelled NxT Hardware Key Authorization included with your installation package Insert the NxT Hardware Key Authorization disk into your 3 drive From the Windows Explorer or Program Manager run A SETUP or B SETUP The Install Wizard authorizes NxT to run with the key Plug the hardware key into the parallel port also called the LPT1 printer port of your PC This pass through hardware key will not interfere with other devices attached to the port To confirm that your hardware key is working correctly 1 Have the serial number for your copy of NxT ready If you don t know your serial number start NxT then select About on the Help menu to find it 2 Do one of the following e Start NxT then on the Help menu click Authorize Product e From the Windows 95 or NT 4 x Desktop click Start point to Programs then select the folder where you installed NxT ProWORX by default Select Product Authorization e In Windows 3 1 or NT 3 51 double click ea in the Program Group where you installed NxT ProWORX by default The Product Authorization window appears Click Hardware Keys The Hardware Key Viewer checks the key in your PC s parallel port It displays the names serial numbers and options of the products configured on the key Confirm that the
112. Compact controllers Do not attempt the transfer operation if the controller s battery is LOW as the processor contents may be lost This function cannot be performed while the controller is running You must stop the controller first Memory Protect is a switch on your controller that stops you from altering the controller s contents The Memory Protect switch should be ON or the card overwrites memory on power up gt To transfer controller memory to EEPROM 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click EEPROM Flash The Transfer to Compact Controller EEPROM dialog box appears Transfer to Compact Controller EEPROM x Options for A Series Compact Controllers IV After power down restore PLC to previous Run Stop state I Start PLC after download from EEPROM IV Save 4xxxx registers to EEPROM IV Optimized Mode Transfer Cancel Help A series Compact controllers have four enhanced EEPROM options which may be set prior to transferring e After power down restore PLC to previous Run Stop state e Start PLC after download from EEPROM Save 4xxxx registers to EEPROM e Optimized Mode LE When Optimized Mode is selected the controller can t be edited while Online 2 Click Transfer You re prompted to stop the controller if it is currently running Transferring memory contents to controller EEPROM 105 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Transferring m
113. Controller 3 Set Modbus communication parameters for your network The controller must have the same Modbus settings as the computer Set Modbus parameters for your PLC with the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration window e For more information see Controller configuration Ports tab on page 60 e The Modbus Port setting must show the computer port connected to the modem otherwise NxT won t be able to locate it For more information see the Modbus table on page 36 e The Modbus configuration must send exactly 10 bits per data package to your modem Modems generally expect 10 bits in a data package however the Modbus defaults Even parity RTU mode and one stop bit send 11 bits per package Change the Modbus settings to provide 10 bits per data package or NxT will not be able to communicate with the modem Alternatively if your modem supports large data packages you can set its DIP switches to allow 11 bits per data package see your modem s manual These Modbus configurations provide 10 bits per data package Parameters ASCII Mode ASCII Mode RTU Mode Start Bit 1 bit 1 bit 1 bit Data 7 bits 7 bits 8 bits Stop Bits 1 1 bit 1 bit 2 2 bits Parity None 0 bits 0 bits Odd or Even 1 bit Total 10 bits 10 bits 10 bits 4 Choose settings for your modem Modbus communications by modem 39 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Modem Type Specifies the kind of modem connec
114. Controller Configuration window For more information see Controller configuration General tab on page 55 e NxT is set to Program Mode and e The controller is running 98 Configuring the hardware or time of day clock Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller gt To configure the hardware clock 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Hardware Clock The Hardware Clock dialog box appears Hardware Clock xi First Day Of Week SAT e Controller Date Wednesday 06 18 99 Controller Time Computer Date Wednesday 06 18 99 Computer Time 14 11 55 Le 2 In First Day of Week type the day the controller will use as the first day of the week 3 Do one of the following e To synchronize the controller s date and time with your computer click Auto Set In Controller Date type the date in mm dd yy format In Controller Time type the time in hh mm ss format 4 Click OK The Time of Day clock requires eight 4xxxx registers in your controller This register Contains 4xxxx Control information From the left Bit 1 Set Clock Values Bit 2 Read Clock Values Bit 3 Done Bit 4 Error Axxxx 1 Day of the week from 1 to 7 4xxxx 2 Month 4xxxx 3 Day 4xxxx 4 Year Configuring the hardware or time of day clock 99 ProWORX NxT User s Guide This register Contains 4xxxx 5 Hour in 24 hour format 4xxxx 6 Minutes 4xxxx
115. Flush commands Flush Bytes Incl and Excl clear the message buffer The Flush clears all characters Bytes This flush command removes from 1 to 255 bytes from the beginning of the message buffer Incl This flush command clears specific groups of data from 1 to 255 times or until a match is found The terminator value determines how many times the buffer is flushed The controller stops the buffer flushing when it finds a match for the terminating characters Excl 74 Configuring ASCII messages This flush command clears the buffer until a match is found for the terminating character pair It doesn t flush the match characters Excl uses 2 registers the first holds a type identifier and the second hexadecimal values of the terminating pair Hexadecimal values range from 0000 to FFFF The controller searches for this range in the buffer If the second character of the matched pair is not a NUL 00 the next character in the buffer must be equal or the search continues If the last character tests equal or null the flush is performed up to but not including the matched terminators Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller 5 Click Play Back to preview the message as it will appear on a screen on printer output or in a text file on a hard drive 6 Click OK to save your changes or click Cancel to exit without saving your changes gt To delete ASCII messages from a controller 1 Confirm that the controlle
116. Full Brief Register Content Ranges r aS Axxxx None X Config Extensions Oxxxx 1xxxx 7 Full Brief 3xxxx 7 4xxxx Gxxxx File T Data Protect Disable References 1 None Peer Cop 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 None Z None 8 None Segment Scheduler F ASCII Messages 3 None X Traffic Cop 10 Not Avail C Full Brief Visual OK Toggle All Cancel Help 3 Click an option to select or clear it You can set these parameters LE Click Toggle All to select or clear all options e Configuration Extensions Select the configuration extensions to print and whether you want a full or brief printout of the documentation When Full is selected you can also select e Data Protect to print the Data Protect Extension information e Peer Cop to print Peer Cop Extension information e Segment Scheduler Select to print the Segment Scheduler information e ASCII Messages Select to print the ASCII Message information Controller tables 267 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Traffic Cop Select to print the Traffic Cop information and further select Full to print the entire Traffic Cop and any attached documentation e Brief to print the Traffic Cop and a summary of the documentation e Visual to print a graphical representation of the brief option e Address Used Tables Select 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx or 4xxxx address types and select Full to print the addresses used in Logic Pe
117. IT instruction Bin Inserts a binary field a placeholder for a binary number which is defined in ladder logic by a WRIT instruction Hex Inserts a hexadecimal field a placeholder for a hexadecimal number which is defined in logic by a WRIT instruction Oct Inserts an octal field a placeholder for an octal number which is defined in ladder logic by a WRIT instruction Configuring ASCII messages 73 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Tool ASCII Description Inserts an ASCII field a placeholder for ASCII characters defined in ladder logic by a WRIT instruction You can also use this function to send ASCII characters you cannot enter into a text field for example line feeds and tabs Space Inserts from one to 99 consecutive blank spaces These are represented in code by the number of spaces followed by the symbol X for example the code for 42 spaces is 42X Repeat Repeats an item Click Repeat to start the function NxT prompts you for the number repetitions Type the items to repeat then click Repeat again to end the function Control Inserts a three digit decimal control character ranging from 000 255 or a three digit octal control character ranging from 000 377 lt cr gt Inserts a carriage return represented by the symbol Flush The message buffer contains a 256 byte data field These bytes contain data values ranging from 0 to FF hexadecimal The four
118. In TCP IP notation an address is four numbers from 0 through 255 separated by periods for example 10 0 254 68 is a valid path Ifyou do not know the address of a device but you do know the location and name of its database click Select Setup Navigate to the database select it then click OK NxT automatically enters the controller s address in the Device field e If you do not know the address of a device or the name of its database click Net Scan to scan for devices on the network LE Net Scan is not available if you are using TCP IP networking 3 Click OK Once NxT attaches to your controller it displays the Network Editor gt To select a device with a modem connection to a controller or network 1 Do one of the following e From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen on the Controller menu click Select Device e From the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Change Device If your modem is already connected to a network or controller the Select Device dialog box appears Select a Modbus device just as you would with a direct connection Type e A Modbus address 1 to 247 for a controller on the local network 46 Selecting a device on the network When you select a device NxT waits for you to type a phone number and an op tional ber first Use only numbers and these speci Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller e Aone address Modbus routing path if your Modbus
119. In the Non Transfer Start Address field type the starting address of the range of registers that are not to be transferred from the primary controller to the standby This is commonly used to reduce scan time e The first two registers are used in reverse transfer operations These registers allow information to be passed from the standby to the primary controller e The third register is the Status register which stores the status of both controllers This register provides information on how the hot standby system is operating such as the power flow of the CHS instruction position of the controller s A B switch and whether there is a logic mismatch between controllers 82 Quantum Hot Standby extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller All registers following the third register are ignored not transferred during the scan In the Non Transfer Area Length field type the length of the non transfer register range This value can be from 4 through the total number of registers configured in the controller Select one of the following State Ram Transferred options Default 12K All Oxxxx and 1xxxx registers up to 8192 each are transferred e If 10000 or fewer 3xxxx and 4xxxx combined registers are configured then all are transferred e If more than 10000 3xxxx and 4xxxx combined registers are configured then up to 1000 3xxxx registers and all 4xxxx up to a combined total of 10000 are transferred Routine
120. Input Intr Safe B888 100 Datalogic CM1000 AutoID interface B862 001 4 Channel Register Output TTL Level B984 100 High Speed Logic Solver B863 001 4 Channel Register Input TTL Level B984 102 High Speed Logic Solver Quantum cards Card Description Card Description ACI030 00 Analog 8 Channel Unipolar Input DAO840 10 24 115 VAC 16 Output ACO020 00 4 20 mA Analog Output Module DAO842 10 100 230 AC 16 Output Module AMM090 00 Analog In Out 4Ch 2Ch DAO842 20 24 48 VAC 16 Output ARI030 10 8 Channel RTD DDI153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Input Module ATI030 00 8 Channel Thermocouple DDI353 00 24 VDC 32 Input Module AVI030 00 8 Channel Bipolar Analog Input DDI353 10 24 VDC True Low 32 Input Module AVO020 00 Analog Voltage Output Module DDI673 00 125 VDC 24 Point I P Module CHS110 00 Hot Standby DDI841 00 10 60 VDC 16 Input Module CPS 111 115 230V AC Power Supply 3A DDI853 00 10 60 VDC 32 Input Module 378 Quantum cards Appendix F I O Cards Supported Quantum cards Card Description Card Description CPS 114 115 230V AC Power Supply 8A DDM390 00 16 8 Bidirectional 24 VDC CPS 124 115 230V AC Power Supply RED 8A DDM690 00 125 VDC 4 Input 4 Output HPO Module CPS 211 24 V DC Power Supply 3A DDO153 10 5 VDC 4x8 Output Module CPS 214 24 V DC Power Supply 8A DDO353 00 24 VDC 32 Output Module CPS 224 24 V DC Power Supply RED 8A DDO3
121. Macro status ZI ProwORX NxT File Edit View Search Data Controller Configuration Display Tools Help Macro NETWORK 0002 file name N Macro Overview Macro Name D TESTING NXTDB MACRO1 Rec 002 nd aeaiibiial Macrol Macro 3 Parameter Address Symbol descrip RAS A ie REIS PCS 001 g0002 002 00003 003 00305 004 00306 005 00093 101 10033 301 30033 302 30033 401 40023 402 40024 nt ea mapping 3 Descriptor H0002 SC me b 310 The Network Editor s macro overview display Chapter 14 Working with Macros The macro status can be one of three things Rec xxx The macro hasn t been changed since it was inserted into the main logic network Macro has changed The macro has been changed since it was inserted into the main logic network You may want to update the inserted macro to reflect the changes made to the macro database it is linked to See the next section Making changes in macros Macro not found The macro database file either no longer exists or has been moved to a different directory to only to assist customer support with any troubleshooting you might need LE Don t worry about the exact meaning of the numbers in Rec xxx They are just Making changes in macros If you make changes to a macro database after it has been inserted into a main logic network you ll have to update each copy of it within that logic network There may also be times when you wan
122. Manager Deleting a project You can only delete project files from your computer using the Project Manager This can be performed while checking in a project or canceling a check out LE To delete a project from a Server use the Destroy Project feature in fxManager For more information see fxManager s main help gt To delete a project from your local hard drive 1 From the Project Manager select the project you want to delete 2 Click xj or from the File menu select Delete Delete 2 Delete Test 1 from this computer 3 Click Yes The project is removed from your computer Deleting aproject 405 Glossary ProWORX NxT User s Guide Address 1 Onacommunications network the identifying number for a station such as a PLC 2 Inacomputer s or PLC s memory a location where data usually a specific input or output value is stored Address Used Table A list of all I O addresses in a controller indicating which addresses are being used in ladder logic instructions and which are not Analog Inputs such as temperature or outputs such as motor speed which can have a range of values Compare to discrete ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange 1 A way of encoding the standard text the letters numbers etc on your keyboard your computer generates 2 Adata transmission mode for Modbus communications which sends and receives standard text ASCII mode uses 7 dat
123. Memory Register Editor window appears Select the register for the documentation you want to edit Click Doc The Documentation Editor dialog box appears Type your documentation Click OK OF SN gt Todisplay a specific register 1 From the Extended Memory Register dialog box on the Register menu click Goto The Goto Register window appears 2 Type the register 0000 9999 you wish to display 3 Click OK NxT displays the register in the middle row of the window Extended Memory Register editor 149 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To search for a register value 1 From the Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box click Register then click Search The Search for Data dialog box appears Type the five digit decimal value to search for Click OK NxT searches down from the currently selected register for the data value 4 To search for the next occurrence of the value press F3 Extended Memory utilities The Extended Memory utilities let you move or copy register contents You can also fill a block of registers with a data value The difference between a move and a copy is that NxT clears the source registers after a move but does not clear the source registers after a copy You can cancel the move copy or fill operation while it is in progress by clicking Cancel however the register contents that were moved before you cancelled the operation are not reset They remain moved You will have to go to th
124. ProWORX xT User s Guide Version 2 10 31001952 Schneider 4 Electric Welcome Welcome to ProWORX NxT 2 0 About this manual If you are new to Microsoft Windows Installing ProWORX NxT System requirements How to install ProOWORX NxT Registering your product Starting ProWORX NxT Windows 3 1 and Windows NT 3 51 Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 x Authorizing ProWORX NxT Customer support Working with a Database Working with a database Overview Creating a new database Part 1 For both the online and offline editors Part 2 For the offline editor only Opening an existing database Converting an older ProWORX database Editing the setup of a database Saving and deleting a database Deleting a database offline only Backing up and restoring a database offline only Keeping NxT secure Editing the protected register address list Year 2000 compatibility check Setting system preferences Connecting to a Controller Connecting to controllers Overview Setting up communications for your PC Configuring Modbus communications Modbus communications by modem Configuring Modbus Plus communications Configuring Ethernet Gateway communications Configuring TCP IP Communications Selecting a device on the network Table of Contents m SoocnaJJARUUUUNNEN m m p NNNNNNNBPRBRB BBB OSOARNHAKOQUABDALDY ProWORX NxT User s Guide Performing a network scan 4 Configuring a Controller Configuring a controller Controller config
125. RO MAC_1 cess the selected cannot be found in the location specified CGF file and data Processing Macro 2 2 base ERROR C DATABASE MACRO MAC_1 cannot be found in the location specified T ia View CGF Close Help The Log File Viewer displays logged information about a compiled CFG file This information includes e The macro script path and file name e The ProWORx database path and file name e The date and time the macro and database were processed and e Whether the processing was successful or the location of any errors CGF batch file descriptions Below are the descriptions for the formats for a CGF batch file e Mode can be one of three things e lt Create New gt Clears the source database of all documentation and logic and inserts macros at the beginning of the logic e lt Overlay gt Leaves the documentation for the source database but the macro documentation can overwrite the source database s documentation CGF batch file descriptions 315 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e lt Add To gt Leaves the documentation for the source database but the macro documentation that matches the source is ignored e MacroName The file name of the macro you want to insert e PathToMacro The path name to the macro database including the back slash character at the end of the path e ParameterName An identifier for the macro s parameter This can be either the parameter name such as 001 or the
126. RX Symbol FIS files for exchanging symbol and controller address information Spreadsheet Data Interchange Format DIF NxT creates standard DIF files Most spreadsheet programs can this format without difficulty However you must take special care when transferring data to and from Microsoft Excel in DIF files For more information see Appendix E DIF Files and Excel on page 369 dBaselV Database DBF NxT creates standard DBF files for use with Ashton Tate s data management program dBaselV Most other data management and spreadsheet programs including Microsoft Excel can read this format without difficulty When exporting a database to a DBF file each descriptor field and short comment becomes its own record NxT generates nine records for your descriptor fields regardless of how many you have configured in your database 224 Delete documentation Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Traffic Cop TEF Importing a TEF file overwrites the existing Traffic Cop data Exporting creates a TEF file of the current Traffic Cop data NxT requires both the TEF and DEF files to successfully import the documentation If a mismatch occurs between the database and the import file a message box appears displaying the mismatch in yellow gt Toexport database documentation 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Import Export The Import Export dialog box appears Impo
127. RXPLUS users will find the Data Watch Window quite familiar as NxT uses the same 20 row x 3 column display provides address fill operations and imports Full Page TFP files The Data Watch window includes the following views e Data Watch view Used for full page data display tracking and data watch operations The Data Watch window is also used to define the addresses to view or log e Data Logger view Used to record but not edit data values to file and view them Trend view Used to show a graphical representation of data points e Spreadsheet view Used to show multiple data points over time ina spreadsheet form e Graphical view Used to create a graphical representation of register contents and discrete values The Data Watch panel Many of the functions present in the Data Watch View can be used in the Data Watch Panel accessible from the Network Editor The Data Watch Panel provides a convenient place to keep track of data without cluttering the screen with lots of separate windows 2 For more information on the Data Watch panel see page 122 276 Using the Data Watch Window Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window About the Address Contents table The Address Contents table displays the addresses or symbols if Symbolic Addressing has been turned on in the NxT Preferences window In the Trend view each address content pair in the table is assigned a unique color which corresponds with the pen
128. Select Print to file then click OK The Select Print File dialog box appears Navigate to the folder where you want to store the text file 5 Type a file name or choose the default file name then click OK The current data is saved to the file LE By default NxT chooses the name of the current database as the text file name 272 Print to file Chapter 11 Printing Changing the printout font Changing the printout font alters the look of your printout as well as the amount of information you can fit on one page gt To change the font 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears Click Print Setup The Print Setup dialog box appears Adjust the settings as necessary then click OK The Font dialog box appears Font i Lx Font Font style Size Andaleld Mono LineDraw Regular 5 E Courier Courier New F Letter Gothic MT Andaleld Mono LineDra Cancel g Italic Bold Bold Italic Script r Sample Symbol 7 This is a TrueType font This same font will be used on both your screen and your printer 4 Select the font and font size Only True Type fixed spaced fonts can be used in the Lister PrOWORX NxT LE installs the font Andaleld Mono LineDraw which is the recommended True Type font Font style does not affect the look of the printout Changing the printout font 273 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Changing the print setup Yo
129. Selected The Compare dialog box expands File To Controller Compare Compare Settings Master Database a WORXSNXTAT 2 ea IC PROWORXSNATATEST Browse C Compare All Compare To To Eile Browse Compare Selected To Controller Micro 512 1 Select Click the ranges to edit them Select parameters to compare by clicking D oo F Coil Used 00001 00128 them Controller Confiquration X Coil State 00001 00128 X User Loadables Input State 10001 10016 1X Traffic Cop X 3xxxx Registers 30001 30001 X Segment Scheduler X 4uxxx Registers 40001 40109 ASCII Port Parameters f Coil Disable 00001 00128 F ASCII Messages Input Disable 10001 10016 Click to start the comparison Close Help 3 Select the parameters you want to compare The column of parameters on the right require address ranges to be set 4 Click the text box of a range to edit it The Range Selection dialog box appears Range 1 Ronge2 J You can enter up to four ranges per Rane3 parameter 5 Click Start Compare NxT reads the controller s memory or the second database and compares it to the Master database 328 Using the on demand compare function Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function When the comparison is complete the Compare Summary window appears Master Database Compare C PROWORX NXTATEST1 Micro 512 1
130. Server Click to check out a selected project stored on the Server Click to check in a selected project you made changes to Click to undo a check out of a selected project eo ioe we ae Click to update the project list with the latest information on the Server 394 About the Project Manager Appendix G NxT and fxManager Project icons The following icons are displayed next to a project s name both in the Project Manager and fxManager to indicate the status of the project Icon Description ka Indicates the project is presently checked out by you on this computer H Indicates the project is checked out by another user or by you on another computer ka Indicates the project is a local project that was created by you while L disconnected from the Server on this computer You are the only user who can edit the project H Indicates the project is a local project that was created by another user L while disconnected from the Server on this computer Only the user who created this project can edit it About the Project Manager 395 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Working with the Project Manager In this section you ll learn to work with the Project Manager This includes e Checking out a project e Opening a project e Creating a project e Adding a project to an fxManager Server e Checking in a project e Getting a read only copy of a project e Labelling a project
131. Telephone Numbers Entering 47 Terminal Block 800 Quantum A120 183 Time of Day Clock Register for 58 Setting 98 Year 2000 Compatibility 28 Time Slice I O Configuring 56 Timed Comparisons 329 Timer Register Configuring 58 Timer Watch Dog Configuring 58 Title Page Printing Option 269 TOD See Time of Day Clock Toolbar 114 Project Manager 394 Total Messages Configuring 57 Track User Actions 388 Traffic Cop 200 500 Series 197 3xxxx Status Register 191 800 Series 185 900 Series 198 A120 Series 199 Auto Addressing 183 Data Display 182 DCP Series 187 Micro 300 Series 196 Overview 180 444 Index Quantum 190 Card Configuration 193 Interbus S 193 Read Write Status 191 Traffic Cop Display in Network Editor 124 Transferring Controller Memory to EEPROM 105 Transferring Controller Memory to FLASH RAM 106 Tree Control in Configuration Extensions 78 in the Traffic Cop 181 Trend View Data Watch Window 276 290 PID Trend graphs 301 Reading 291 Triggers in the Data Watch Window 284 Tuner Face Plate display 300 U Unary operators 234 Undo 129 Undo a Check Out 404 Unlinking Macros 312 Update Rate Setting 125 Updating macros 311 Updoc Importing Documentation from 221 RF Files 137 140 Template for 142 se Insert Delete Key Menus System Preference 30 Jsed Addresses Checking for 158 in Equation Networks 238 User Configurable Register Editor 137 Display single bit 140 Documenting Registers 139
132. The Register Contents Utilities dialog box appears 3 Select Copy 4 In the following boxes e Source Start Type the first register of the block to be copied Source End Type the last register of the block to be copied e Destination Type the first register of the destination block 5 Click Start 6 When finished click Cancel to close the window gt Tofill a register 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor or Extended Memory The Register Editor dialog box appears 2 From the Register Editor window click File then click Utilities The Register Contents Utilities dialog box appears 3 Select Fill 4 In the following boxes e Range Start Type the first register in the block to be filled e Range End Type the last register in the block to be filled e Fill Value Type the value to place in the contents of each register in the block Click Start 6 When finished click Cancel to close the dialog box g Generic Register editor 157 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Other Network Editor functions Checking for used addresses The Address Used table lists currently used register and discrete addresses and is updated continuously Use the Address Used table to type an address into the assembly register AR or directly into an instruction When Display Traffic Cop Used is cleared addresses are marked only as unused addresses used addresses x or used coils u When Di
133. The Block Save dialog box appears INETWORK 0001 network 1 page title Bypasse Belt 2 Initiate J J O 10028 00212 00001 0908 Xfer Home are ISi Leek 00003 00033 00101 0908 Xfer Belt 2 Start of2 Initiate Reset_Sw Paint 00002 Station 1 00001 40100 Initiate Aer Block File AYM iLk AniS ANA NAT S Type the path and file name of the file to contain the block of cells or click Browse to navigate to the file A default file name is created based on the active database The file must have a BLK extension Click OK If the BLK file exists it s replaced If the file does not exist it s created Transferring logic blocks to and from disk offline only 171 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Loading blocks of logic from disk offline only You can load a block of cells from a BLK file into the active database gt To load a block of cells into the active database 1 2 Click the starting cell where the block is to be inserted On the Edit menu click Blocking then click Load The Block Load window appears Block File Browse Oxxxx Source H Dest Txxxx Source Dest 3xxxx Source H Dest Axx Source Dest X Load Descriptors X Load Register Contents OK Cancel Help Type the path and file name with a BLK extension of the block file to load or click Browse to
134. Trend View 276 290 Reading 291 Triggers 284 Database Path System Preference 32 Database Setup Creating a New Database 13 Editing an Existing Database 19 Databases Backing Up 22 Comparing 325 Converting Older 17 Copying 21 Creating 13 Deleting 21 Documenting 207 Editing the Setup of 19 Exporting Documentation 224 Files Making up 352 Importing Documentation 221 Opening an Existing 17 Overview of 12 Printing 262 Rebuilding 175 Restoring 22 Saving 21 Security for 24 Working with 12 Year 2000 Compatibility check for 28 DBF Files Exporting Documentation to 224 Importing Documentation from 222 DCP Drop ID Configuring 56 Delete key accessing Delete menu System Preference 30 Deleting Columns 170 Configuration Extensions 79 Instructions in Logic 132 Networks 170 Records 217 220 Rows 170 Deleting a Database 21 Descriptor Summary in Equation Networks 238 Descriptors Entering 216 Importing 223 in Documentation 208 Overlaying 223 Setting Color of 119 Dial Chat dialog 49 DIF Files and Excel 370 Exporting Documentation to 224 Importing Documentation From 222 DIO See Distributed I O Disabled Addresses Displaying 174 Disabled Coils Searching for 165 Disabling Forcing Discretes in the Data Watch Window 286 Disconnected Work from fxManager 392 Display Editor for New Instructions System Preference 30 Displays Customizing 120 Colors 119 Views 117 Distributed I O 190 DIO Read Write Status 191 Doc
135. V defined 298 Program Functions Mnemonics 347 Program Mode Online Editor 127 Project Adding to fxManager 400 Checking In 402 Checking Out 396 Creating 398 Getting a Read Only Copy 403 Icons 395 Labelling 403 Opening 397 Project Manager Checking In a Project 402 Checking Out Projects 396 Getting a Read Only Copy of a Project 403 Labelling a Project 403 Layout 393 Opening 393 Opening Projects 397 Toolbar 394 Undoing a Check Out 404 Prompt for Read When Exiting Online System Preference 31 Prompt when Deleting Instructions System Preference 31 Prompt When Overwriting Instructions System Preference 31 ProWORX ASCII FIL Files 221 224 ProWORX NxT Audit Trail Settings 390 Authorizing 8 Installing 3 Permissions 386 Starting 5 System Requirements 3 Working with fxManager 384 ProWORX Symbol FIS Files 221 224 PV Index 441 ProWORX NxT User s Guide See Process Variable Q Quantum Configuring Cards 193 Terminal Block 183 Quantum Hot Standby Configuration Extension 82 Quick Picks Printing Options 270 R RI O Health Monitoring 319 Racks 180 Radix Display Single Bit for Registers 140 Editing for Registers 140 148 in the Data Watch Window 282 Read Flash RAM Executive 109 Read Write Status in Quantum Traffic Cop 191 Reading from a Controller 102 Read Type 102 Rebuilding a Database 175 Records See Documenting Redo 129 Register Editor Extended Memory 148 Generic 152 PCFL Editor 244 User Conf
136. a VME network Profibus Configures a Quantum controller for Profibus communications SY MAX Configures a Quantum controller for communication with SY MAX drops Cyclic Data Exchange Allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a TCP IP network Using configuration extensions 77 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To add a Configuration Extension 1 The Tree Area shows the exten sions you have installed Click an extension to show its parameters in the Details Area The Information Area shows the amount of memory in machine words the extension currently uses From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears N Config Extensions Losy Card Number i Configuration Extensions x Head Number Internet Address Sub Network Mask Gateway Address Framing Type Words Used 00101 00128 OK Cancel i 255 96 0 12 0 10 10 97 9 114 231 3 Ethernet II 10 10 10 19 4 zj The dialog box is divided into three areas Configure the extension in the Details Area e Tree Control Shows the extensions are already configured for this controller e Details Displays extension specific parameters e Information Displays the machine words of memory used out of total words allocated Click Add Extension or right click in the Tree Control area then select
137. a bits while RTU mode uses 8 ASCII Message A text message transmitted or received by a programmable controller These messages are sent to or from a terminal through an ASCII port Assembly Register A register that accepts keyboard input for command and value entry in the Network Editor Attaching to Also called selecting Connecting your PC to a programmable controller so NxT can read its ladder logic Traffic Cop information and configuration and write changes back to it 408 Glossary of Terms Glossary Baud Rate For serial communications the speed in bits per second at which data is transmitted BCD Binary coded decimal Binary The base two numbering system It has two symbols 1 representing on and 0 off Bit The smallest amount of information in binary either a 1 or a 0 Bits per second The number of bits passed from one device to another in one second Used to measure data transmission speed Block A section of ladder logic which is defined while using the Network Editor This block can be copied deleted saved moved and loaded BM85 A Bridge Multiplexer BPS Bits per second BP85 A Bridge Plus Glossary of Terms 409 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Bridge Multiplexer Allows you to connect up to four Modbus devices or networks of Modbus devices to a Modbus Plus network Nodes on the Modbus Plus network can access slave devices connected to the BM85 Modbus por
138. abase s files gt To save a copy of a database 1 3 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Save As The Save As dialog box appears Type a path and file name for the database To save your copy in the same folder as the original database give the copy a different name Click OK NxT saves a copy of your database Deleting a database offline only Deleting a database erases all database files including logic traffic cop information and documentation You can only delete a database while offline gt To delete a database 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or the Offline Network Editor on the File menu click Delete Type the name of the database file in File Name or browse to the database file you want to delete Click OK Saving and deleting a database 21 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Backing up and restoring a database offline only The Database Backup function compresses a copy of all the files making up a database to a single ZIP file The Restore function expands a previously compressed ZIP file into a usable set of database files Use the Database Backup Restore function to create a small copy of a database to store for example on removable media The Save As command can also create a copy of a database but it does not compile the database s files into one file or compress them The Database Backup and Restore functions are not available while you have a database open
139. ady exist You can select these items to include in your printout NNNN R L Normally Open Contact NNNN R I Normally Closed Contact NNNN R Coil NNNN R S XXXX function block Source name NNNN R D XXXxX function block Destination name NNNN R P XXXX function block Pointer name You can select ranges for address types 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx and 4xxxx as well as ranges for networks and subroutines The maximum range value you can enter for 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx and 4xxxx is the maximum value currently set in your controller configuration The maximum range for networks is the number of networks that have been programmed and the maximum range for subroutines depends on the controller type If the controller you are using supports extended memory you have the choice of selecting a range for 6xxxx There are up to 10 extended memory files available for 6xxxx Use the files your controller has configured for you 266 Documentation tables Chapter 11 Printing Controller tables The Controller Tables consist of controller configuration information such as the configuration extensions you have installed as well as the Address Used Tables and Register Contents for 4xxxx address types gt To activate the Controller Tables 1 On the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears 2 Click Controller Tables The Controller Tables dialog box appears ar aoa Used
140. al I O Remote I O and Peer to peer Communications I O that is installed away from the PLC over a wide area and communicates with it through a Modbus Plus network One Quantum controller can support up to three distributed I O networks each with up to 64 drops The local rack houses a DIO processor for each network which sets the network s head number Documentation A description of a controller s memory logic and configuration The descriptors short comments long comments and page titles within a database Documentation Editor The editor in which descriptors short comments long comments and page titles can be entered and modified Double Precision A 32 bit format which uses two registers to store numerical values Drop A group of I O cards physically connected together as an I O network A controller reads information from the drop solves logic then writes results to the drop in one segment of ladder logic The Segment Scheduler controls the order in which drops are serviced Duplicate Coil An output coil address which has been assigned to more than one coil EEPROM Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory Element A ladder logic instruction such as a coil timer or short 414 Glossary of Terms Glossary Enable To allow a PLC based on the logic programmed into it to update the state of a coil or input Equation Network A special section of logic that lets the programmer so
141. ample you can select records associated with addresses 40125 through 40150 and move them to 40250 When complete new records are created containing the documentation from the source range of records for 40250 through 40275 The records associated with 40125 through 40150 are deleted If records exist for any of the destination range records they are overwritten with the new documentation data You can also move documentation from one type of database record to another for example N0001 to 00001 If you move delete or add new records to the database click Cleanup when you ve finished to eliminate empty records in the database structure Documentation utilities 219 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Copy documentation Copy Records works the same as Move except the source records are not deleted They retain their original contents only copies of the documentation text are placed into the new range of records gt To copy documentation records 1 On the Display menu click Documentation Utilities 2 If Copy is not the selected function click Copy 3 Type the starting address of the source range in Source Range Start The Source Range End is automatically entered To move more than one record change the Source Range End 4 Click Start The Copy operation makes an identical copy of the source records without changing the source records in the new location Delete documentation Delete Documentation lets you remove docume
142. an initiate data transfer PLC Programmable Logic Controller also known simply as a controller Power Flow In logic an instruction is highlighted if it solves true and passes power All instructions upstream of it to its left in the Traffic Cop display must also be passing power Preset The maximum value a timer or counter can have Processor A programmable logic controller Program For PLCs a set of ladder logic instructions contained in a set of NxT files a database Glossary of Terms 421 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Programmable Logic Controller An industrial control computer ProWORX Function A ProWORX command or operation Quick Print A function that allows you to print a network to a printer with or without documentation Rack A collection of up to 16 I O modules mounted in one back plane Radix The base system of a value The radix of decimal numbers is 10 the radix of binary numbers is 2 and the radix of hexadecimal numbers is 16 In PrOWORX NxT the term radix sometimes refers to a value s data type binary integer floating point and so on RAM Random Access Memory Random Access Memory Memory that holds programs while they are being executed Read Only Memory Memory that is not erased by a power failure and that is programmed at the factory to hold vital information This memory cannot be changed 422 Glossary of Terms Glossary Remote I O RIO One of four
143. anager Server Appendix G NxT and fxManager Audit Trail doesn t log actions that occur in a local project To log actions check project in to the Server the next time you log on in connected mode 2 For more information on local projects see fxManager s online help To add a project the fxManager permission EditProjectList for your group must be set to True See your administrator if this permission is set to False gt To add a project to a Server 1 In the fxManager tab of the Navigator right click on the jia ProWORX NxT folder Select Add The Add Project dialog box appears Add Project x Enter the name of the project passenger door conveyor Enter the path and name of the NxT database fe prowors nat doors conyveyor mdf E M Check out Comment This database project operates the passenger door conveyor Cancel Type a project name for the NxT database 32 character maximum Type the path and NxT database file name or click l to browse Do one of the following e Select the Check Out check box to edit the project or add groups to the project once it s added to the Server e Clear the Check Out check box to add the project to the Server without editing it further Type a comment 256 character maximum for the new project Click OK The project is copied to the Server computer and the Administrators group is assigned to the new project This allows a
144. and To boxes Click Add The new range is added to the list displayed in the Protected Ranges box gt To secure registers in a specific database 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen on the File menu click Security Click Edit List The Edit Protected Registers dialog box appears Select Protect Specific Database Type the path and file name of the database you want or click Browse to navigate to it Type the first address of the range in the From box Type the last address of the range in the To box 26 Editing the protected register address list Chapter 2 Working with a Database The protected address ranges apply regardless of which if any database is currently open and of whether ProoWORX NxT is online or offline Thus you must enter an entire six digit address in the From and To boxes 7 Click Add The new range is added to the list displayed in the Protected Ranges box gt To remove a range of addresses from the list 1 Inthe Protected Ranges box select the range to be deleted 2 Click Delete Editing the protected register address list 27 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Year 2000 compatibility check The Year 2000 Y2K Compatibility Check checks your databases to see if it will function correctly after midnight Dec 31 1999 The Y2K problem occurs because most early software stored only the last two digits of years to conserve memory Normally this works fine since the computer revolution h
145. ap Appendix A Mnemonics Configurable mnemonics Appendix B File Extensions File extensions Database files Controller memory files Report files Loadables Additional files 305 306 308 308 309 310 311 313 313 315 317 318 318 322 323 325 326 326 329 333 339 340 340 342 344 347 348 351 352 352 352 353 353 353 Table of Contents Appendix C Modbus Cable Kit 355 The Modbus cable kit 356 IBM AT or PS 2 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 356 IBM AT to Modicon 984 x80 or x85 Quantum or Compact Series 356 IBM AT to Modicon 584 357 IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 357 IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 984 x80 or x85 Quantum or Compact Series 357 IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 584 357 Using other computers 358 Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams 359 Cable wire diagrams 360 25 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 9 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 360 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 cable 362 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 362 25 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 9 Pin Serial to Modicon E Series Quantum or Compact 363 25 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 9 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 364 25 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 modem 365 9 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 modem 365 IBM 5531 to Modicon 984A 984B
146. appears on the right Column entries list the 7 number of a network in one database and its condition in the other Entry 4 for example says that Network 8 in the master database does not exist in the con troller In the Compare Summary window select Networks and click View or double click Networks The Network Compare window appears Network Compare x Master Database TEST3 Compare Micro 512 Mast vs Comp Mast vs Comp Mast ys Comp Mast vs Comp Mast vys Comp 0001 BLANK NOTFND 0013 0005 SIM 0005 0007 BLANK 0008 NOT FND 0009 MOV 0008 0010 MOV 0009 0011 MOV 0010 0012 MOV 0011 0013 MOV 0012 0014 NOT FND NOT FND 0001 NOT FND 0007 Not Found Print Close Help Network Compare reports the following errors Blank One database has logic in a network while the other has nothing The Compare function lists the number of the mismatching network Moved Identical logic appears in both databases but in different networks The Compare function lists both network numbers 334 Using the Compare Summary window Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function e Similar Closely matching but not identical logic appears in the same network in both databases The Compare function lists the network number e Not found Logic in one database doesn t appear in the other The Compare function lists the number of the network containing the logic These errors oft
147. ar Many common Network Editor functions are available from the toolbar The toolbar s buttons depend on whether you are working online or offline and whether there is an active database Possible toolbar buttons are New Open 114 Using the Network Editor Seg 0 Net 0001 0034 Words Used 01090 07265 Program Marks 00 olx A m F The Panel bar lets you 5 display or hide the five Solis erem Side panels the Data Back Refereace D 01 R 3 04 Watch online only In struction List Back Ref erencing Symbol List and Traffic Cop panels 410001 DOn 10002 OFF 10003 OF 10004 off 10005 OFF toogi 10007 orf 10008 OFF SSNS Move the display be tween networks with this scroll bar If the entire network can be dis played at once this is the only active scroll bar 10010 off toon orf 10012 off 10013 OFF 10014 orf 10015 off 10016 OFF SSESSSSSE J Drawing If the current network doesn t fit in the screen a scroll bar appears here 22 a cl Creates a new database Opens an existing database Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Print E Prints the active network Cut Moves the selected cells or text in a field to the d clipboard Copy a Copies the selected cells or text in a field to the clipboard Paste A Pastes the cells or text in the clipboard into the B selected cells in
148. ar or block which indicates a position on the screen Generally the cursor is located where something can be inserted or selected Database A group of files sharing a common name but different file extensions where the ladder logic program and descriptor data for a controller is stored Data Bits The bits in a data package which carry a message distinct from start bits stop bits and parity bits Remote Terminal Unit mode the Modbus default communication mode sends 8 data bits per package ASCII mode sends 7 data bits per package Glossary of Terms 411 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Data Contents A printout showing the data values in a ladder logic program Data Register A 4xxxx holding output register DCP 908 A distributed control processor providing intelligent bidirectional communication between a supervisory 984 controller and distributed 984 controllers DCP Drop ID A distributed control processor drop address It is equivalent to the drop number used by the DCP Decimal The base 10 number system It consists of the symbols 0 through 9 Default A value automatically assigned by the computer in a software program Usually this value can be changed Descriptor Field One of up to nine text strings which are a short description of an address within a ladder logic program Descriptors A short description of an address within a ladder logic program A number of descriptor fields Descriptor Reco
149. are Time Delay Set the time delay between network scans with the Hours Minutes Seconds fields e AutoPrint Select to print changes in controller health as they occur e Restart Monitor Click to reset the LAN Monitor s logs and timer The LAN Monitor deletes the old controller logs then immediately begins scanning your network for controllers just as it does when the LAN Monitor first opens e View Log Click to see the changes in the controller s health status bits Viewing a controller s health log The LAN Monitor records changes in health status words for each controller and its I O and R I O The changes are listed in the View Log window In it you can select changes in health status words to see in detail or delete the log gt To view a controllers health log 1 Do one of the following e From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Tools menu click Monitor then click View Status The Open Monitor File dialog box appears Type the path and file name of the file to view or navigate to it Click OK e From the Monitor LAN window select a controller s log then click View Log The View Log dialog box appears Log Date Time _ Word Description l 05 02 1997 13 54 25 0000 Drop 01 Rack 1 Slot 02 Health Bad 05 02 1997 Drop 01 Rack 1 Slot 06 Health Bad 05 02 1997 S908 Status has changed 05 02 1997 Cable A Framing Error Count changing 05 02 1997 Cable A DMA Overrun Cou
150. ary coded decimal 8 Click OK gt To view the data for a reference address 1 Inthe Tree Control click the Specific I O to edit The Specific Input and Specific Output appear in the Details area of the window 2 Inthe Specific Output or Specific Input box select a reference and click Data Data associated with the reference address appears This is a read only function you cannot edit the data 94 Peer Cop extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Clearing and deleting links There are two different functions available to reset or remove links e Clearing links deletes all Global I O and Specific I O entries within a link but does not delete the link itself e Deleting a link removes the link itself from Peer Cop gt To clear all references within a link keeping the link in the Peer Cop extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears 2 Inthe Tree Control area select the Peer Cop link you want to clear You can click the link itself or the Global I O or Specific I O in the link 3 Click Clear Link NxT will prompt you to confirm the operation Click OK gt To delete a link from the Peer Cop extension LE You cannot delete Link 1 the internal link 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears 2 Do one of the following
151. as a routing path using its internal Address Map or Implicit Attach Addressing Click Hangup to terminate a connection NxT automatically hangs up if you type a new number and click Dial or exit NxT Hanging up can take up to three seconds e Ifyou have selected Dial Chat as your Modem Type the Dial Chat window appears Nee If NxT connects to your network but the Select Device dialog does not appear rq your network or modem may be expecting a password Try changing your modem type to Dial Chat then connect again For more information see Choose settings for your modem on page 39 4 To terminate a connection click Hangup NxT disconnects you from the controller This process can take up to three seconds 48 Selecting a device on the network Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller gt To type a password in the Dial Chat window as NxT connects to your network through a modem It lets you type a password b If you ve selected Dial Chat as your modem type the Dial Chat window appears so you can log on to your network For more information see Choose settings for your modem on page 39 Dial Chat x BOA CONNECT 9600 The first line displays _ CONNECT 9 information about the connection NxT sends each letter to the modem as you type it You cannot correct a mistake by pressing BACKSPACE or DELETE or overwrite an error by moving the cursor back using the a
152. as so far taken place in the same century However when the turn of the millennium occurs anon 2K compliant software program will think that the current year stored as 00 is older than the previous year stored as 99 gt To check databases for Year 2000 Compatibility 1 From the Network Editor on the Tools menu click Y2K Compatibility 2 Click Browse and navigate to the directory containing databases you want to check 3 Click Check DB s All databases in the chosen directory are tested Databases that are Y2K compliant are marked as Yes in the Year 2000 Compliant column Databases that might not be Y2K compliant are marked with Suspect eee The Year 2000 Compatibility Check works by checking whether a database uses H a Time of Day clock marking those that do as Suspect Thus a Suspect database will not necessarily fail to work at the turn of the century it s just that the possibility exists 4 You can click Print to send a report of the results to the default printer 5 Click Close when you re finished 28 Year 2000 compatibility check Chapter 2 Working with a Database Setting system preferences You can change several of NxT s configuration settings in the system Preferences dialog box These options affect how NxT works with databases and how it behaves when it starts up gt Toconfigure your preferences 1 From the Title Screen or Network Editor on the File
153. atabase The five character Ladder Doctor names are imported into the first descriptor field of the NxT database and the eight character descriptions fill the remaining three fields Delete documentation 221 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Spreadsheet Data Interchange Format DIF You can import DIF files created by spreadsheets as your database documentation However you must take special care when importing databases from Microsoft Excel For more information see Appendix E DIF Files and Excel Spreadsheet descriptors overwrite all information in the first nine descriptor fields of your NxT database If your database has fewer than nine descriptor fields an error message appears during the import process To change the number of fields in your database on the File menu click Utilities then click Database Setup For more information see Editing the setup of a database on page 19 dBaselIV Database DBF You can import DBF files created by dBaselV or other data management and spreadsheet programs including Microsoft Excel For best results configure the DBF file for nine descriptor fields before you import it into NxT regardless of how many descriptor fields your database uses Although you will not receive an error message during the import if the DBF has fewer fields its short comments may become garbled When you import a DBF file you can choose to add the new information to your database without over
154. atus Register 1 Inthe Status area of the Traffic Cop window click Edit The Quantum Drop Status dialog box appears Quantum Drop Status x 3xxxx status registe OK 2 Type the register to store the controller status bits then click OK If you are using the Quantum Series Traffic Cop and you are using Distributed I O DIO you can set the directions in which 3xxxx status register information travels To activate the DIO Read Write Status on the tree control click the appropriate distributed drop gt To set the read write status 1 Inthe Status area of the Traffic Cop window click Edit The Quantum Drop Status dialog box appears Quantum Drop Status x 3xxxx status register Read Write Drop C Read Only Drop OK 2 Select one of the following then click OK e Read Write Drop Data is passes both to and from the drop and the DIO processor e Read Only Drop Data is passed only from the drop to the DIO processor Quantum Traffic Cop 191 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt Toinsert a slot rack or drop 1 Inthe Traffic Cop dialog box click Insert NxT displays the Insert Traffic Cop Item dialog box 2 Select the item to insert and where it should be placed Insert before Currently selected item is shifted right slot or down rack or drop Insert after Items after below the currently selected item are shifted You can press the INSERT and DELETE keys to i
155. ayed in the Title Bar in the format Drop Rack Slot Drop 4 Rack 1 Slot 5 x Length 2 cera 5 In Address type the starting address for the Local Address table In a DCP system registers are automatically exchanged between the supervisory PLC and the distributed control drop The supervisory PLC writes Oxxxx or 4xxxx information to the distributed drop and reads 1xxxx or 3xxxx information from the distributed drop This step sets the registers to be used for the exchange 6 In Length type the length in words of the Local Address table ProWORX NxT automatically sets the remote address to the length corresponding to the word length entered for the Local Address Addresses 300001 and 300002 are reserved for the Option State and Write Count respectively 7 Click OK DCP Series Traffic Cop 189 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Quantum Traffic Cop Quantum I O can be set up for Local I O or Remote I O RIO In addition Distributed I O DIO is controlled via the Modicon Modbus Plus network Like other Modicon I O Quantum I O is organized based on drops and racks However in addition to drop number and rack number Quantum I O devices also have a head number Since Quantum controllers can have up to four I O systems one RIO and three DIO each I O system is given a head number The head number is the slot where the card is located on the local rack where the I O system is connected DIO Processor RIO Proce
156. boundary The address table is automatically provided if you have selected Auto Addressing Some cards have other values which are configured at this level Selecting a MSB101 00 Motion Inc Enc For example to toggle between BIN and BCD Configuring Quantum cards Most Quantum cards require additional parameters to configure gt To configure card specific options 1 From the Quantum Traffic Cop select the card to configure 2 Click Card Config The Card Configuration dialog box appears Head 00 Drop 01 Rack 1 Slot 02 Card Configuration x EHC 202 High Speed Counter Number of counters output assertion 2x16 with Output x Comm lost output assert override Off M Counter 1 Mode Control Incremental x Output Coil 1A mode Setpoint M Output Coil 1B mode Setpoint M Counter 2 Mode Control Output Coil 2A mode Setpoint M Output Coil 2B mode Setpoint M Counter Mode Parameters 2x16 with Output 1x32 with Output 2x32 No Output Rate Sample Mode Cancel Terminal 3 Type or select the card specific parameters then click OK Consult the card s manual for details For example Setting up an Interbus S NOA611 00 Card in the Quantum Traffic Cop Quantum Traffic Cop 193 ProWORX NxT User s Guide ProWORX NxT supports Interbus S I O devices through a Quantum NOA611 00 Card NxT communicates with a Quantum controller which relays information to and from the NOA611 00 The card then
157. cified interval time When the time expires NxT performs the comparison again then resets the timer 2 To stop the Compare function click Stop Compare To view a compare log for an entry in the Timed Compare list 1 Inthe Timed Compare window select the entry to view 2 Click View The Compare Summary dialog box appears 332 Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function Using the Compare Summary window When a comparison is complete the Compare Summary window appears Master Database Compare C PROWORX NXTATEST1 Micro 512 1 Click a miscompare Print Section Miscompares Print Section Miscompares Select the miscom summary to select it i N Sa ae a ea pare summaries then click View to see E se P Cites ae Print boxes then details x Controller Configuration es x Coil State o click Print Selected x User Loadables No x Input State No to print their details x Traffic Cop No x Input Register Contents No x Segment Scheduler No x Holding Register Contents Yes x ASCII Port Parameters N A x Coil Disable No x ASCII Messages N A x Input Disable No Print Selected Close Help Press TAB then the arrow keys to move the selection bar to the miscompare to view Press ENTER to view it Press SPACEBAR to select or clear its Print box To print the results of the comparison 1 Inthe Compare Summary dialog box click the miscompares
158. click Add Imported Descriptor to Database e To overwrite the database s existing descriptors with new ones from the imported file click Overlay Imported Descriptors Empty fields in the imported file will not erase descriptors in the open database e To erase all descriptors from the open database except those from the imported file click Create New Database Using Imported Descriptors 6 Click Start The documentation is imported into your database Delete documentation 223 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Exporting database documentation from ProWORX NxT You can export descriptors and comments from your database to an ASCII file You can then edit your documentation in the word processor or spreadsheet program you use This function does not export controller logic OG For information about exporting logic see Saving blocks of logic to disk of fline only on page 171 ProWORX NxT exports documentation in a database to these formats ProWORX ASCII FIL files for exchanging data easily By default NxT creates this type of file for documentation When exporting information to a ProWORX ASCII file you can choose whether you want the data written to the file sequentially slower to create but generally less confusing to edit because the information is in order or randomly faster to create but sometimes more confusing to edit because the information in whatever order NxT finds it ProWO
159. click in the toolbar e From the Title Screen on the Controller menu click Select Device then click Select Setup The Open window appears 2 Type the path and file name of the database then click OK NxT lists the last nine databases you have opened at the bottom of the File menu You can open any database from the list by clicking its name Converting an older ProWORX database ProWORX NxT includes a stand alone utility for converting logic in ProWORxX and older ProoWORXPLUS databases to NxT s format Databases from ProWORXPLUS v1 40 or later are fully compatible with NxT and do not require conversion The Import Export command found on the File menu under Utilities does not import logic into ProWORX NxT only documentation For more information see Importing database documentation into ProWORX NxT on page 221 Opening an existing database 17 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To convert logic to the NxT The database you select receives data from the converted file It will be completely overwritten 1 Click Start point to Programs then to ProOWORX and click Ped NxTConv The NxT Convert Utility dialog box NxT Convert Utility x Update old ProwORX database to NxT Convert Modsoft database to NxT Convert Updoc database to NxT Convert NxT database to Prow ORX Convert to a Macro Select a database for the source This field appears for conversions
160. ction BLKM Bottom 0001 Used Valid Address Types Doc Editor 00001 00497 Summary e An entry field for each instruction node The number of nodes you can edit depends upon the instruction Click Inst Help for details on a particular instruction 130 Editing instructions in logic Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor e Valid Address Types for the selected entry field e The function name Click the box of the node to edit For each node type the address symbol if the Use Symbols option is selected in the system Preferences or value e If the value begins with a pound sign NxT assumes you are entering a value rather than an address e Ifyou type a non numeric character or a value outside of 0 9 in an address field NxT assumes you are entering a symbol and allows up to 32 characters in the field e Click Doc Editor to open the Documentation Editor to edit the instruction s documentation e NxT also provides a table showing which addresses and coils are used To display the table click Used You can double click an address in the table to type it in the selected instruction node If the Address Used table does not appear then it hasn t been built yet From the LE Display menu click Used Table For more information on the Address Used Table see page 158 e To edit or display documentation for this instruction click Summary 4 Click OK gt To edita multiple subfunction inst
161. ction Instructions 131 MUX Files 340 N Network Display Setup 117 Network Color Setup 119 Network Cursor Setup 120 Network Editor 113 297 About 114 Back Referencing Panel 120 Bookmarks See Bookmarks Creating a New Database 13 Customizing Colorsin 119 Customizing the Cursor in 120 Customizing Views in 117 Data Watch Panel 122 Deleting Items in 170 Documenting a Database 207 Inserting items in 170 Instruction List 121 Moving Segments Across Boundaries 136 Online Editing Modes 127 Opening a Database 17 Redoing aCommand 129 Restricting Access to 24 Segment Scheduler 134 Symbol Summary Panel 121 Traffic Cop Display 124 Undoing aCommand 129 Update Rate Setting 125 Network Editor Cursor 120 Setting Color of 119 Network Index Printing Option 269 Network Miscompares Printing 336 Viewing 334 Network Scan 50 Networks Deleting 170 Inserting 170 Moving Across Segment Boundaries 136 Printing 262 Printing Options 264 NxT Convert Utility 18 NXTCONV EXE Utility Converting Older Databases 17 O Offline Edit Mode Online Editor 127 Offline Editor 113 297 Changes made in 12 On Demand Compare Function 326 One Line Doc Window Enabled System Preference 31 One Line Documentation Window 211 Online Editor 113 297 Changes made in 12 Editing Modes 127 Sweep 175 Online Mode System Preference 31 Opcodes Editing for User Loadables 70 Opening fxManager 392 Project Manager 393 Projects 397 Opening an Exist
162. d forwards from the Index value For example suppose the source controller is broadcasting 10 words of data using the Global Output function but the receiving controller only uses words 3 to 7 You would type an Index value of 3 and a Length of 5 The length plus the index must be less than or equal to 33 In the Reference field type the destination for the received data i e where the received data is to be stored Select either BIN default or BCD One entry is available for each device 1 64 Each device s global data can also be received in sections determined by Subfields You can define a subfield for each block of the broadcast data that you want the controller to receive while ignoring the remainder gt To edit subfields 1 From the Configuration Extensions dialog box select the Global I O of the link you want to edit by clicking it Click the global input you want to edit from the Global Input area of the Configuration Extensions window Click Subfields The Global Input Subfields window appears with a list of the subfields for the selected input Select the subfield you want to edit Do one of the following e Select a subfield and click Edit e Double click the subfield The Global Input dialog box appears when you Type the new global input parameters Optional Click Data to view the data currently in the input registers 92 Peer Cop extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Specif
163. d on the Server e Clear the Check out check box to add the new project to the Server without editing it further 6 Type a comment or description for the new project 256 character maximum 7 Click OK The project is created on the Server computer and the Administrators group is assigned to the new project This allows an administrator to set up groups users and permissions for the project 8 Configure the controller addresses from which a user can launch the NxT project online For more information on configuring these properties see below Aai y Once you create a new project on a Server its a good idea to also add groups H to the project to allow users access to it Configuring the controller address selection lists The Controller Address Selection dialog box contains lists of possible controller addresses to which ProWORX NxT Online can connect If you have the EditProjectList permission you can edit the selections in fxManager The ModbusAddress ModbusPlusRouting and TCPIPAddress properties of an NxT project managed by a Server hold the controller addresses for that project Each choice is composed of an address a slash character and a description of that address If more than one address is configured the addresses are separated by a semicolon Example 1 Editing selections for the Modbus list If the property ModbusAddress of an NxT project is set to 1 Modbus Port 1 3 Modbus Port
164. d or Cut Record operation Paste overwrites only the enabled fields of the currently selected reference with the exception of the Symbol and MMI fields You can paste the same record into multiple references Delete Record Deletes all the documentation for the current record gt To insert text from one reference into another reference e o N Type the reference to copy in the Navigate By entry field Select the text to copy and press CTRL C Type the reference where you want to paste the text Select the documentation field you want to paste the text into and press CTRL V You can paste text into multiple references by selecting one reference at a time and repeating Step 4 Moving copying and deleting multiple records 217 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 218 gt Tocopy along comment number into multiple records 1 Type the reference where the Long Comment is located Remember the number of the Long Comment you want to tie to the different references The number is located in the entry field beside Next Available Click a to find the reference where you want to associate the Long Comment to In Long Comment type the Long Comment number Press TAB or click out of the entry field As soon as you select another reference number the Long Comment is automatically tied to the previously selected reference gt To copy along comment 1 OY E 9 From the Long Comment box select the text to copy Press CTRL C
165. dds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd Odd Parity or even Even Parity If parity is set to None the check bit is not added The PC and controller must use the same parity Default is even Mode Selects a communications mode for the port RTU or ASCII The default is RTU Priority Determines the order in which the BM85 checks the ports with 1 the highest priority and 4 the lowest All ports must have different priorities Link Timeout Sets the maximum time in multiples of 100 milliseconds that the BM85 waits for slave devices to respond to commands before it sends an error message Modem Booster Determines whether the BM85 maintains a dedicated connection to a slave device until it completes a command or transparently processes other network traffic while it waits This option is not available unless the port type is set to Network Note that this option should be set to No for ports attached to 584 controllers operating in SAFE84 Mode To configure the Modbus Ports of a BM85 1 For each port select or type the parameter values using the parameter descriptions above Click Load File to load a MUX file from your disk The Select MUX Setup File window appears Type the path and file name of the MUX file or navigate to it then click OK NxT loads the MUX file Click Save File to save the current port settings into a MUX file The Save MUX File window appears Do the following
166. djusting the Set Point 301 Auto vs Manual mode 300 301 Documentation Editor shortcut 299 PID display features 299 PID Summary display 302 PID Tuner Face Plate display 300 PID View Networks display 303 Register Editor shortcut 299 Trend graphs 301 Viewing 299 PID Summary display 302 PID Tuner Face Plate display 300 PID View Networks display 303 PLCs Changing Type of 66 Connecting to Ethernet Gateway 42 Modbus 35 Modbus Plus 41 Modems 37 Overview 34 TCP IP 42 Editing Hardware Details of 65 Initializing Logicin 104 Monitoring Health of 317 Networks 322 One Device 318 Viewing Status Words 321 Ports Configuring 60 Reading from 102 Scanning for 50 Selecting 44 Setting the Type of 64 Simple ASCII Ports 62 Starting 111 Stopping 110 Writing to 103 Ports Assignments for Micro 62 Ports Simple ASCII 62 Postfix Codes 253 Postfix Entry Mode 252 Power and Power State Flow Viewing 125 Power Flow Setting Color of 119 Power Flow Size Setting 119 Preferences Setting and Changing 29 Print Setup Changing 274 Print to File 272 Printer Font Changing 273 Printing Also see Lister Controller Tables 267 Documentation Tables Cross References 265 Font Changing 273 Formatting a Printout 269 from Register Editors 140 155 Miscompares 333 Mismatch Tables 268 Network Miscompares 336 Network Options 264 Networks 262 Print Setup Changing 274 Quick Picks Options 270 OPT Files 270 Selected Database Information 263 Process Variable P
167. documentation from the database Offline Prints the currently selected network or a configurable list of networks documentation configuration data mismatch tables and formatting cross references indices page titles and page numbering In previous versions of NxT and ProWORXPLUS this was referred to as the Lister option ae You can also print data from the User Configurable and Generic Register editors Printouts from a Register editor are sent to the default printer as specified in the Print Setup dialog box page 274 For more information see User Configurable Register editor on page 137 and Generic Register editor on page 152 Printing a network You can print a single network in Online or Offline The printout displays a line drawing of the network elements with or without descriptors and other documentation 262 Printing gt To print a single network 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Network The Print dialog box is displayed Select any printer specific options you may have Consult your printer s documentation for details Click OK Chapter 11 Printing Printing selected data Lister NxT Offline can print any part or all of the database information gt Toselect data to print 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears Current Settings Description Each button takes you to a s
168. dow 1 Soe ON In the Network Editor double click an instruction with the address to which you want to assign a symbol The Instruction Edit dialog box appears In the address field type the new symbol text Click OK The Add Symbol dialog box appears Type the address to associate with this symbol Click Create The symbol and its associated address are added to the Symbol summary panel and sorted alphabetically gt To place an address or symbol in the network logic Drag the address or symbol from the Symbol Summary panel to its destination in logic 164 Symbolic addressing Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Searching logic You can search networks in a database for a specific address instruction or address instruction combination You can also search for disabled addresses or duplicate coils Offline only gt To search for logic elements 1 In the Network Editor on the Search menu click Find or click in the toolbar The Search dialog box appears Search Type _ Search Range Search Mode Address Network From 0001 Continuous Address Function To 0034 C Step Function Disabled Duplicate Coils Address 100001 II EI Search Results Cancel Help Select the search type and the value s for that type Address Select to search for the address you specify in Address the address field Address Function Select to search for t
169. dow click Not Found The View Not Found Networks dialog box appears View Not Found Networks Compare Network 0005 Haf hpp o 100001 000102 oodbo2 sH Hha pH A 000020 000119 100017 000019 Hkh p H 000019 000120 100016 000020 4 r O 100015 000021 l a E eee 04 we 000015 2 2h a_n O 000019 000120 100016 000620 Close Next Match Set Match Help 2 Do one of the following e Toggle Click to switch views between the master database and the second database or controller The Compare function generates two independent Not Found lists one for networks present in the master database but not the second database or controller and another for networks present in the second database or controller but not the master database Click Toggle to switch between these lists e Next Match Click to move to the next Not Found network of the current view Clicking Next Match only affects the current view each of the two Not Found lists operates independently of the other e Set Match Click to remove the current network from the Not Found list Using the Compare Summary window 337 17 Configuring a BM85 In this chapter Configuring a BM85 Bridge multiplexer 340 Reading or loading a BM85 configuration 340 Configuring the Modbus ports of aBM85 342 Editing a BM85 s address routing map 344 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Con
170. e ADU 205 4 Channel Register Input 10V DEP 208 230 VAC 8 Point Input Module ADU 206 4 Channel Register Input DEP 209 120 VAC 8 Point Input Module ADU 211 8 Channel Analog Input Module DEP 210 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module ADU 212 8 Channel Analog Input Module DEP 211 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module ADU 214 4 Channel Multi Range A D Input DEP 214 12 60 VDC 16 Point Input Module ADU 216 8 Channel Thermocouple DEP 215 5 VDC TTL 16 Point Input Module CM900 Auto Interface DEP 216 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module DAO 216 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module DEP 217 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module DAP 204 24 VDC 4 Point Relay NO Module DEP 218 115 VAC 16 Point Input Module DAP 208 24 VDC 8 Point Relay NO Module DEP 220 Fast 24 VDC 16 Point Input Module DAP 209 120 VAC 8 Point Output Module DEP 296 60 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module DAP 210 24 230 VAC 8 Point Output Module DEP 297 48 VDC 16 Point Isolated Input Module DAP 212 24 VDC 8 Point Input 4 Point Output M7251 Programmable Limit Switch DAP 216 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module M7350 Resolver Decoder Function Module DAP 217 5 24 VDC 16 Point Output Module MOT 201 1 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Encoder DAP 218 24 240 VAC 16 Point Output Module MOT 202 2 Slot 1 Axis Motion Control Module Resolver amp Encoder DAP 220 24 VDC 8 Point Input Output Module VIC 200 4 High Speed Pulse or 4 VRC Inputs DAP 252 LowTemp 24 VDC 8 Point Input 4 Point VIC 205 4 H
171. e refer to your Windows documentation for instructions 2 Welcome to ProoWORX NxT 2 0 Chapter 1 Welcome Installing ProWORX NxT System requirements To run ProWORX NxT Online and Offline you require A PC compatible computer with a 33 MHz 80386DxX or faster processor Pentium system recommended Microsoft Windows 3 1 95 or NT 3 51 or later 4 MB of RAM 25 MB of available hard drive space 45 MB with drawings An asynchronous adaptor RS 232 serial port or an SA85 card for direct communication with programmable controllers A printer port and compatible printer to generate document listings One or more Modicon controllers How to install ProWORX NxT You can install ProWORX NxT in one easy step from the CD The CD also allows you to make a set of floppy disks so you can install ProWORX NxT on PCs which do not have a CD ROM gt To install ProWORX NxT from the CD See the directions in the booklet that comes with your CD Windows 95 and NT 4 x only The Installer updates your Start menu to include the ProWORX NxT Online and Offline Editors Drawing DXF Viewer and Product Authorization Wizard It does not create any other shortcuts gt To create a shortcut on the Windows desktop 1 2 3 Right click the desktop Click New then click Shortcut In the Command Line field type the full path and file name of the version of NxT to which you wanta shortcut If you used the standard NxT install opt
172. e Micro im seis BJ jack male p45 jack female male A 9 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 9 pin female DESS e Case of 123 4 65 6 7 amp 9 connector Caution Pindi 1 34 2 5 7 46 a receives 54 a from the Micro e nim RJ45 jack male 9 pin RJ45 jack female male 4 364 25 Pin Serial to Modicon Micro 311 or 411 Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams 25 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 modem 25 pin female DB 255 EEE S inoOCCOOeeS88Ce0 Computer Os ooo ooe ooo oo ara T T 4576820 23 23 1 45 7 6 6 20 Shield LJ LI eeeeeeee0co0o3 Modem O AooOo0OSCOD0C4s 25 pin male DB 25P 1 a 25 pin 25 pin temale male 4 I 9 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 modem 9 pin female D695 Computer Eo D T O IE 7 8 1 5 6 ba ta M 1 45 7 6 8 20 Shield 1 LI LJ Po EET ee eoeseeseeeoocoo Modem JO OCC OOOeO000C rs O 25 pin male DB25P 9 pin female male 25 Pin Serial to Modicon J478 modem 365 ProWORX NxT User s Guide IBM 5531 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X IBM 5331 Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 a a 6 6 B 8 9 20 9 pin DB9S female 25 pin DB25P connector male connector hood cover 2 pr shielded conductor ho
173. e Onthe View menu click TCop List or click TCop in the panel toolbar ADD sup MULT DIY ict You can drag references 170 Card List x Drop 01 Rack 1 Slot 04 E from VO points directly into OnOff Switch 100017 a logic penera aa Reset Switch PBNC 10002 0Drop 1 Paint Station Sensor 10003 Rack 1 Belt 2 Low Sensor 10004 Slot 3 B873 PSNO 10005 m Slot 4 B88i Station 1 Home Lmt 10006 p Rack 2 Station fLoadLmt 10007 Roll Form Station 10008 Punch Stn Proximity 10009 ACTIVE Belt 4 Low Sensor 10010 sTGSNC 10011 Station 2HomeLmt 10012 Station 2LosdLmt 10013 Punch Stn Lower Lmt 10014 Welding On Switch 10015 TASNC 10016 Initiate Transfer 00001 f Reset Switch 00002 Paint Station Sensor 00003 Conveyor belttwo 00004 Belt 2 High Sensor 00005 Y Next gt To place an address or symbol into logic from the Traffic Cop panel 1 Inthe Traffic Cop panel navigate to the I O card you want e Next Click to go to the next programmed card e Prev Click to go to the previously programmed card Tree Click to display the I O card list then click a card to select it Click the symbol address to insert Keep the mouse button pressed Still holding the mouse button down drag the symbol address from the Traffic Cop panel to its destination in logic 124 Network editor panel descriptions Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Power and Power State flow toggle Online only This
174. e database e Ignore Descriptors are not transferred to the active database Reg contents Select whether the register contents are to be moved copied or ignored This option is unavailable if you have selected a block of discretes e Move Register contents are transferred into the destination block in the active database If this is an internal move moving only within the active database the source contents are deleted e Copy Register contents are transferred into the destination block in the active database e Ignore Register contents are not transferred to the active database 162 Global register replace offline only Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Discrete states Select whether to move copy or ignore the discrete states e Move Relocates the state of each discrete source address to the new destination address e Copy Duplicates the state of each discrete source address to the new destination address e Ignore Leaves all discrete states as they are Forced disabled Select whether to move copy or ignore discrete forced or disabled state information e Move Relocates the disabled state of each discrete source address to the new destination address e Copy Duplicates the disabled state of each discrete source to the new destination address e Ignore Leaves all discrete addresses that are forced or disabled as they are Mode Select a mode of replacement e Continuous Performs all change
175. e destination block and move the contents back to their original locations Cancelling the move fill or copy operation while in progress is not recommended gt To move the contents of one block of registers to another block 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Extended Memory The Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box appears 2 From the Extended Memory Register Editor window on the File menu click Utilities The Extended Memory Utilities dialog box appears Source Start 0000 Source End 0000 Source File 01 Destination Start 000 Destination End 000 Destination File 01 f Start Cancel Help 3 Click Move 150 Extended Memory Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor In the following boxes e Source Start Type the first register of the block to be moved Source End Type the last register of the block to be moved e Source File Type the number of the file containing the source registers e Destination Start Type the first register of the destination block e Destination End Type the last register of the destination block e Destination File Type the number of the file containing the destination registers Click Start When finished click Cancel to close the window gt To copy the contents of one block of registers to another block 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Extended Memory
176. e tree control as racks you can edit individual slots 2 Click the corresponding button of the Page you want to configure for example click 4 to configure Page 3 The Traffic Cop display switches to Edit Rack mode showing the slots for a single page Traffic Cop xi DiscIn DiscOut Analogin AnalogOut Intell O Interface Power 35908 Traffic Cop aj Edt Rack Gif Drop 1 800 Series a i Wri MED rop 2 800 Series 30001 Option State 30002 Write Count E Hf Drop 3 800 Series Page Slot Local Address Length Remote Address KE t Dro 4 DCP Series T au 30003 30003 30004 30005 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 Drop 5 Drop 6 Drop 7 Drop 8 Drop 9 Drop 10 Drop 11 Drop 12 Drop 13 Drop 14 Drop 15 Drop 160 Drop 17 7 Drop 180 x Laie Bae I In 0 32 I Out 3 32 The HB field displays the health status for each slot OK appears if the card is fine or appears if the card is unhealthy e To view data for a local address table select the table and click Data e To type or edit documentation for a slot select the slot and click Doc 3 Double click the slot to configure or select the slot and click Edit 188 DCP Series Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop 4 Double click Local Address or select it and click Edit The slot edit dialog box is displayed The location of the currently selected slot is displ
177. e view pans from the start location to your end location To zoom into the display 1 Click Zoom 2 Click at the start location where you want to begin your zoom 3 Drag your cursor to mark the area A rectangle appears to define the section of drawing you want to zoom in on 4 Release the mouse button To zoom out of the display e Click Zoom Out To select a different DXF drawing 1 From the I O Drawing Display window click Open The File Open dialog box appears 2 Select the DXF to display then click OK To print a drawing e From the I O Draw Display window click Print The drawing is printed to your default printer Displaying I O drawings 205 8 Documenting your PLC In this chapter Documenting your PLC 208 Using the Documentation window 210 Using the One Line Documentation window 211 Documentation summary 211 Searching for specific documentation 213 Using the Documentation editor 214 Moving copying and deleting multiple records 217 Adding 4xxxx Bit descriptors 218 Documentation utilities 219 Moving documentation 219 Copy documentation 220 Delete documentation 220 Importing exporting databases 220 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Documenting your PLC Symbolic Addressing Address and Bit Descriptors Short and Long Comments Network Comments and Page Titles are available for comprehensive database documentation You can attach text descriptions to logic element addresses register bit
178. eater than or less than the threshold Select the Trigger Enabled check box Click OK Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Clamping data Clamps let you specify a range of analog data values to capture and display You can specify whether analog data values inside or outside the range will be captured gt To set up a clamp 1 From the Data Watch Window on the Settings menu click Clamps The Clamp Setup dialog box is displayed Clamp Setup x Hi Clamp Lo Clamp Capture Inside Capture Outside E Clamps Enabled OK Cancel Help In Hi Clamp type the maximum analog data value in the range In Lo Clamp type the minimum analog data value in the range Do one of the following e Capture Inside Click to capture data values within the entered range e Capture Outside Click to capture data values outside the entered range 5 Select Clamps Enabled Clamps will be shown as blue horizontal lines on the trend 6 Click OK Clamping data 285 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Disabling and forcing discretes You can force a discrete to the ON or OFF state This removes control of the discrete from logic it remains in the fixed state until the force is removed Enabling a discrete removes the FORCE ON or FORCE OFF placing control of the discrete back in logic If you force an address either on or off then overwrite the address with a new AN one the original address remains FORCED H
179. ect whether NxT automatically connects to the controller in the Controller Address field when you enter the Online Editor or displays the Select Device window where you can manually select a controller 4 Set the number and width of descriptor fields for the database Inthe Descriptor Field Width field type the maximum number of characters 9 12 or 15 each descriptor field can hold In Number of Descriptor Fields type the number of descriptor fields 5 to 9 that will be available for each instruction in logic e In No of Network Listing Fields type the number of descriptor fields 3 to 5 for each instruction in logic that print when you print a ladder logic network 5 Click OK You may be prompted to confirm your changes To keep them click OK 20 Editing the setup of a database Chapter 2 Working with a Database Saving and deleting a database NxT saves changes to the open database automatically and frequently It saves your work whenever you exit the Traffic Cop or Controller Configuration windows move from one network of logic to another close your database or change between Online and Offline editing You therefore do not need to save your work manually Use the Save As command to create a copy of a database before for example making significant changes to it The Database Backup Restore function can also create a copy of a database but the Save As command may be faster as it does not compress the dat
180. ection of data For each section select the data to print Some Choose the range of networks with descriptors backref_ Networks g crossrefs and titles Some Print descriptors short comments long comments and symbols Doc Tables Print configuration traffic cop register contents ASCII The Current Settings col disables segment scheduler order of solve and used tables umn provides a summary of your print choices Some Controller Tables Print references that are used in logic but are not described Print references that are described but not used in logic Click to save or load back Format Some Select cross reference limits indexes page Ne om titles and page numbering custom print settings Quick Picks Use Quick Picks for choosing predefined print settings Print Setup Font Setup Print Saye Settings Close Help 2 For each section select items to print e Networks see page 264 Doc Tables see page 265 e Controller Tables see page 267 e MisMatch Tables see page 268 3 Click Format to adjust page titles and numbering and select cross reference limits and indexes see page 269 Click Print Setup to choose a printer or adjust printer settings Click Font Setup to change or adjust the output font Click Print LS You can also click the settings in the Current Settings column to change them Printing selected data Lister 263 ProWORX NxT U
181. edit and click Edit or double click the radix of the register to edit The Edit window appears for the radix selected 5 In Register Value type the value to be placed into the register using the appropriate radix If you are typing a binary value you cannot type in the new value directly Instead set the state of individual bits by selecting it and clicking either Set 1 or Reset 0 You can also click Set All to set all bits to 1 or Reset All to set all bits to 0 6 Click OK Generic Register editor 153 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To edit a register value using the Assembly Register 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor window appears 2 Select which register type 8xxxx 4xxxx to display by clicking the corresponding radio button 3 Select or clear the floating point check box to display or not display floating point values Click the AR box Type the new register value described above If you try to type an AR value into the binary field it will be b You cannot use the AR to type values in binary Instead use the edit window treated as a decimal value 6 Do one of the following e Select the radix field in the register where the value is to be placed then press CTRL ENTER e Click the AR label beside the entry box and drag the cursor to the appropriate radix of the destination register Be careful to drop the value in the correc
182. egister in signed integer 7 5 6th register in 32 bit integer 6 7 8 Description of 8th register in single bit 8 O blank description no radix WINDOWTABLE2 11 19 M 0 B 0 8 1 1 Source 1 OPERATIONFIELD 1 19 T 0 3 00001 Write Registers 00002 Read Registers 00003 Get Local Statistics ERRORFIELD 18 19 T 1 2 04097 User initiated abort 08193 Invalid operation type D END PAGE ti PAGE 2 PAGETITLE Demo Page 2 of 4 146 User Configurable Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor SCREENINFO UMLINES 0 END REGISTERINFO NUMREGS 0 WINDOWTABLE1 2 19 T 0 Z 4 5 0 4 Error STR Operation Code 1 Status 2 of Registers Transferred 1 Func Dependant Info 1 WINDOWTABLE2 11 19 M 0 B 0 5 1 1 Source 1 OPERATIONFIELD 1 19 T 0 2 00001 00002 Write Registers Read Registers ERRORFIELD 18 19 T 1 3 04097 08193 08194 END PAGE User initiated abort Invalid operation type User parameter changed User Configurable Register editor 147 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Extended Memory Register editor The extended memory register editor lets you modify the contents of the 6xxxx registers directly Some 984 controllers contain up to 96K of optional extended memory that can be used These registers are accessible from the logic with the RE
183. egisters that appear in the table of registers registers inthe on the PCFL Editor dialog box Statistics for each table entry main PCFL appear in following lines one for each register Editor dialog box Register The label for a single entry in the PCFL subfunction register description table These register descriptions appear in the Description column of the table on the PCFL Editor window Each entry in the PCFL subfunction register table has a single line with a Register description Register radix and a Register offset Register Radix A number indicating the data type for a register used by the PCFL subfunction This value indicates the format used to display and edit values in the Data column of the register table on the PCFL Editor window The data type is indicated by number 1 Decimal integer 2 Hexadecimal 3 Binary 4 ASCII 5 Floating point 6 32 bit integer Register offset The offset for the register calculated from the beginning of the register table This value is used to calculate the address that appears in the Address Symbol column in the table on the PCFL Editor dialog box For the actual offset values see the online instruction help for the specific PCFL subfunction Input Flag register offset The offset of the register where the PCFL subfunction s input flags are stored Customizing the PCFL configuration file 257 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Field Description
184. emory contents to Flash RAM This function copies the memory contents of a Micro controller to the controller s flash RAM When the Micro controller receives power it first checks to see if a valid configuration is present in the data memory If not the contents of the flash RAM are re loaded into the controller memory Flash RAM may be used as an alternative to the optional battery backup or as an extra backup of the logic and configuration gt To transfer to Micro controller Flash RAM 1 From the Main Screen or Network Editor on the Controller menu click EEPROM Flash NxT displays the Transfer to Micro Controller Flash dialog box Transfer to Micro Controller FLASH x Save memory contents of controller to FLASH RAM This may only be done when the controllers is stopped i Stop Cancel Help If the controller is currently running click Stop Click Transfer You are asked whether or not you want NxT to start the controller after loading to flash RAM e Click Yes to have NxT automatically start the controller after transferring memory contents to flash RAM e Click No to keep the controller stopped after transferring memory contents to flash RAM 106 Transferring memory contents to Flash RAM Chapter 5 Working with Controllers Transfer internal flash or PCMCIA to controller flash This function copies the memory contents of a Compact TSX Quantum 434 or Quantum 534 controller to the controller s flas
185. empty 4 21 33 4 Add 4 to the stack 4 21 33 4 21 Add 21 to the stack 4 21 33 84 Apply operator multiplication to 4 and 21 adding the result to the stack 4 21 33 84 33 Add 33 to the stack 4 21 33 117 Apply operator addition to 84 and 33 adding the result to the stack This is the final result of the equation This equation would be writtenas 4 21 33 ininfix notation Customizing the PCFL configuration file Customizing the PCFL Editor configuration file lets you change register names input output flag names and the input output flag diagrams Changing the PCFL configuration file is an advanced operation Before you make any changes make a backup of the original file The PCFL configuration file is called PCFL DAT and is stored in the ProWORX NxT installation directory You can edit it with any text editor such as Windows Notepad Customizing the PCFL configuration file 255 ProWORX NxT User s Guide The PCFL DAT file contains a section for each subfunction of the PCFL instruction block In the following format description a field enclosed in angled brackets lt and gt should be replaced by the appropriate value without the brackets A carriage return at the end of a line is indicated by lt n gt The format for each subfunction is lt Function name gt lt n gt lt Function title gt lt n gt lt Number of registers in the main PCFL Editor dialog box gt lt n gt
186. en appear in pairs For example if two databases each contain different logic in Network 12 the Compare function reports that one network of logic in the first database does not exist in the second and one network of logic in the second doesn t exist in the first In the table you see this result MAST VS COMP 0012 NOT FND NOT FND 0012 Not Found errors also frequently appear when networks of logic have been moved in one database but not another Suppose a master database is used to program a controller then the logic originally in Networks 3 and 4 of the master database is moved to Networks 4 and 5 If the database is now compared to the controller these results appear in the table MAST VS COMP NOT FND 0003 0003 MOV 0004 0004 MOV 0005 0005 NOT FND The third network in the controller no longer appears in the master database because in the database that logic has been moved to the fourth network Similarly the fifth network in the master database does not appear in the controller because in the controller that logic is still in the fourth network Using the Compare Summary window 335 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To print Network miscompares 1 Inthe Network Compare window click Print The Network Print dialog appears 2 Do one of the following e Summary Click to print a concise list of all network miscompares e Similar Click to print the logic of networks s
187. ences outside the ranges specified are protected from general Modbus data write commands By default all Oxxxx and 4xxxx references are unprotected gt To edit a data protect extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears not yet installed LE If the Data Protection extension does not appear in the Tree Control area it is 2 In the Tree Control area of the window click Data Protection The Data Protect dialog box appears in the Details area of the window In the Start 0X field type the first address in the unprotected range In the Length field of the 0x area type the number of references to be left unprotected NxT shows the address ranges left protected the ranges of addresses outside the range you just specified Suppose you type a Start value of 00017 and a Length of 1024 The first protected range will be from 00001 the first possible value to 00016 the last value before the Start value you entered 80 Data Protect extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller There will then be an unprotected range from 00017 to 01040 00017 1024 All references above 01041 are also protected If you enter a length that is too high goes beyond the addresses configured for the controller NxT automatically sets the value to include all addresses above the Start field In the Start 4X field type the first address in t
188. er Address field when you enter the Online Editor or displays the Select Device window where you can manually select a controller 6 Set the number and width of descriptor fields for the database Inthe Descriptor Field Width field type the maximum number of characters 9 12 or 15 each descriptor field can hold In Number of Descriptor Fields type the number of descriptor fields 5 to 9 that will be available for each instruction in logic In No of Network Listing Fields type the number of descriptor fields 3 to 5 for each instruction in logic that print when you print a ladder logic network 7 Click OK If you are working in the Online Editor NxT creates your database The first time you open this database in the Offline Editor you will be prompted for more information about the controller If you are working in the Offline Editor go on to Part 2 Part 1 For both the online and offline editors 15 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Part 2 For the offline editor only Because the Offline Editor is not connected directly to the controller it requires more information than the Online Editor before it can set up a database After you select options for your database NxT prompts you for information about the type of controller you have gt To specify a controller type for a new database 1 Start by selecting a controller group When you click OK in the Database Setup window the Select Co
189. er Cop and Traffic Cop or Brief to print only addresses in Logic e Register Contents Select the range for the 4xxxx Register Contents you want to print The maximum range value you can enter for 4xxxx is the value currently set in the controller configuration If you enter a value higher than that or that is invalid such as 1 123 the entry appears as 1 Max Any entry that contains spaces or is empty is set to None Mismatch tables A Mismatch Table is a table of reference points used but not documented or references documented and not used gt To select mismatch tables for printing 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears 2 Click MisMatch Tables The MisMatch Tables dialog box appears MisMatch Tables Described But Used In Logic But Not In L Not Described B F Oxxxx F Ixxxx F Ixxxx 3xxxx I 3xxxx 4xxxx T 4xxxx OK Cancel Help 3 For each address type select to print Descriptors without corresponding element in logic and or Elements in logic without descriptors then click OK 268 Mismatch tables Chapter 11 Printing Formatting a printout After selecting data to print use this feature to determine how the printout will look You can adjust page titles and numbering and select cross reference limits and indexes gt To format a printout 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog b
190. es usually to send or receive I O data Not Described Mismatch Table A printout of those programmable controller addresses in a ladder logic program which do not have descriptor records Not in Logic Mismatch Table A printout of those descriptor records in a database whose corresponding address is not used in the ladder logic program Offline When the computer is not connected to the programmable controller and works instead from a database Online When the computer is connected to a programmable controller working with it directly and in real time Operator In mathematics and in Equation Networks a symbol or character that indicates a specific operation to be performed on one or more elements called operands In 3 Y the plus sign is an operator that indicates addition between the two operands 3 and Y Order of Solve 1 The order in which segments are solved as ordered by the Segment Scheduler 2 The order in which elements are solved in a network 420 Glossary of Terms Glossary Page Title A line of text which describes a page or group of pages in a ladder logic listing Printed at the top of the page Path The part of a file specification that indicates the drive and subdirectory the file is in PC Personal Computer Peer to peer One of four major architectures for input output systems also see Distributed I O Local I O and Remote I O A protocol for networked devices in which any device c
191. esses from the Network Editor e Clicking Add Watch opens the Data Watch Window then places the address of the currently selected network into the Address Contents table e Clicking Track then clicking Instruction opens the Data Watch Window then enters all addresses associated with the instruction in the currently selected cell in logic in the Network Editor into the Address Contents table You can then go to the Network Editor and select different instructions to track by clicking them e Clicking Track then clicking Address opens the Data Watch Window then enters the address associated with the cell currently selected in logic into the Address Contents table You can then go to the Network Editor and select different addresses to track e Clicking Track then clicking Network opens the Data Watch Window and places all addresses in the currently selected network into the Address Contents table e Clicking Track then clicking Discretes opens the Data Watch Window and places the addresses of all discretes in the currently selected network into the Address Contents table 278 Displaying the Data Watch Window Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window General procedures There are several procedures which are common to some or all Data Watch Window views Setting the sample rate Filling cells in the Address Contents table with addresses Deleting addresses from the Address Contents table Setting the font size Changing
192. eting network items You can delete an element column row or network You cannot delete a row or column while it contains an element instruction You must first clear the row or column then delete it gt To delete an element column row or network 1 From the Network Editor click the cell in logic where you want to delete an item 2 On the Edit menu click Delete then do one of the following Element Click to delete the element in the currently selected cell e Column Click to delete the column containing the currently selected cell Columns to the right of the deleted column are shifted left e Row Click to delete the row containing the currently selected cell Rows beneath the deleted row are shifted up e Network Click to delete the current network NxT prompts you to confirm the deletion of a network Click Yes to proceed Inserting and deleting network items Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Transferring logic blocks to and from disk offline only Saving blocks of logic to disk offline only You can save a block of cells into a separate file gt To save a block of logic 1 Select the block to save To select a block click to select the cell where you want the block to start then drag the cursor to the final cell of the block To select an entire network or series of networks on the Edit menu click Blocking then click Network Range On the Edit menu click Blocking then click Save
193. export a recorded DWW file to a DIF file 1 From the Data Watch window click File then click DIF Export The DIF export window appears 2 In Data File type the path and file name of the DWW file you want to convert 3 In DIF File type the path and file name with a DIF extension of the DIF file to open or create LS If you select an existing DIF file the previous data in the file will be overwritten 4 Click Start Exporting a DWW file to a DIF file 283 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Setting triggers The Trigger Setup window lets you configure an address in logic to act as a trigger for recording data in the Data Watch window Data Logger Trend and Spreadsheet views gt To seta trigger 1 284 Setting triggers From the Data Watch Window click Settings then click Trigger The Trigger Setup dialog box is displayed Trigger Setup x Trigger Address 00001 Trigger State fo Less Than Greater Than Trigger Enabled OK Cancel Help In Trigger Address type the 0xxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx or 4xxxx address to use as a trigger In Trigger State e For discretes type the state of the discrete 0 or 1 which will activate data display capture in the Data Watch window e For registers type the register data value threshold which will activate data display capture in the Data Watch window Then select whether the trigger will spring when the register value is gr
194. f you use a discrete address you can select bitmaps to represent the off and a linear scaled value and a range of bitmaps to represent different data values Enable Editing Select to allow changes in the address data state Stretch Bitmap Select to fill the cell with the bitmap or clear to add the bitmap at it s original size Bitmap Type the path and file name of the bitmap you want to add to the cell or click Browse to navigate to it OFF Bitmap Type the path and file name of the bitmap you want to represent the off state or click Browse to navigate to it ON Bitmap Type the path and file name of the bitmap you want to represent the on state or click Browse to navigate to it Range Type a range specifying the low to high data values for the analog address For example 1 100 294 Using the Graphical view Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Scale Range Type a range specifying the low to high values of the linear scaled value For example with the range set to 0 100 and the scale set to 0 4096 the scaled range will be 50 2048 as a value when the analog value is 50 of Bmps Type a number of bitmaps to represent data values in the range you specified For example when the following conditions are applied e The bitmap meter bmp is selected e The range is set to 1 5 and e The of Bmps is set to 5 The Graphical viewer displays the bitmap meterl bmp when the data value is 1
195. fic Cop Using the Traffic Cop display The tree control area of the Traffic Cop window lets you select different drops or racks within drops in the Traffic Cop tree gt Todisplay the Traffic Cop r Edit Drop KZS908 Traffic Cop T AN Drop 1 800 Series fm Hold Up Time 3_ ASCII Port 0 Pa WRack 1 The tree provides a WRack 2 hierarchical view of WRack 3 Rack 4 configured drops and racks Select a drop or rack to see its configu ration From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Traffic Cop or click on the toolbar bis Traffic Cop DiscIn Disc Out Analogin AnalogOut Intell O Interface Power W Rack 5 HD rop 2 800 Series WRack 1 WRack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 __ WRack 5 HD rop 3 800 Series HD rop 4 800 Series 30005 3000 Edit Terminal Card Help In 0280 1024 Out 0208 1024 Pwr Avaik 5 17228 4 3 20117 5 1734 BIN B873 200 V A Thermo RTD Strain gt To navigate through a tree Click to move up one visible row in the tree Click Mite move down one visible row in the tree Click to move up one level in the tree for example from a rack up to its parent drop To expand the racks in a drop click to the left of the drop To collapse the racks in the drop click H to the left of the drop To select a drop Drop or rack Rack click on it Using the Traffic Cop display 181 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Usi
196. figuring a BM85 Bridge multiplexer A BM85 Bridge Multiplexer allows you to connect up to four Modbus devices or networks of Modbus devices to a Modbus Plus network You can use ProoWORX NxT to configure a BM85 s Modbus ports either manually or from files you create and load and edit the BM85 s Address Routing Map Reading or loading a BM85 configuration Before configuring the Modbus ports of a BM85 NxT must read the current configuration of the BM85 or load a previously saved MUX file from disk You can also load a MUX file after reading the current configuration but loading one directly can save you time gt To read a Modbus port configuration from a BM85 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Tools menu click BM85 MUX Setup The Read BM85 Configuration dialog box appears Read BM85 Configuration x 1 Set MODBUS Port Configuration switches on BM85 to CONFIGURE PORT 1 9600 BAUD NO PARITY 1 STOP BIT All off 2 Connect cable to MODBUS PORT 1 on BM85 3 If BM85 was already in CONFIGURE mode click the Configure button If not or not sure turn BM85 OFF and then ON Cancel Load MUX File Help Follow the instructions as they appear to connect your computer to the BM85 Click Configure NxT looks for a BM85 until it finds one If your PC is not connected to a BM85 or is connected incorrectly press ESC to return to the Network Editor NxT reads the current
197. file for entry to network display FIL ProWORxX format export file HLP Help file LPB Logic pointer file used with blocking MDB Memory data file used with blocking Report files 353 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Extension NDB Type of File Short comment file used with blocking OPT List module option file RDF Cross reference data file RUF Address Used Tables reference file RPF Cross reference pointer file for database listing SRC Search data file TDB Title data file used with blocking TFP ProWORxX full page data file URF 354 Additional files User Configurable Register editor file Appendix C Modbus Cable Kit ProWORX NxT User s Guide The Modbus cable kit The Modbus Cable Kit contains the materials you need to connect an IBM or compatible computer to a Modbus device The kit consists of e A 9 Pin Adaptor for use with 9 pin serial ports used on IBM AT and compatible computers This cable has one 9 pin female DE9S connector and one 25 pin male DB25P connector The 9 Pin Adaptor may be used to adapt any PC XT compatible serial cable for use with an AT style serial port e Modbus Cable for use with 25 pin serial ports used on IBM PC PC XT PS 2 and compatible computers This cable has one male 25 pin DB25P connector and one female 25 pin DB25S connector e 584 Adaptor Module for use with Modicon 584 controller and W190 cable Th
198. find the path and library name you typed a new library is created with that name 6 Click Transfer NxT translates the loadables and copies them into the library gt To display the manufacturer s notes for a loadable if available 1 Select a loadable from the Loadable Library column on the left 2 Click View Text If it is available the manufacturer s documentation for the loadable appears 3 To close the window click OK Editing the opcode for a user loadable An opcode is a unique number identifying a loadable in the controller or database Because each opcode must be different they may need changing gt To edit the opcode for a user loadable 1 Select a loadable from the Loadable Library column on the left 2 Click Edit OpCode The Edit Opcode window appears displaying the Function Name Current Opcode associated with the loadable and a list of additional opcodes to select from 3 Select an opcode then click OK Rebuilding a damaged library On rare occasions a library of loadables can become damaged for example when a computer crashes and files are corrupted NxT allows you to recreate a library from its USL and MSL files gt To rebuild a damaged library e Click Rebuild NxT recreates the damaged library This operation may take a few moments Don t rebuild libraries that are not damaged Doing so may cause certain loadables not to function or to function erratically 70 Contro
199. from one through 14 I O modules in a single backplane up to 448 I O points Local I O is limited to a single rack and is always head number 0 RIO and DIO processors are added in the local rack to extend the controller s I O system Long Comment A block of text which comment on an address within a ladder logic program These are printed between the networks in the ladder listing LPI Lines per inch Glossary of Terms 417 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Machine Word 16 bits of data two bytes Also called a word Macro Generic pieces of logic networks that can be inserted into main logic databases See also macro parameter Macro parameter A placeholder variable used in a macro When inserted into a regular logic database each macro parameter is mapped to a real register address Master A networked device which controls the devices it connects to Compare to slave Memory The part of a computer or programmable controller which stores information for manipulation Mismatch Tables Two printouts which show the differences between two sets of data for example between descriptor records that have been entered for PLC addresses and addresses that have actually been used in a program Mnemonic ni MON ik 1 A memory aid 2 Acomputer instruction with an abbreviated name that indicates its function For example BLKM is used for the Block Move instruction Mnemonic Assignments A table in the configurati
200. fxManager For more information on groups users and permissions see fxManager s main help ProWORX NxT permissions Below are the ProWORX NxT permissions you can assign to groups Set to True to allow users access When set to False the operations are denied Property Description ReadfromController Allows a controller to be read from WritetoController Allows a controller to be written to StartStopController Allows the controller to be started or stopped EditController Allows Ladder Logic Controller Configuration Traffic Cop and associated Documentation to be modified 386 Access Control fxManager permissions Appendix G NxT and fxManager Below are the fxManager permissions you can assign to groups Set to True to allow users access When set to False the operations are denied Property Description CheckInOut Allows projects to be checked in and out of the Server Get Allows read only copies of project files to be accessed from the Server OverrideCheckOut Allows a user to undo another user s check out ChangePassword Allows a user to change their own password ChangeAllPasswords Allows a user to change other user s passwords EditAuditTrail Allows e Audit Trail to be checked in or out e Settings to be configured or edited e Report Templates to be added edited or deleted e Reports to be generated or deleted EditAccessControl Allows Access Control to be checked in
201. g I O drawings 204 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Traffic Cop overview The Traffic Cop is used to configure the I O drops racks and slots Often more than one Traffic Cop series can be configured in your database For example you can have a 800 Series drop a DCP Series drop and a 900 Series drop configured in the same database A120 and Micro Series devices are exceptions Drops racks and slots Your Modicon control system involves a certain amount of Discrete and possibly Analog I O Input Output Each I O point is physically wired to a terminal of an I O card in a rack somewhere on your plant floor Modicon I O can be set up either locally attached directly to the backplane of the main controller rack or as Remote I O through the use of a Remote I O processor in the main controller rack Remote I O though not supported by all controller types allows the greatest flexibility and capacity for your system I O is serviced by the controller in groups called drops or channels A single drop of I O can consist of multiple racks of I O and must be scheduled to be scanned in the Segment Scheduler during the controllers scan of the logic For controllers with local I O it is always drop 1 Remote drops of I O communicate with the main controller through a Remote I O processor in the main controller s rack Several I O families exist for Modicon 984 584 controllers 180 Traffic Cop overview Chapter 7 Using the Traf
202. g to a new controller clears your log file 1 Click Net Scan The Select Device dialog box appears 2 Type the address of the controller to analyze or click Net Scan to select a controller from a graphical display The Net Scan window has a separate Monitor function to check that its graphical depiction of status lights matches the controllers For more information Performing a network scan on page 50 gt To print the current log e Click Print The log prints to your default printer gt To delete the current log This command deletes the entire log not just a selected entry in it A deleted log file is unrecoverable e Click Delete 320 Monitoring the health of one device Chapter 15 Monitoring your Hardware Viewing status words in detail When the health of a controller changes the Monitor records the event in the controller s log The View Status Word window lets you see the changes in bits of the status word The function of each used bit is described and the changed bit is selected gt To view a status word in detail 1 From the Monitor Status window click the status word to select it 2 Click View The View Status Words window appears 984 STATE x Status Word Status Word 001 984 State MSB BASE LSB o0000 0001 1011 0001 HEX 0181 L Memory Config Flag 1 down size When a bit changes its description is selected The word s unused bits are not labelled
203. ging Size in Data Watch Window 281 Free Addresses Finding 160 Functions Searching for 165 Functions in Equation Networks 237 Functions List Panel 231 fxManager Access Control 386 Add Projects 400 Audit Trail 388 Audit Trail Settings 391 Controller Address Selection 397 399 Creating Projects 398 Layout 385 Logging On 392 Opening 392 Opening Projects 397 Permissions 387 Working Disconnected 392 Working with NxT 384 em Generic Register Editor 152 Displaying and Searching 155 Documenting Registers 154 Editing Values 153 Editing Values with the Assembly Register 154 Printing from 155 Getting a Read Only Copy of a Project 403 Global I O in Peer Cop 90 Global Input in Peer Cop 91 Global Output in Peer Cop 90 91 Global Replace 161 Glossary 407 Graphical View Data Watch Window 293 Graphics Server 5 Graysoft Importing Documentation from 221 Group Settling Time Configuring 57 H Hardware Changing Type of 66 Editing Details of 65 Monitoring Health of 317 Hardware Clock Register for 58 Setting 98 HB field 188 Head Number 79 Index 435 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Health of Cards in Traffic Cop 188 Health of Hardware 317 Checking Networks 322 Checking One Device 318 Viewing Status Words 321 Hot Standby Quantum Configuration Extension See Configuration Extensions 82 a I O Drawing Generator 203 Displaying I O Drawings 204 Symbols 203 I O Drops Configuring number of 56 I O Health Monitori
204. gs OK Cancel Delete Insert Help 2 Optional In Log Number type the identification number for this log entry The Log Number defaults to the first unused log number in increments of one 3 In Log Author type your name or employee number 4 In Log Date type the date that this log is entered The Log Date can be 20 characters so you can type any information in any format you want the time of day shift number and so on The default is the system date 5 In Log Note type a log of up to 200 characters in length then click OK gt To delete a logbook entry 1 Select an entry from the Log Number list 2 Click Delete NxT prompts you to confirm the deletion 3 Click Yes gt Todisplay the logbook automatically at startup e From the Logbook dialog box select the Auto Display Activate Making logbook entries 173 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Searching for duplicate coils offline only You can search for coils which have been assigned to a duplicate address If you find any you can look up the offending coils using a search function gt To search for duplicate coils 1 2 3 On the Search menu click Find From the Search dialog box select Duplicate Coil Search Click Search If duplicate coils are found the duplicate coils table appears Duplicate Coils Table x Select the address you want to go to by clicking it Click Find Coil A search for the coil address is
205. h RAM or PCMCIA memory card AN Do not attempt the transfer operation if the controller s battery is LOW as the processor contents may be lost When the controller receives power it first checks to see if a valid configuration is present in the data memory If not the contents of the flash RAM or PCMCIA memory card are re loaded into the controller memory Flash RAM or PCMCIA memory card may be used as an alternative to the optional battery backup or an extra backup of the logic and configuration This function cannot be performed while the controller is running You must stop the controller first A Memory Protect is a switch on your controller that stops you from altering the controller s contents The Memory Protect switch should be ON or the card overwrites memory on power up To transfer the controller s memory contents to controller Flash or PCMCIA memory card 1 From the Main Screen or Network Editor on the Controller menu click Flash PCMCIA The Transfer to Controller FLASH dialog box appears Transfer to Controller FLASH x IV Start PLC after download IV Save state ram 4xxxxx registers to save 9000 Clear Flash Stop Cancel Help If the controller is currently running click Stop Select Internal Flash to transfer the current logic to flash memory or PCMCIA to transfers the current logic to the PCMCIA memory card Internal Flash C PCMCIA Transfer internal flash or PCMCIA to co
206. hat can be performed on a PID LS can also be performed on a PID2 For more information on the differences between PID and PID2 blocks see the ProWORX NxT online help Process Input PID Set Point SP _ Calculation Output Value OV Process Variable PV Process Measurement Process Output The PID calculation compares a process variable PV with a desired control point called the set point SP The calculation uses the difference between the set point and the process variable to adjust the PID output value OV sometimes called the control variable This output value is used to manipulate an input to the process so that eventually the measured process variable equals the desired set point 298 PID and PID2 blocks an Overview Chapter 13 Working with PID PID2 blocks PID blocks are highly complex pieces of logic While they can be very useful they can also be quite difficult to work with ProWORX NxT includes a PID display with the following functions that make online programming of PID PID2 blocks easier The PID Tuner Face Plate display The PID Summary display The PID View Networks display Quick access to the Data Watch Trend Window Quick access to the Documentation and Register editors Not all controllers support PID blocks and even fewer support the more advanced PID2 If your controller doesn t support PIDs you won t be able to add them into your l
207. he AR box Type the new register value described above If you try to enter an AR value into the binary field it will be b You can t use the AR to enter values in binary Instead use the edit window treated as a decimal value 4 Do one of the following e Select the data field in the register where the value is to be placed then press CTRL ENTER e Click the AR field title beside the entry field and hold the mouse button down Still holding the mouse button down drag the cursor to the appropriate radix of the destination register then release the mouse button 5 Click OK gt To edit documentation for registers 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor window appears Select the register for the documentation you want to edit Click Doc The Documentation Editor window appears Type your documentation gt To edit the operation for a register 1 From the Register Editor window click Operation 2 Select an operation 3 Click OK User Configurable Register editor 139 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To change the radix of a register value gt gt 1 From the Register Editor window select the register you want to change the radix for Click Radix Select the new radix Click OK The value in the data field is automatically displayed in the new radix To display a single bit for a register value 1 From the Register Edito
208. he Edit Entry window appears 02 Goto Segment Networks Words Documentation u 000 Eee NC Segment Networks Words Documentation Table Control In Segment Dropin Drop Out 01 Continuous 01 01 Control Input Continuous M Segment Drop Input Drop Output OK Cancel Help OK Cancel Insert Delete Help 4 Select the Control Input 134 Using the Segment Scheduler Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor e Continuous Sets the segment in this row to be solved every scan e Set Control Sets the segment to be solved only when a discrete address is in a specific state If you select Set Control you must also Type the discrete address in the Address field which controls whether the segment in this row is to be solved Select whether the segment in this row is to be solved when the control discrete is On or Off e Watchdog Timer Reset Inserts a Watchdog Timer 5 InSegment type the segment to be solved in this row The valid range is 1 to the number of segments configured 6 In Drop Input type the input drop associated with the segment in this row during the solve 7 In Drop Output type the output drop associated with the segment in this row during the solve Depending on what controller you are using drops or channels may be used The valid range for drops channels is 1 to the number of configured drops segments 8 Click OK 9 Click OK gt Toadd a row to
209. he address you specify in the Address field and function you specify in the Function field Function Select to search for the instruction block you specify in the Function field Disabled Select to search for disabled contact or coil Duplicate Coils Offline only Select to search for coils with duplicate addresses If you are searching for an address function or address function combination enter the following Search Range Type the starting network for the search in the From field and type the ending network for the search in the To field Search Mode Select Continuous to search the entire range of networks displaying all matches in the Search Results Table or select Step to search only for the next match Click Search Searching logic 165 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Viewing the search results The search results table consists of all the search matches found by the search function Before the Search Results Table can be displayed you must first perform a search gt To display the search results table If you selected Continuous search mode the Search Results dialog box is displayed automatically when the search is completed 1 Performa search 2 Click Results The Search Results Table is displayed Search Results x Address 10001 Match 0017008 0001 1 1 0003 1 I 0004 1 0005 1 0006 1 I 0007 1 0008 1 0009 1 Each match from the search
210. he one that appears click the Face Plate button The PID Tuner display appears 3 If your logic database has more than three PID PID2 blocks use the vertical scroll bar on the right to move to the one you want Adjusting a PID s set point The Adjust Set Point dialog box which appears when you click the Adjust button in the PID Tuner Face Plate display functions differently depending on whether the PID is in Auto and Manual mode In Auto mode it changes a PID s set point in Manual mode its output value Mode Adjustment value Value restrictions Auto Set Point SP Between the High and Low Engineering Ranges Manual Output Value OV PID blocks 0 4096 PID2 blocks between the high and low clamp values normally set to 0 and 4095 respectively Before adjusting the Set Point check the High Engineering Range and the Low Engineering Range The Set Point bar graph appearing in the PID s Face Plate is based on where the set point value falls within the Engineering Range For example if the Low Engineering Range is 100 and the High Engineering Range is 300 and you change the set point to 200 the Set Point bar graph would read 50 To close the Adjust Set Point dialog box and confirm your changes click Apply To close the dialog box without making any changes click Close Tracking PID values in the Data Watch Window Clicking a PID Face Plate s Trend button from within the PID Tuner display brings up a
211. he printer gt To display a document in Print Preview 1 While Offline select Print Preview on the File menu The Print setup dialog box appears Select the printer settings you want then click OK A status dialog box appears while the NxT sets up the preview with your settings You can do the following from Print Preview Click a to select whether to print the entire document the current page or a specific range of pages Click Click to fit a full page of information within the viewable area il or select Full Screen on the View menu to maximize Print Preview by removing it s toolbar menu bar and borders Select Goto on the View menu to display a specific page of data In the Zoom list on the toolbar select or type a magnification between 10 through 500 percent Print preview 271 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Print to file You have the option to print your data to a file This feature allows you to print your data to a DOS based text TXT file to be viewed in a text editor such as Microsoft s Notepad Print i 1x Printer Default Printer HP LaserJet 4000 OK Series PCL 6 Print range Cancel All Setup Selection C Pages From lio Print quality High Copies 1 I Print to file I Collate copies gt To print data to file 1 While Offline select Print on the File menu The Print setup dialog box appears Select the print settings you want 3
212. he right pp 9 Dial Command ATD To select Modbus com Command Suffix 013 010 munications the Modem Type must be set to None Hangup Command A TH OK Cancel Help From the Interface list on the left select Modbus Set the parameters for your Modbus communication system e Port Identifies which serial port on your PC is connected to the controller or modem if you are connecting to the controller through one Default is COM1 e Baud Sets the data transfer speed of your PC s serial port in bits per second The PC and controller must be set to the same baud Default is 9600 e Parity Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd Odd parity or even Even parity If parity is set to None the check bit is not added The PC and controller must use the same parity Default is Even e Stop Bit Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet prepares the receiving device for the next packet The PC and controller must use the same number of stop bits Default is 1 e Timeout Specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message Default is 2 seconds 36 Configuring Modbus communications Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller e Mode Identifies which data protocol Remote Terminal Unit or ASCII to use Both the PC and controller must use the same data protocol Default is RTU 4 Do
213. he unprotected range In the Length field of the 4xxx area type the number of addresses to be left unprotected NxT shows the address ranges left unprotected the ranges of addresses outside the range you just specified Click OK With Symbols turned on in system Preferences when you enter an address to be protected and the address has a symbol reference the symbol appears If you forget the address for the symbol displayed you can disable the symbol function in system Preferences S980 Address extension The S980 Configuration Extension stores the 5980 station address This address is then used as part of the 5980 s mismatch detection mechanism when the controller is powered up the S980 checks to see if it has been moved to a different 984 d If the S980 Address extension does not appear in the Tree Control area itis not yet installed To enter the S980 Address 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears In the Tree Control area of the window click S980 Address NxT displays the current S980 address in the Details area of the window If this is the first time you have activated the S980 Address function a default address of 000000000 appears Type the new S980 address Click OK S980 Address extension 81 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Quantum Hot Standby extension The Quantum Hot Standby extension allows additional configu
214. hem to the Data Watch Panel The following instructions assume this option is set to Data Watch Panel For more information see Using the Data Watch Window on page 276 Tae You can edit binaries easily by just double clicking on the bit to change it or click tq on it and enter a new value gt To display or hide the Data Watch Panel e Onthe View menu click Data Watch Panel or click Data in the panel toolbar gt To add an address in the Network Editor to the Data Watch Panel 1 Move the cursor to the address that you want to add to the Data Watch Panel list 2 On the Data menu click Add Watch The address is added to the Data Watch Panel You can also track addresses and functions from the Data Watch Panel gt To track a single logic element in the Data Watch Panel 1 Move the cursor to the address or instruction that you want to track 2 Onthe Data menu click Track The address or instruction is added to the top of the Data Watch Panel 122 Network editor panel descriptions p N Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor To track all addresses in the Data Watch Panel e On the Data menu click Track Network The first 60 addresses in the network will be added to the Data Watch Panel All other addresses are ignored To track all discrete addresses in the Data Watch Panel e Onthe Data menu click Track Discrete The first 60 discrete addresses in the network will be added to the Data Wa
215. hematical operations in equation networks Mathematical functions in equation networks Using register address lists Setting up an enable contact Equations displayed within the Network Editor Using the PCFL Editor Introduction to the PCFL editor Editing PCFL registers Editing PCFL input output flags Editing the PCFL equation block Customizing the PCFL configuration file Printing Printing Printing a network Printing selected data Lister Network printing options Documentation tables Controller tables Mismatch tables 210 211 211 213 214 217 218 219 219 220 220 220 227 228 229 231 231 233 237 238 239 240 243 244 245 246 249 255 261 262 262 263 264 265 267 268 12 13 Formatting a printout Quick picks Using custom quick picks Print preview Print to file Changing the printout font Changing the print setup Using the Data Watch Window Using the Data Watch Window The Data Watch panel About the Address Contents table About the Assembly Register in the Data Watch Window Displaying the Data Watch Window General procedures Setting the sample rate Adding addresses to the Address Contents table Deleting addresses from the Address Contents table Setting the font size Changing the radix Creating and using Data Watch Window files Exporting a DWW file to a DIF file Setting triggers Clamping data Disabling and forcing discretes Editing register contents Working with the views Da
216. hen keeps the project checked out so you can continue working on it 402 Checking In a project Appendix G NxT and fxManager Type a comment 256 character maximum about the changes made while the project was checked out Click OK The Server is updated with your latest changes and the version number is incremented within the project list Getting a read only copy of a project Use Get Latest Version to retrieve a read only copy of a project and place that copy on your computer Use this command if you only need to perform a build operation on a project or to view a project without making any changes gt To get a read only copy of a project 1 3 From the Project Manager select the NxT project you want to get Click Gl or on the Version menu click Get Latest Version fxManager copies the read only version of the project to your local computer Click to view the project Labelling a project Normally different versions of projects are only identified by the version number Adding a label to a project gives it a more descriptive name gt To add a label to a project 1 From the Project Manager select the project you want to label Click Bl or from the File menu select Label The Label dialog box appears Apply Label to passenger door conveyor Project passenger door conveyor Version 4 Date 4 2 98 4 21 14 PM Label hoodlack _ specs Cancel Type a brief note in the Label box
217. hen viewing Equation Networks from the main Network Editor Blocking Blocking operations on Equation Networks are limited to single cells or full network blocks The only blocking operation not allowed is a block save saved blocks cannot have Equation Networks Cursor movement You can only move the cursor onto the input contact or output coils of an Equation Network Cut and Paste You can Copy part of the Equation Network into the clipboard but you cannot Paste into it Similarly the Cut operation will copy material into the clipboard but will not delete anything The Equation Network Editor must be used for modifying Equation Networks Display menu Tables and lists created using commands from the Display menu will include items used in Equation Networks Find Locate Coil and Global searches All search operations will find and replace searched for items within Equation Networks The search result tables will show Eqn for any addresses that are part of the actual equation of an Equation Network Instruction Speed buttons These have no effect when viewing Equation Networks Online mode Power flow is shown using settings from the Network Display setup dialog box Any contact or coil receiving power will show power flow If the enable contact passes power the equation box will also change to show power flow Forcing an Equation Network output coil on or off affects how power is passed LE through that coil howeve
218. hough this typically won t be a problem 3 In When Max Size Reached select Stop to halt the recording process or Reset to initialize the log file empty all contents then restart recording 288 Using the Data Logger view Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Recording data to the log file Although the Data Logger view is provided specifically for recording data to a file you can also record data from the Trend and Spreadsheet views You record data to the currently open DWW file To set the maximum size of this file click Settings then click Log File Setup gy You cannot append a recorded file You can only overwrite the file If you are writing data to a file which already contains records you will be prompted to confirm the overwrite To record data to the log file e From the Data Watch Window Data Logger Trend or Spreadsheet views click Record to File on the Operations menu You can also click the Rec button To pause the recording e From the Data Watch Window Data Logger Trend or Spreadsheet views click Pause on the Operations menu or ij To stop recording e From the Data Watch Window Data Logger Trend or Spreadsheet views click Record to File on the Operations menu or click the Rec button To move through the records e To set the recording to the first data record click First on the Operations menu or click PRT e To set the recording to the previous record c
219. hrough 9 and letters A through F Instruction One of the programmable controller s instruction set I O Input Output I O Configurator A PLC internal operation that maps logic element addresses to physical I O cards Also known as the Traffic Cop Ladder Logic A relay based programming language typically used in programmable logic controllers So called because it looks vaguely like a ladder Ladder Logic Documentation Text information notes and other descriptions of the ladder logic Ladder Logic Listing A printout of a group of networks which make up a ladder logic program 416 Glossary of Terms Glossary Latch A coil the state of which is backed up in memory Lines per page The number of lines printed on a page when printing ladder logic listings Lister The Lister prints ladder logic as well as various documentation and controller reports Load To retrieve data from a disk or other source Loader A module that reads and writes ladder logic from a personal computer to a programmable controller or an industrial programming terminal It also starts and stops a programmable controller from a personal computer Local I O One of four major architectures for input output systems also see Distributed I O Remote I O and Peer to peer Communications The PLC and I O modules communicate directly through wiring from the field For Quantum controllers local I O allows a CPU power supply and
220. ialog box appears Select VME Bus from the list Type the appropriate value in the Slave Interrupt Level field Boards on a VME Bus can send and respond to messages on seven interrupt levels numbered from 1 to 7 This field determines which interrupt level the board uses when it s acting as a slave 4 Type a value between 1 and 255 in the Status ID field When the VME controller receives an interrupt while acting as a slave this is the value it sends 5 Select an appropriate value for Master Release Mode This field determines when a board acting as a master relinquishes its master status Valid settings are Release on Request ROR Release When Done RWD Release On Clear ROC or Bus Capture and Hold BCAP The proper setting depends on how your Quantum network is configured 6 Select an appropriate value for Master Arbitration Type This field determines how the controller will operate Valid settings are Not System Controller Primary Mode PRI or Round Robin Mode RRS 7 Select the appropriate value for Master VMEBus Request Level This field determines what priority the board has when trying to acquire master status It can range from BRO the lowest to BR3 the highest 84 VME Bus extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller 8 For each interrupt level from Interrupt 1 to Interrupt 7 select whether it should be Enabled or Disabled These fields will only have an effect when the VME acts as a master If an in
221. ic I O Specific I O is one of two communication methods used by the Peer Cop extension the other is Global I O Specific I O uses a one to one communication method and requires an acknowledgment from the receiving device which creates a certain amount of overhead When using Specific I O the destination controller must accept the entire block of data from the source controller This means that the Index value used in Global I O is not necessary Specific I O allows you to configure multiple defined data blocks for transmission to specific devices on the Modbus Plus network The device receiving the data must be configured for Specific Input from the broadcast device The length in words of the specific input configured in the destination controller must be identical in length to the specific output configured in the source controller The input data however can be stored in any type of reference desired That is five words of 4xxxx data can be stored into five words of 0xxxx memory area gt To edit a Specific Output 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears LE Ensure the necessary Peer Cop links are defined before continuing 2 Inthe Tree Control click the Specific I O to edit The Specific Input and Specific Output fields appear in the Details area of the window 3 Inthe Specific Output list select a source controller i e the outp
222. ick Search Next If the search is successful the previous dialog box Documentation Summary or the Documentation Editor is repositioned to the matching record Searching for specific documentation 213 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To search by blank descriptor 1 From the Documentation Search dialog box click Blank Descriptor 2 Click Search Next If the search is successful the previous dialog box either the Summary or Editor is repositioned to the next record that does not have any documentation associated with it gt To search for a symbol 1 From the Documentation Search dialog box click Symbol 2 Type the symbol in Search For 3 Click Search Next The symbol must begin with the specified text for a match to be found Documentation Summary or Documentation Editor is repositioned to the matching record Because a search continues from the last matched record it s possible you won t find a match between the current position and end of the database In this situation you re given the option to continue the search from the beginning Using the Documentation editor The Documentation Editor lets you describe in detail your logic addresses Traffic Cop Configuration and other references You can document addresses networks segments labels drops racks and slots This documentation can be displayed automatically whenever the reference is used in programming logic configuring I O and generating printer li
223. ick Write NxT displays the Database Controller Validation window before writing to a controller Database Controller Validation compares the controller and the database to confirm that they are compatible Potential problems to consider are The controller being written to may not have enough memory for the logic being written The controller address ranges many not be large enough e The controller instruction set many not match the database e The database may use duplicate coils which most controllers do not support 6 Ensure your controller and database match Click Write Initializing logic in a controller Initializing logic erases the networks register contents and ASCII messages in a programmable controller The controller must be stopped before you can initialize logic It is strongly recommended that you read the contents of the controller to a backup database before initializing logic gt To initialize logic information stored in the controller ensure that its contents have been read to a You are about to erase the contents of your controller If you want to save any database 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Initialize Logic A confirmation dialog box appears 2 Click Yes 104 Initializing logic in a controller Chapter 5 Working with Controllers Transferring memory contents to controller EEPROM This function works only with
224. iew Networks display 1 If you aren t looking at the PID Tuner or PID Summary displays on the Data menu click PID Summary 2 The PID View Networks is one of three displays that can be shown in this window If the PID View Networks display isn t the one that appears click View Net The PID View Networks display appears gt To move the network view to a different PID e Click Previous or Next to cycle through the PID PID2 instruction blocks located in your database PID View Networks display 303 14 Working with Macros In this chapter Introduction to macros 306 Editing a macro 308 Using macro parameters 308 Adding and removing macros from your logic database 309 The Network Editor s macro overview display 310 Making changes in macros 311 Automating macro insertions with Codegen 313 Appending a macro and database 313 CGF batch file descriptions 315 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Introduction to macros 306 When writing logic networks you may find yourself reusing pieces of code again and again changing addresses only for a few of the variables In these cases subroutines might not be suitable such as when large numbers of variables are involved or when you want to reuse the same piece of code in different projects What you re looking for is a macro Macros are generic pieces of logic networks you create with parameters instead of actual addresses Macros are programmed offline in the Network Edi
225. igh Speed Pulse or 4 5V TTL Inputs Output DAP 253 LowTemp 110VDC 8 Point Input 4 Point VIC 212 4 High Speed Pulse or 12 VDC Inputs Output DAP 292 60 VDC 8 Point Input 4 Point Output VIC 224 4 High Speed Pulse or 24 VDC Inputs DAU 202 2 Channel Register Output 10V ZAE 201 High speed Counter Positioner 2 Relay DAU 204 4 Channel Analog Output Opto Isolation ZAE 204 4 Channel High speed Counter Positioner DAU 208 8 Channel Register Output 10V 376 O cards supported in alphabetical order B800 cards Card Description Card Appendix F I O Cards Supported Description B802 008 115 VAC 8 Point Output Module B863 032 4 Channel Register Input TTL Level B803 008 115 VAC 8 Point Input Module B864 001 8 Channel Register Output TTL Level B804 016 115 VAC 16 Point Output Module B865 001 8 Channel Register Input TTL Level B804 116 115 VAC 16 Point Output Module B868 001 8 Channel Register Output TTL Level B805 016 115 VAC 16 Point Input Module B869 001 8 Channel Register Input TTL Level B806 032 115 VAC 32 Point Output Module B872 002 4 20 mA 1 5V 4 Channel Analog Output B806 124 24 VAC 32 Point Output Module B872 011 Selectable 4 Channel Voltage Output B807 032 115 VAC 32 Point Input Module B872 100 4 20mA 4 Channel Current Output Module B807 132 115 VAC 32 Point Input Module B872 200
226. igurable 137 Registers Configuring 56 Contents Utilities 156 Documenting 139 149 Editing in the Data Watch Window 286 Editing Operations 139 442 Index Extended Memory Copying Blocks 151 Filling Registers 152 Moving Blocks 150 Timer Configuring 58 Utilities Copying Blocks 157 Filling Blocks 157 Moving Blocks 156 Registration product 4 Relational operator 235 Relocating Logic During a Write 104 Remote Channels Configuring 56 Remote I O RIO processor 180 Removing Deleted Records 220 Replace Global 161 Restoring a Backed Up Database 22 Retracing Searches 167 RIO Remote I O 180 Rows Inserting and Deleting 170 SOs S908 Setting I O Points per Drop 65 S980 Address Configuration Extension 81 SA85 Adapter Initializing 29 Sample Rate in the Data Watch Window 279 Saving a Database 21 default database path 32 with Back Up Function 22 Saving Blocks of Logic 171 Scanning a Network 50 Scheduled Comparisons 329 Screen Setup Customizing 117 Search Panel 167 Searching Coils 174 Documentation 213 by Blank Descriptor 214 by Descriptor 213 by Reference 213 by Symbol 214 Duplicate Coils 174 Logic 165 Retracing 167 Viewing Results 166 Security for ProWORX NxT fxManager Access Control 386 Password based security 24 Security Settings changing 24 Protected Register List 25 Segment Scheduler 134 Segments Configuring 56 Selecting a Device 44 Network Scan 50 with a Direct Connection 45 with a Modem Connectio
227. ile A Profibus Station is a collection of Profibus configuration files contained ina specific directory structure These files contain such information as e Controller configuration e Profibus bus and communication parameters e Profibus network topology and e Profibus to Modicon address maps gt Tocreate the Profibus Station in the NxT Profibus Utility 1 Inthe MDF File box of the NxT Profibus utility type the name and path of your NxT database s MDF file or click Browse to navigate to it 2 Inthe Profibus Station area select a drive for your Profibus Station from the drop down menu 3 Do one of the following e Use existing Plant and Station Directories by selecting them from the drop down menus e Create new directories by typing a Plant name in the Plant Directory box then a Station name in the Station Directory box 4 Inthe Options area select Create a Profibus Station for use with the SPU Software 5 Click Start The Profibus Utility creates a Profibus Station in the target directories with information from the MDF file Its progress is displayed in the Status box Step 3 Start the PROFI KON software you received with your Profibus hardware and configure your Profibus network with it Refer to its manual for more information Save your work as a CNF file to use in Step 4 86 Profibus extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller To set up a Profibus network you must have Softing s PROFI
228. imilar to each other e Moved Click to print the network logic that only differs in location e Not Found Click to print the logic of all networks found in one database but not the other gt To see networks of logic resembling each other but not identical 1 Inthe Network Compare window click Similar The View Similar screen appears View Similar Networks Master Network 0001 5 ee al pe eee 9 Differences between the two heol 10028 bot odoi databases or the database and your controller appear in red 1 ryt K 0000 00003 00033 00101 00033 00044 4 00033 00107 00001 Toggle Next Match Clear Match Help 2 Do one of the following Toggle Click to switch views between the master database and the second database or controller Switching between the networks of logic makes it easier to spot any differences e Next Match Click to move to the next pair of similar networks At the end of the list of matches click Next Match again to go to the start of the list e Clear Match Click to remove the current pair of networks from the Similar list This doesn t delete the networks of logic themselves only their entry in the Network Compare window 336 Using the Compare Summary window Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function gt To see networks appearing in one database but not the other gy 1 Inthe Network Compare win
229. ing Database 17 Operations for Registers Editing 139 Operators in Equation Networks 233 Operators List Panel 230 OPT Files 270 Optimized Mode 111 Output Coils in Equation Networks 230 Output Variable OV defined 298 OV See Output Variable P Page Numbering Printing Option 269 Page Titles 208 Entering 216 Printing Option 269 Panels Index 439 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Back Referencing 120 Data Watch 122 Instruction List 121 Symbol Summary 121 Traffic Cop Display 124 Parentheses in Equation Networks 236 Password Security see Security Settings Passwords fxManager 387 NxT Security Settings 24 PCFL Configuration File 255 PCFL Editor Customizing the Register Displays 255 Editing Registers for 245 Equation Editor See PCFL Equation Editor Input Flags Editing 247 Viewing 247 Output Flags Viewing 248 PCFL DAT file 255 Radix changing the 245 Status Register Flags 246 PCFL Equation Editor 249 Equation Text Mode 250 Equation Text Format 250 Function List 252 Operator List 251 Postfix Entry Mode 252 Postfix Codes 253 Register Entry Mode PCFL DAT 255 File Format 256 Input Output Flag Diagram Formats 259 PCMCIA Transfering to Controller FLASH 107 Peer Cop Configuration Extension 89 440 Index Permissions fxManager 387 ProWORX NxT 386 Phone Numbers Entering 47 PID blocks 298 About 298 Auto vs Manual mode 300 Engineering Range 301 Monitoring 299 See also PID displays Tuning 300 PID displays A
230. ins a series of 0s and 1s that indicate the bit pattern for this value For example in the PCFL On Off Control instruction block bits 6 and 7 of the input status register comprise the Manual Forcing flag If bit 6 is on 1 and bit 7 is off 0 this sets the Manual Forcing mode to Manual forced OFF The Bit field for this setting would be 10 258 Customizing the PCFL configuration file Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Field Description Bit field The values of individual bits within an input flag often description indicate different things for different subfunctions These lines of the configuration file indicate the possible settings for each flag and the bits that must be set to indicate that setting The Bit field description contains a description of what the setting indicated in the preceding Bit field means Values in the Bit field description appear in the list box in the Set Inputs dialog box for the appropriate Input flag Output flag The offset of the register where the PCFL subfunction s register offset output flags are stored Output flag This section describes how the PCFL Editor draws the lines diagram that connect bits to the flag descriptions in the Input Flags format and Output Flags dialog boxes 2 For more information on this field see the section following this table Input output flag diagram formats This section describes how the PCFL Editor draws the lines that connect bits
231. ion window allows you to configure a controller s memory It contains many important options including the number of coils registers segments of logic and I O cards the controller will use the amount of memory it sets aside for configuration extensions and the number and size of its ASCII messages gy Configuring a controller s memory can be time consuming It s a good idea to H keep the controller s user s manual nearby in case you need to refer to it Before you begin make sure you have the right type of controller selected for your database The controller s type appears in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Network Editor The options that appear in the General tab depend on the controller type so if the wrong one is selected you can spend time configuring options your controller does not support To change the type of controller for your database see Controller configuration Controller tab on page 64 Select the value you want 19 cianga then type a new General Ports Controller User Loadables Loadable Library E Oxxxx Ei Total Messages Battery Coil Ox Axxxx 00064 Message Words Timer Register 4x 3xxxx 00099 ASCII Ports Time of Day Clock 4x 00000 4Axxxx 01800 Watch Dog Tm 10ms 0000 The configuration options Segments 02 Cont Extenson Size that appear depend on the 170 Drops iK o2 Config Ext Used 00025 controller you select in the 120 Cards 0022 _M Enable Skips
232. ions this is c proworx nxt nxton exe or nxt exe Installing ProWORX NxT 3 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Click Next Type ProWORX NxT Online or ProWORX NxT as the shortcut name then click Next 6 Select an icon then click Finish icon of an NxT editor and select Create Shortcut or right click the icon of an editor and select Create Shortcut Now move the new shortcut to where you want it b You can also make shortcuts from the folder where you installed NxT Click the Registering your product If you received one please take a few moments to fill out the registration card in your software package Registering helps us notify you of updates to this product 4 Registering your product Chapter 1 Welcome Starting ProWORX NxT Windows 3 1 and Windows NT 3 51 Once you have installed ProoWORX NxT open its Program Group ProWwORX by default then double click the program item icon of the editor you want Double click to launch NxT Offline SONATE 23 RAS LS w Prow0Rx Prow0Rx DXF Viewer NxT Help unlnstall Product NxT NxT Online ProwWOR Authorization Double click to Double click to view JIC and Double click to remove Double click to convert launch NxT On Process drawings if you in NxT from your computer NxT from a demo to a full line stalled them version When you start either the Offline or Online Editor a minimized program called Graphics Server appears in the Program Manager next to
233. iplexed BCD Output Module RIM125 16 Function Analog Input ROM221 16 Function 120V AC Output RIM126 8 Channel Analog Thermo Input ROM271 16 Function 120V AC Relay Output RIM127 12 Channel RTD Input Module ROM421 35 140 VAC 16 Output Module RIM131 High Speed Counter Module ROM431 16 Function 240V AC Output RIM144 Multiplexed BCD Input Module ROM441 32 Function 24V DC Output RIM301 85 140 VAC 16 Input Module ROM871 64 Function Relay Output RIM331 32 Function 24V DC Input CRM931 RG Register RIO Adapter Module RIM361 16 Function 240V AC DC Input CRM931 D8 Digital 16 Slot RIO Adapter RIM731 64 Function 24V AC DC Input CRM931 D4 Digital 8 Slot RIO Adapter SIM116 16 In Simulator CRM931 D2 Digital 4 Slot RIO Adapter ROM121 4 Function Analog Output CRM931 D1 Digital 2 Slot RIO Adapter 382 SY MAX cards Appendix G NxT and fxManager ProWORX NxT User s Guide How NxT works with fxManager If you ve used SecurWORxX Local Station for NxT from Total Control Products Canada Inc before you ll have no problem getting to know fxManager fxManager is SecurWORxX re engineered to give you version control security audit trailing and scheduling for your entire database development system fxManager allows you to e Track changes made to projects and settings in fxManager e Monitor and record actions performed by users e Control access to projects and settings in fxManager and e Manage and execute scheduled events When fxManager i
234. ir executive firmware in flash RAM are Quantum Micro and E Series controllers and certain Quantum series Remote I O and Distributed I O processors It is highly recommended that you only attempt Flash RAM Executive operations LE if you are directly connected to the device by e The local Modbus or Modbus Plus port of the controller or e The local Modbus port of the device You may not be able to establish the needed connection through any other port 108 Transferring the Flash RAM executive Chapter 5 Working with Controllers gt To read a controller s Flash RAM Executive into a disk file 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen on the Controllers menu click Executive Flash The Flash RAM Executive dialog box appears Click Read In the Source box type the device number of the device whose executive you want to copy to disk Alternatively click Net Scan to scan the network for available devices Flash RAM operations are not supported over Ethernet networks only Modbus and Modbus Plus In Device Type click the type of the device from which to read If you are reading from a Local Head or RIO Drop Card in the appropriate boxes type the device s Head Number and Drop Number In Destination type the full path and file name or click Browse to the file to save the device s executive This file must have a BIN extension A This file will be completely overwritten 7 Click OK After a check t
235. is adaptor has two female 25 pin DB25S connectors enclosed in a plastic housing e 680 Adaptor Cable for use with Modicon 984 x80 and x85 models This cable has a female 25 pin DB25S connector and a male 9 pin DE9P connector IBM AT or PS 2 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X The Modbus Cable and 9 Pin Adaptor combination are used to connect an AT computer with a male 9 pin DE9P serial port to a 984A 984B or 984X controller Plug the 9 pin female connector of the 9 Pin Adaptor into your computer s serial port and the 25 pin male connector into the Modbus Cable s female connector Plug the Modbus Cable s male connector into the controller s Modbus port Modbus port 1 is normally used IBM AT to Modicon 984 x80 or x85 Quantum or Compact Series The Modbus Cable 9 Pin Adaptor and 680 Adaptor Cable are used to connect an AT computer with a male 9 pin DE9P serial port to a 984 Model x80 or x85 controller Plug the 9 pin female connector of the 9 Pin Adaptor into your computer s serial port and the 25 pin male connector into the Modbus Cable s female connector Plug the Modbus Cable s male connector into the 680 Adaptor Cable s female connector Plug the 680 Adaptor Cable s male connector into the controller s 9 pin Modbus port 356 The Modbus cable kit Appendix C Modbus Cable Kit IBM AT to Modicon 584 The Modbus Cable 9 Pin Adaptor and 584 Adaptor Module are used to connect an AT computer with a male 9 pin DE9P seria
236. ision Bde 2 1 5 addition 3 2 5 multiplication 302 6 power exponentiation 3 82 9 that is 3 3 Editing the PCFL equation block 251 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Functions are applied to a single expression enclosed in parentheses after the function name You can use the following functions in your equation Function Meaning ABS absolute value LN natural log SQRT square root SIN sine COs cosine ARCSIN arc sine ARCTAN arc tangent EXP exponent LOG logarithm TAN tangent ARCCOS arc cosine Editing PCFL equation registers PCFL instruction block s middle node holds the address of a series of 64 consecutive registers a 4x register referred to as 4yyyy In a PCFL Equation block the first 14 registers hold status information and equation inputs while the equation itself is stored in registers 4yyyy 14 through 4yyyy 64 The Postfix Entry mode of the PCFL Equation dialog box lets you edit those registers directly polish notation This is different from infix notation the left to right equation 8 The PCFL equation is stored in postfix notation sometimes called reverse format you re probably used to For more information on postfix notation see About Postfix notation on page 254 252 Editing the PCFL equation block gt To edit the PCFL equation registers directly Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor 1 From the PCFL Editor click Eqn Edit
237. isplay a controller or database s current ASCII messages 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click ASCII The ASCII Messages window appears ASCII Messages x r Messages Used Words Used Big Esch mot To type a new message or 0001 of 0100 00010 of 00100 Initialize Resize Ng Msg Used edit an existing one select it Msg Used Conveyor On then click Edit Message odi 0010 0017 0000 0002 0000 0018 0000 0003 0000 0019 0000 0004 0000 0020 0000 0005 0000 0021 0000 0006 0000 0022 0000 0007 0000 0023 0000 0008 0000 0024 0000 0009 0000 0025 0000 0010 0000 0026 0000 0011 0000 0027 0000 0012 0000 0028 0000 0013 0000 0029 0000 Edit Message OK NxT displays the codes for the selected ASCII message 0015 0000 0031 0000 Cancel 0016 0000 0032 0000 Cut Copy iS tC ee Delete Hep 2 Selecta message to view The raw codes for the message appear on the right 3 Click Play Back The Message Playback window appears showing the message as it will appear ona screen on printer output or ina text file on a hard drive Click Next and Previous to scroll through the other messages in the controller or database 4 Click Close to close the Message Playback window gt Toremove the ASCII messages in the controller e Click Initialize All the ASCII messages are deleted from the controller 72
238. isting CFG file not create a new one Create a CFG file with the Profibus Utility before configuring your Profibus network with SPU931 When you save your work SPU931 updates the Profibus Station s CFG file The Profibus Utility then imports the updated information from the CFG file back into your NxT database in Step 5 Use SPU931 to e Map Profibus I O points and diagnostics to registers in your controller s memory and e Assign bus controllers and the map the topology of the bus Step 5 In the Profibus Utility transfer information from the updated Profibus Station into your NxT database NxT now shows the Profibus configuration extension in the Configuration Extensions area gt To transfer a Profibus Station 1 Inthe MDF File box type the name and path of your NxT database s MDF file or click Browse to navigate to it The Profibus Utility transfers the Profibus configuration to this file 2 Inthe Profibus Station area select the drive where your Profibus Station is located from the drop down menu 3 Select your Profibus Station s Plant and Station Directories from the drop down menus The Profibus Utility reads the Profibus configuration from the CFG file in the Station Directory 4 Inthe Options area select Move Profibus configuration to ProWORxX database 5 Click Start The Profibus Utility transfers the Profibus configuration from the Station Directory to your database s MDF file Its progress i
239. item from the Operators panel directly into your equation i Foracomplete list of operators and their meanings see Mathematical operations in equation networks on page 233 230 The Equation Network Editor display Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks Functions list panel The Functions list panel contains a list of standard math functions you can include in your equation Each of these functions takes one argument enclosed in brackets following the function name The argument can be any valid value or expression For example COS 35 40001 returns the cosine of 35 plus the number stored at address 40001 You can insert a function from the Functions panel directly into your equation Fora complete list of functions see Mathematical functions in equation networks on page 237 Symbols list panel The Symbols list panel contains a list of all previously defined symbols for use in an Equation Network You can insert an item from the Symbols panel directly into your equation an output coil address box or the enable contact address box For more information on symbols see Symbolic addressing on page 164 Equation format ProWORX NxT expects equation elements to appear in a specific format Operations and functions each have their own format Also for each value you must specify what kind of value it is register address constant or symbol and its data type signed integer unsigned integer etc Eq
240. its own modem Once the connection is established the computer and controller behave as if they were connected directly through a Modbus network Modbus Plus Modicon s fast peer to peer protocol standard on many 984 and other controllers Select this option if your computer is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a network adapter card such as an SA85 Ethernet Gateway A gateway connects two networks that would not normally be able to communicate with each other NxT supports Modicon s EMBP Gateway which bridges your computer s TCP IP Ethernet to the controller s Modbus Plus network TCP IP Some controllers can be equipped with TCP IP cards Select this option if both your computer and controller use TCP IP networking regardless of whether they are on the same network or are connected by a gateway This chapter also tells you how to select and attach to a controller both directly and by scanning your entire network for devices 34 Connecting to controllers Overview Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller Setting up communications for your PC Before your computer can connect to a controller or for some systems the gateway which relays information to and from the controller NxT must be configured for your communication system To connect with each other your computer and controller must be configured for the same communication system with the same parameters In the Communication Setup dialog box
241. k OK To replace the card within a particular slot use the Traffic Cop card menus Click LE the slot you want to replace then select a card from the Base Modules Modicon Ibus and Generic Ibus menus at the top of the Traffic Cop dialog box 202 Momentum M1 I O systems Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop Using the I O Drawing Generator The I O Drawing Generator is used to create CAD drawings of 800 Micro Quantum and A120 I O gt To activate the I O Drawing Generator From the Network Editor on the Display menu I O Drawing Generator The I O Drawings Generator dialog box appears 1 0 Drawings Generator x Drawing s C Intermediate Final Directories Symbol C PROWORX NXTA DRAWINGS WIC Browse Master C PROWORX NXTADRAWINGS WIC Browse Intermediate C PROWORX NXT DRAWINGSSINTER Browse Final c PROWORX NXT DRAWINGS FINAL Browse Options I Overwrite Existing Drawings Controller Prefix E T Ignore Missing Master Drawings I Save Above Settings on Close Generate Display Help The Traffic Cop default setting for the drawings is Intermediate and the default directories are those directories previously used e Click Browse to change the directories The File Open dialog box appears e Click Generate to generate the drawing There are different symbols you can use to represent real world devices in your I O drawings Type these
242. ken directly to the Network Editor Saving a macro Normally changes made to the macro database are saved as you make them so you don t have to explicitly save your work You can make a backup of your macro database the same way you would a regular logic database For more information see Backing up and restoring a database offline only on page 22 2 k d Introduction to macros 307 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Editing a macro In general you edit a macro with the same tools you use in the Network Editor However several Network Editor functions are disabled when editing a macro database Among them are e The Traffic Cop e Config Extensions e ASCII functions e Extended memory e Segment Summary e I O Drawing Generator Goto Segment e Loader functions from the Controller menu Using macro parameters While in the Macro Editor you can assign macro parameters in place of register addresses or symbols These are the addresses that will change for each insertion into the main logic database Macro parameters use this format t xx e The t represents the type of address 0 for 0xxxx 1 for 1xxxx 3 for 3xxxx and 4 for 4xxxx e The xx represents the parameter number which can be from 1 to 50 For example a macro parameter of 304 would represent the fourth programmable address of the form 3xxxx Note that 304 and 404 refer to different parameters and are mapped to totally different addre
243. l port to a 584 processor A Modicon W190 Cable the cable used to connect a 584 to a P190 Programming Terminal is also required Plug the 9 pin female connector of the 9 Pin Adaptor into your computer s serial port and the 25 pin male connector into the Modbus Cable s female connector Plug the Modbus Cable s male connector into either end of the 584 Adaptor Module Plug the other end of the 584 Adaptor Module into the W190 Cable Plug the W190 Cable s circular connector into the 584 controller s Modbus port IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X The Modbus Cable is used to connect a PC XT or PS 2 computer with a 25 pin male DB25P serial port to a 984 processor Plug the Modbus Cable s female connector into your computer s serial port and the male connector into the 25 pin Modbus port on the 984 Modbus port 1 is normally used IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 984 x80 or x85 Quantum or Compact Series The Modbus Cable and 680 Adaptor Cable are used to connect a PC XT or PS 2 computer with a 25 pin male DB25P serial port to a 984 Model x80 or x85 series controller Plug the Modbus Cable s female connector into your computer s serial port Plug the Modbus Cable s male connector into the 680 Adaptor Cable s female connector Plug the 680 Adaptor Cable s male connector into the controller s 9 pin Modbus port IBM PC XT or PS 2 to Modicon 584 The Modbus Cable and 584 Adaptor Module are used to connect a PC XT
244. l the documentation from the Logbook Short Comments Page Titles Long Comments Symbol and Descriptor Tables gt To activate the Doc Tables 1 On the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears 2 Click Doc Tables Doc Tables x X Short Comments Titles Long Comments Symbol Table Options Ranges Commentary xnxx None Full Brief Dox None Cross References Nets None le Column Wrap Subs None Gxxxx file None Include in tables None F Items Used In Logic None None Items With Descriptions F All Items None None None on jam w IN i None lo ko o IN Im None None OK Toggle All Cancel Help 3 Click an option to select or clear it LE Click Toggle All to select or clear all options e Types of documentation Log Book Short Comments and so on to print e Under Commentary Full or Brief documentation e Under Cross References Column or Wrap format Documentation tables 265 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Cross references provide a way of relating references in ladder logic Any coil with an associated contact is cross referenced to the contact location References used in function blocks and elsewhere in the logic are cross referenced to their locations A new cross reference is performed if logic or PLC configuration has changed or cross reference files do not alre
245. le bits The PCFL Editor determines how to change each bit automatically For example within the input flags for the PCFL Analog Input instruction block is the Module Output Format which takes up five bits of information When setting the Module Output Format you don t have to change the five bits individually Instead you select a Module Output Format from a list and the PCFL Editor changes the appropriate bits 2 To customize the display and flag list for a subfunction s input and output flags see Customizing the PCFL Configuration File on page 255 246 Editing PCFL input output flags Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor gt To view a PCFL block s input flags e From the PCFL Editor click Input Flags The Input Flags dialog box appears gt Toedit a PCFL block s input flags 1 From the Input Flags dialog box click Set The Set Inputs dialog box appears Res 1000 5000 Editing PCFL input output flags 247 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 2 The Set Inputs dialog box displays every input flag used by the instruction along with a list box for each flag To change a particular flag select the new setting from its box 3 Click Apply to confirm your changes 4 When you re done click Close You are returned to the Input Flags dialog box Your new settings should be reflected in the Input Flags display gt To view a PCFL block s output flags e From the PCFL Editor click Output
246. ler s hardware details on page 65 Configuring simple ASCII ports Some Modicon controllers have RS 232 ports as part of Remote I O drops Advanced programmers can use these ports called simple ASCII or ASCII DAP ports for serial communications between controllers and data terminal equipment In ladder logic use the Block Move BLKM instruction to send and receive Simple ASCII messages 62 Controller configuration Ports tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Set communication parameters for simple ASCII ports in the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration window 4 Set the number of simple ASCII ports your controller has in the ASCII Ports field of the General tab Otherwise the ASCII ports will not appear in this window For more information see Controller configuration General tab on page 55 To edit simple ASCII port parameters 1 Do one of the following e Double click the parameters for the port to edit e Select the parameters for a port then click Setup Port 2 For each parameter select a value from its drop down list Parameter Parity Description Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd Odd Parity or even Even Parity If parity is set to None the check bit is not added The PC and controller must use the same parity setting Default is even Stop Data Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the
247. lers are using the right logic and are configured properly and that a local database is the same as your operation s master database You can compare elements manually or schedule routine checks The Compare function examines any or all of these elements e Networks of logic e Coils used e Controller configuration Coil state e Present user loadables Input state Traffic Cop I O settings e 3xxxx registers e Segment Scheduler settings e 4xxxx registers e ASCII port parameters e Coils disabled e ASCII messages e Inputs disabled Using the on demand compare function This Compare function finds and highlights differences between a database and a controller s memory or between two databases When the comparison is complete NxT displays the findings on screen and records them to a log and can send them to a printer To use the compare function select the database and controller or the two databases to compare start the comparison then view its results gt To select a master database for a Comparison 1 On the Tools menu click Compare then click Compare again 2 Ifyou have a database open the Compare function automatically selects it as your master database otherwise you are prompted for a database The Open dialog box appears 326 Using the compare function Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function 3 Type the path and file name of the database to use or navigate to it then click OK
248. lick Previous on the Operations menu or click 4 e To set the recording to the last data record click Last on the Operations menu or click AE e To set the recording to the next data record click Next on the Operations menu or click p Using the Data Logger view 289 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Trend view The Trend view is used to show a graphical representation of data points You can view both discrete states and register values create setpoints and alarm values as references and record data from this view You can adjust the x and y axis values to zoom the trend display in or out gt To display the Trend View e From the Data Watch Window click Trend on the View menu Setting up the Trend display The Trending Setup window lets you configure how data points are to be displayed in the Trend View window Note that this affects the display only not the data values gt To set up the Trend View 1 From the Data Watch window any view click Trending on the Settings menu The Trend Setup dialog box is displayed Trending Setup x YAxis Min T Lo Alarm 100 YAxis Max 1000 Hi Alarm 900 Setpoint 500 Resolution 250 OK Cancel Help 2 In Y Axis Min specify the base value for the Y axis This is the bottom range of the values displayed 3 In Y Axis Max type the top range of the values to be displayed In Setpoint type the Y Axis value of a setp
249. lick Yes if a warning message appears telling you that the selection is too large for Undo gt Step 5 Export the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet as a DIF file e Save the edited database as a DIF file 372 Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel Appendix E DIF Files and Excel gt Step 6 Correct the rows and columns in the DIF header 1 Open the DIF file with a text editor Microsoft s WordPad in Windows 95 or Write in Windows 3 1 open DIF files 2 Switch the VECTORS and TUPLES values in the header of the DIF file TABLE 0 1 EXCEL VECTORS ur Swap these values TUPLES o LE XXXX and X will be numbers 3 Save the edited database as an ASCII DIF file gt Step 7 Import your database back into ProWORX NxT 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Import Export Click Import Type the path and file name of the Excel database Select DIF from the File Type box Click Start The open database is overwritten by the Excel database oO FP YSN Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel 373 Appendix F I O Cards Supported ProWORX NxT User s Guide I O cards supported in alphabetical order A120 cards Card Description Card Description ADU 204 4 Channel Register Input 0 5V DEO 216 24 VDC 16 Point Input Modul
250. line and offline in a familiar Microsoft Windows environment If you know how to use a mouse you can work in ProWORX NxT quite easily About this manual This manual is a guide for installing and operating ProWORX NxT It does not contain information about specific controllers I O cards or ladder logic instructions This kind of hardware and ladder logic information is available in the NxT help system This guide uses the following conventions e Click and double click mean click the left mouse button once or twice respectively while the cursor is positioned on a button or item Right click means click the right mouse button once while the cursor is positioned on a button or item e Bold is used to emphasize fields and buttons and to give instructions e Keystrokes are presented inside angle brackets For example Press ENTER means press the Enter key on your keyboard If you are new to Microsoft Windows ProWORX NxT uses the same operating conventions as most other Windows programs You should be familiar with these conventions before starting to use NxT This manual assumes that you can e Use a mouse to click double click and perform drag and drop operations e Select items using menus toolbars checkboxes and drop down lists e Navigate through standard open and save dialog boxes e Locate items in an online help system If you re new to Windows or haven t used some of these features befor
251. line blank 3 In Column Width select the column width for the five lines of cell description Increasing the width allows less instructions to fit on the screen but more descriptor data and symbol information to be displayed 4 Select or clear the Show coils check box e If you select the check box coils are shown where they are solved by the controller e If you clear the check box coils are always placed in column 11 attached to the solve column by dots 5 Select or clear the Always fit check box e Ifyou select the check box NxT adjusts the size of display elements so that you always see a full network The disadvantage is that display elements may shrink beyond legibility especially when using lower screen resolutions e If you clear the check box scroll bars will appear when a network is too large to display at once 6 Click OK Other than the Always fit option changes made affect only the view selected gt To change views toggle between the four views e Click Eg in the toolbar 118 Customizing the network display Flow Size and Offline Edit Color appear only in Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Customizing the Network Colors This function allows you to select the display colors for e Descriptors e Power Flow Online only e Symbols e Logic Foreground and Background e Back Referencing e The Network Cursor e Data You can also set the size of the Online Editor s Power Flow display
252. ll menu Working with the views 287 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Data Logger view The Data Logger view is used to record data values to file and view them The addresses that are logged are defined in the Data Watch view Log Files from the Data Logger have an extension of DWW Setting up the log file The Log File Setup window lets you configure the maximum size of your log file and determine what NxT should do when the maximum file size is reached The log file size determines the number of records tracked addresses changes that can be stored Generally the file has 40 records of overhead plus three records per address tracked Each record requires 21 bytes so to track 10 addresses for example would require a maximum file size no less than verhea tes 40 10 3 21 Overhead by number of data records 21 Data bytes doesn t write based on sample rate You can find the above equation useful in b A data record is written to the file each time the data changes for an address It estimating how many records data changes a given file size can hold gt To set up the log file 1 From the Data Watch Window on the Settings menu click Log File The Log File Setup dialog box appears Max File Size KB When Max Size Reached Stop M OK Cancel Help 2 In MaxfFile Size type the maximum size in KB of the log file Ensure the maximum file size doesn t exceed available storage space alt
253. ller configuration Loadable library tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Configuring ASCII messages ASCII messages let your controller report information to you in plain language Use them for example if you want to see a written alert on your screen every time a motor switches on or a printout every hour of how many items have passed by a counter Use NxT s ASCII Message window to enter and edit the messages you want your controller or database to send Start by configuring your controller or database to use ASCII messages Confirm that your controller supports them In the General tab of the Controller Configuration window e Set the Total Messages field to the number of messages you want to use e Set the Message Words field to the number of machine words you want to allocate for each message One word is equal to two ASCII characters Remember that the SPACEBAR counts as one character For more information see Controller configuration General tab on page 55 Ensure your ASCII ports are configured correctly in the Ports tab of the Controller Configuration window For more information see Controller configuration Ports tab on page 60 Use the ASCII Read Block READ and ASCII Write Block WRIT in your ladder LE logic to send a message from a controller to your output device such as a screen printer or disk drive Configuring ASCII messages 71 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To d
254. loating point registers is represented by two consecutive input or holding registers So in the IEEE Floating Point column the value displayed for register 40005 is the floating point representation of the 32 bit number stored in registers 40005 and 40006 the value displayed for register 40006 is the value stored in 40006 and 40007 and so on This is why editing a floating point number in one register also affects the display for the next register as well There are three types of register editors e User Configurable Register editor e Extended Memory Register editor e Generic Register editor User Configurable Register editor The User Configurable Register editor is used to edit instruction specific data that you format in a URF file There is a URF file for each instruction which contains all the text and formatting information needed to display the register edit screen and the desired register values The URF file also contains the register where the operation mode is stored gt To edit a register value using the edit window 1 From the Network Editor select the instruction to edit 2 On the Data menu click Register Editor or click I The Register Editor window appears with an instruction specific template Editing register contents 137 ProWORX NxT User s Guide BLKM REGISTER EDITOR x Source 0001n 40033 00050 Dec Source 0002 40034 00200 Dec Source 0003 40035 00090 Dec Source
255. logic cursor If the cursor isn t on a function block the Generic Register Editor is opened instead e ALT T to add the address at the cursor position into the Data Watch Panel or Data Watch Window ALT W to toggle between the Network Editor and the Data Watch Panel Use Insert Delete Key Menus When selected you can access the Insert menu by pressing the INSERT key and the Delete menu by pressing the DELETE key When cleared these keys operate normally and the menus are only accessible from the Edit menu 30 Setting system preferences Chapter 2 Working with a Database Confirm When Overwriting Instructions NxT prompts you to confirm each time you overwrite an existing ladder logic instruction with a new one This security feature is useful when working online Confirm Network Editor Deletions When selected NxT asks you to confirm each time you try to delete an instruction from ladder logic as you work in the Network Editor Use this function to protect your ladder logic especially while working online Prompt for Read When Exiting Online When selected you re prompted each time you exit from the Online Network Editor to perform a read when the controller s contents have changed Fill Single Type References When selected the Instruction Editor automatically fills only single address types and positions the cursor in the entry of the address offset One Line Doc Window Enabled The small One Line Documentation Wind
256. low the scan time when debugging logic so that the controller doesn t solve logic too quickly for you to catch errors 4 In Scans type the number of scans from 1 through 15 to be performed during the sweep then click OK When you are ready to perform the sweep on the Configuration menu click Sweep The Single Sweep dialog box appears Single Sweep Ea Single Sweep Options Parameters _ Invoke Trigger Scans 1 15 Turn Off Cancel Help Performing a sweep online only 177 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 6 Select one of the single sweep options e Invoke Select to start the sweep Trigger Select to set a trigger for the sweep Turn Off Select to shut off the sweep 7 Click OK The controller performs the scans unless you selected Turn Off then stops solving logic with all outputs frozen in their last state You can then browse register contents and perform other diagnostics using this snapshot of the solving process 178 Performing a sweep online only 7 Using the Traffic Cop In this chapter Traffic Cop overview 180 Drops racks and slots 180 Using the Traffic Cop display 181 800 Series Traffic Cop 185 DCP Series Traffic Cop 187 Quantum Traffic Cop 190 Micro 300 Series Traffic Cop 196 200 500 Series Traffic Cop 197 900 Series Traffic Cop 198 A120 Series Traffic Cop 199 Momentum M1 I O systems 199 Using the I O Drawing Generator 203 Displayin
257. lowing e From the Project Manager click or from the File menu select Open The project is opened either in Online or Offline depending on the mode you re currently working in From fxManager right click on the project you have checked out and select Open The Launch dialog box appears Select the mode Launch ProwORX NxT Offline you want to launch NxT in Online Launch ProwORX NxT Online 3 If you re working with ProWORX NxT Online the Controller Address Selection dialog box appears e Click the type of connection you want to establish then select the address one type of connection is available The exact type depends on the controller address used by ProWORX NxT Online the last time it was used The others are disabled For information on changing the choices available in the Controller Address Selection dialog box see page 399 b If you re not starting ProWORX NxT from the fxManager Launch dialog box only 4 When you re finished editing the project check it in so the latest version is stored on the Server For more information see Checking In a project on page 402 Opening an NxT project 397 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Creating a project In earlier versions of NxT databases projects were created from the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or Network Editor With fxManager you can only create projects from fxManager When you create a new project an NxT database i e 984 B S9
258. lp In Source type the Modbus Plus routing path or Modbus address If you re unsure of the routing path or address click Net Scan In Destination type the path and file name for the database If you re unsure of the path and file name click Browse to navigate to the database If you have a database open it becomes the default destination database for the controller read Ensure this is the database you want to use before continuing Click the desired Read Type e Regular reads logic traffic cop configuration loadables ASCII state and disabled tables e Extended Memory reads only the extended memory registers Click Read 102 Working with the controller Chapter 5 Working with Controllers Writing to a controller The Write to Controller function writes the contents of a database to a controller The controller must be stopped before you can write to it gt To write to the controller 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Write to Controller The Write to Controller window is displayed inte to Lontranes xl Type the device address Source Quantum 4247x Destination he re Select Net Scan to view the currently avail C PROWORXANXTMISA_95 42 able devices Type the path and file pao Net Scan name of the database to be written to the controller R You can click Browse to Write Type Regular select a database Re
259. lve regular mathematical equations within the network Not supported by every controller Exponential Notation A format for numbers based on powers of 10 For example 1 35E 4 indicates 1 35 multiplied by 10 to the power of 4 i e with an exponent of 4 which works out to 0 000135 Extended Memory Extra register memory available for some models of 984 584 controllers It is accessed through the XMRD and XMWT functions Extension The three letters after the period in a DOS file name often used to indicate the file s purpose File A collection of information stored on a disk It can contain either a program or data File Name The name of a file NxT uses DOS naming conventions a file name can have up to eight characters followed by a period and a three character extension Force To change the state of a coil or a discrete input overriding any actions in ladder logic For example if a coil is forced off but the ladder logic is trying to turn it on it will remain off Function A ProWORX command or operation Glossary of Terms 415 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Global Address Change An operation in the Network Editor which substitutes one address or a range of addresses for another or several others Head A collection of I O drops tied to one CPU DIO or RIO processor This term is specific to Modicon s Quantum hardware Hexadecimal A base 16 representation of an integer It uses the symbols 0 t
260. m the gt Toscan the health of a network of controllers at regular intervals e On the Tools menu click Monitor then click Monitor LAN The Monitor LAN window appears The Status Indicator shows whether the Time Delay 12 Bhs 0 Emin 0 asec F AutoPrint Monitor LAN Status STOPPED Monitor LAN timer is running or stopped When the LAN Monitor Number Device Address Changes Date Time a detects a status change 1 Micro 512 1 001 00000 05 03 1997 17 06 00 in a controller it notes the event in the log View Log Restart Monitor Close Help The LAN Monitor immediately scans your entire network for controllers For each controller located the LAN Monitor creates a log file containing baseline controller I O and RI O health information This scan may take several minutes then displays the result in the Monitor LAN window You can do the following from the Monitor LAN dialog box e Start Monitor LAN Click to start the timer counting down controllers on your network It records any changes in a controller s health to the controller s log file then resets the timer and starts it counting down for the next cycle The LAN Monitor continues cycling until you stop it b When the timer reaches zero the LAN Monitor analyzes the health of all Stop Monitor LAN Click to stop the timer 322 Checking the health of all controllers on a network Chapter 15 Monitoring your Hardw
261. macros 312 Index 437 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Updating inserted macros 311 Viewed from Network Editor 310 Max Decimal Value System Preference 31 MEM DIP switch 61 Memory See also Extended Memory 150 Memory Pack 65 Memory Protect Switch 105 Message Words Configuring 57 Micro Controller FLASH RAM 106 Micro I O Mode 65 Micro Port Assignments 62 Military Connector 368 Millenium Bug 28 Miscompares Printing 333 Printing Network 336 Viewing 333 334 Viewing Network 334 Mismatch Tables Printing 268 Mixed Pitch Printing Option 269 Mnemonics Configuring 132 347 Modbus 584 Adaptor Module 356 680 Adaptor Cable 356 9 Pin Adaptor Cable 356 Configuring Communications 35 Overview 34 with Modems Configuring 37 Entering Passwords 49 Entering Phone Numbers 47 Overview 34 Selecting a Device 46 Modbus Cable Kit 355 Modbus Plus Configuring 41 Overview 34 438 Index Modbus Ports on a Bridge Multiplexer 342 Modem Communications Configuring 37 Dial Chat dialog 49 Entering Passwords 49 Entering Phone Numbers 47 Modbus with 35 Overview 34 Selecting a Device 46 Modicon I O 180 Monitor Mode Online Editor 127 Monitor Status Log Files 319 Monitor Status Window 319 Monitoring Hardware Health 317 Networks 322 One Device 318 Viewing Status Words 321 Moving Blocks of Registers 156 Instructions in Logic 132 Records 217 219 Multi Function Naming System Preference 30 Multi User Access System Preference 30 Multiple Sub Fun
262. major architectures for input output systems also see Distributed I O Local I O and Peer to peer Communications I O that is installed away from the PLC and communicates with it though a high performance 5908 coaxial cable network For Quantum controllers an interface device at each remote I O drop communicates with an RIO processor in the PLC The interface device sets the address of the drop Each RIO processor supports up to 31 remote drops each of which allows 64 input words and 64 output words Remote Terminal Unit A data transmission mode used for Modbus communications RTU uses 8 data bits Register A location in a PLC s memory It is identified by an address Reports Listing A group of printouts which consist of hardware allocation data usage and data contents for a ladder logic program ROM Read Only Memory Routing Path The sequence of devices through which a message passes to reach its final destination RTU Remote Terminal Unit communications mode RS 232 A popular standard for a serial data link connection Run Light A light on the front panel of a controller that is on while the controller is running Glossary of Terms 423 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Save To store information on a disk Search To locate a specified network element or elements in the ladder logic Segment A group of I O networks solved as a unit by the programmable controller The Segment Scheduler control
263. mand Suffix Characters appended to every command you send to the modem including the Initialization string and Hangup command The default is a carriage return and a line feed e Hangup Command To hang up your modem NxT sends the standard Hayes modem command ATH If your modem uses a different command enter it here This command is prefixed with nr ttt Hanging up can take up to three seconds 5 Click OK 40 Modbus communications by modem Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller Configuring Modbus Plus communications To connect to a Modbus Plus network your computer uses a network adapter card such as an SA85 Before configuring the Modbus Plus settings make sure the card is installed properly and has a unique Modbus Plus address assigned to it through its DIP switches gt To select and configure Modbus Plus communications 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or the Offline Network Editor on the Controller menu click Communications Setup 2 From the Interface list on the left of the Communications Setup dialog box select Modbus Plus These parameters affect Communications Setup the PC only They must NI free EE match the parameters Ae e set for the controller Z REN A Port COM v Stor 7 T 6 d 9600 Timeout 010 3 C Ethernet Gateway Bau 300 Timeoul TePsIP Parity None Mode ATU O Ast To select Modbus communications set the Modem Type to None
264. mber of messages you are importing 6 Select Replace Always to overwrite a message without being warned or Prompt on Replace to receive a warning message when an existing message is about to be overwritten 7 Click Start Import If you have enabled Prompt on Replace a warning dialog box appears when an existing message is about to be replaced by an imported one Click Yes to replace the current message or No to skip the message and continue with the import 76 Configuring ASCII messages Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Using configuration extensions Configuration extensions are utilities which can be loaded into a controller Before using a configuration extension set the configuration extension size in LE the General tab of the Controller Configuration window ee For more information see Controller configuration General tab on page 55 Available configuration extensions include TCP IP Configures controllers to connect to a TCP IP network through a communication card Data Protect Prevents specific blocks of Oxxxx and 4xxxx references from being modified by general Modbus data write commands S980 Address Specifies the S980 station address Quantum Hot Standby Allows additional configuration of the Quantum Hot Standby setup Peer Cop Allows you to configure data blocks to be transferred between controllers on a Modbus Plus network VME Bus Configures a VME controller for communications with
265. me you connect to the Server and check in the project Audit Trail records project changes to an Audit Trail database file while working disconnected The next time you connect to the Server these records are transferred to the Server and you are able to check in your project changes vad Connect to the Server periodically to get the latest fxManager settings and to H update the Audit Trail database with any records that were logged while working disconnected If you plan on working disconnected for an extended period ensure your user property MaxTimeDisconnected is set accordingly 392 Connecting to a server Appendix G NxT and fxManager About the Project Manager You can work on projects stored on the Server from either the Project Manager or fxManager You can access the Project Manager from NxT s Title Screen or while Online or Offline gt To open the Project Manager e From the File menu select Project Manager The Project Manager dialog box appears File View Version Help i passenger Created 03 08 98 12 47 44 HAAT driver Checked 03 18 98 12 06 06 AT Created Indicates whether EAT trunk Created 03 24 98 12 DG 16 you re connected to AT f bumper Checked 03 06 98 12 47 44 the Server or work KA T t bumper Created 03 17 98 12 06 06 ing disconnected S erver_2 Logg The user currently Displays the name logged on to the of the Server Server you re logged on to When fxManager isn t ru
266. menu click Preferences The Preferences window appears Preferences its 6 Digit Addressing Initialize SA85 Adapte 0 O1 Awo Oon Multi Function Naming F Multi User Access Maximum Decimal Value Syabas 9993 65535 Display Editor For New Instructions X Keyboard Menu Options Enabled Add Watch Track Data Into Emulate ProwORXPLUS Hotkeys Data Watch Window It Use Insert Delete Key Menus Data Watch Panel Confirm When Overwriting Instructions Confirm Network Editor Deletions X Prompt For Read When Exiting Online X Fill Single Type References f Auto Monitor Logout One Line Doc Window Enabled Online Mode Program Monitor OLogout Monitor x Verify Device Selection Timeout 10 min Database Path c prowor nxt demodb nxt_demo Browse OK Cancel Help 2 Select the system preferences you want e Initialize SA85 Adapter The SA85 Network Card driver may sometimes interfere with Modbus communications This option helps reduce conflicts as you move between Modbus and Modbus Plus networks e When Modbus networking is selected NxT disables the SA85 driver at startup to prevent conflicts e When Modbus Plus networking is selected NxT resets the SA85 driver at startup to ensure it is working e If you re using two SA85 cards you must specify which card you want to initialize Adapter 0 or Adapter 1 Setting system preferences 29 ProWORX NxT User
267. n administrator to set up groups users and permissions for the project Adding a project to an fxManager Server 401 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 8 Configure the controller addresses from which a user can launch the NxT project online 7 For more information see Configuring the Controller Address Selection Lists on page 399 x g Once you add a project to a Server it s a good idea to also add groups to the project to allow users access to it Checking In a project After saving the changes you make to a project it s a good idea to check it in to the fxManager Server it came from This updates the Server with the latest project and increments the project s versions number within the project list gt To check in a project 1 2 From the Project Manager select the NxT project you want to check in Click ES or from the Version menu select Check In The Check In dialog box appears Check In Ea Project passenger door conveyor Remove local copy C Keep local copy C Keep checked out Comment Changed the EMTH subfunction instruction from ADD to SUBD Cancel Choose the option you want e Remove local copy default Removes the copy of the project on your local computer after the check in is complete Keep local copy Updates the Server with your changes then leaves a read only copy of the project on your computer e Keep checked out Updates the Server with your changes t
268. n 46 Server fxManager 392 Set Point SP defined 298 Setting System Preferences 29 Setting up Communications 35 Settling Time Configuring 57 Short Comments Entering 216 in Documentation 208 Show Coils in Solve Column display option 118 Simple ASCII Ports 62 Single Sweep 176 6 Digit Addressing System Preference 31 Skips Configuring 58 Slot Edit See Traffic Cop Slots 180 Smart Configurator 59 SP See Set Point SP Set Point Adjusting 301 Specific Input in Peer Cop 94 Specific Output in Peer Cop 93 Spreadsheet View Data Watch Window 276 292 Start up in Program or Monitor mode System Preference 31 Starting a Controller 111 Starting ProWORX NxT 5 Startup program 5 State Flow Viewing 125 State Ram Transferred options 83 Status Bar 116 Stopping a Controller 110 Subfields in Peer Cop 92 Sub Function Instructions 131 Supervisor Password 24 Sweep 175 Constant 175 Single 176 Symbol Summary Panel 121 164 Symbolic Addressing 164 Symbols Enabling 30 Entering 216 Exporting FIS Files 224 for Documentation 208 Importing FIS Files 221 Setting Color of 119 Symbols List Panel 231 Symbols System Preference 30 System Options See System Preferences System Preferences Setting and Changing 29 System Requirements 3 Index 443 ProWORX NxT User s Guide STe Table Index Printing Option 269 TCP IP Communications Configuration Extension 79 Configuring 42 Overview 34 TEF Files Importing Traffic Cop from 222
269. n entire column 20 rows in the Data Watch view with consecutive addresses gt To fill the next or previous cell with a value 1 Select the cell to use as a base for filling 2 Do one of the following e Click Fill then click Next to type the next consecutive address below the currently selected address e Click Fill then click Previous to type the previous consecutive address above the currently selected address overflow values are shifted up when Next selected on the Fill menu at the bottom row of the table or down if Previous on the Fill menu is selected at the top row of the table b Filled values don t carry over to the next column in the table Instead the gt To filla column of cells with values 1 Type the starting address into the AR field select the cell where you want it displayed then press ENTER 2 Click Fill then click Column NxT fills the rest of the column down with consecutive addresses 280 Adding addresses to the Address Contents table Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Deleting addresses from the Address Contents table Data Watch and Trend views only You can delete a single cell or a group of cells by row or column from the Data Watch Window gt To delete a single address 1 Select the address in the Data Watch window to delete 2 Click Edit then either click Delete or press DELETE gt To delete multiple addresses 1 Select an address in the Data Watch window
270. n its ports with the COMM1 COMM2 1 0 EXP drop down menu Select the Modbus Modbus ASCII port to configure then click Setup Port OK Cancel Help 60 Controller configuration Ports tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller gt To edit a communication port s parameters The controllers MEM DIP switch determines if its communication parameters A are taken from memory or an internal DIP switch If the MEM DIP switch is in the DIP position the controller ignores the parameters you set here 1 Double click the parameters of the port or select the parameters for the port then click Setup Port 2 For each parameter select a value from its list Parameter Description Mode Identifies which data protocol Remote Terminal Unit or ASCII to use Both the PC and controller must use the same data protocol Default is RTU If you select ASCII protocol for a port you can only configure its Parity Stop Data bits and Baud settings Parity Adds a check bit to a packet to make the number of binary ones always either odd Odd Parity or even Even Parity If parity is set to None the check bit is not added The PC and controller must use the same parity Default is Even Stop Data Sets the number of bits at the end of a packet which prepare the receiving device for the next packet The PC and controller must use the same number of stop bits Default is 1 Baud Sets the data tran
271. navigate to it If the block file exists address range are set to the ranges for the block database If the block file does not exist the ranges are blank For each address type Oxxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx 4xxxx type the first address in the destination block To load descriptors associated with the register addresses select Descriptors To load register contents of the addresses select Register Contents Click OK The block is loaded into the database of the network being displayed if all checks for address ranges and valid instructions pass 172 Transferring logic blocks to and from disk offline only Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Making logbook entries The Logbook is a general purpose note holder that is attached to a database name but not linked to any database record It can be used as a scratch pad to remember information as a daily journal or a reminder pad to pass information between different shifts You can set the Logbook to automatically display the next time the Network Editor is started This forces the next user for example the following shift to review the logbook gt To add a logbook entry 1 From the Network Editor window on the Display menu Logbook The Logbook window appears Logbook x Log Number Activate Auto Display 09 0001 0003 Log Author John Doe Log Date Mar 29 1999 Log Note I added a new drop to the traffic cop Click to scroll through the lo
272. nces support Page Title documentation Page titles are used to label sections of logic Long Comments Are up to 32 000 characters in length The maximum number of Long Comments in a database is 5000 Long Comments can also be printed in network listings 208 Documenting your PLC Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Each reference type supports different kinds of documentation The Documentation Table below shows the kinds of documentation that can be entered for different types of references 2 e ef We oe RG S v amp S Type of Reference Format Ss Qe 9 os Coil Oxxxx e e Discrete Input 1xxxx e Register Input 3XXXX Holding Register AXXxx e e Bit Descriptor 4xxxx bits Network Nxxxx e e e e Labels Lxxxx Segments Sxxxx e e Program P1 e e Drop Dhhdd e Rack Rhhdd Slot Thhddrss Extended Memory 6ff xxxx e Constants S901 Channel Cee S901 Input Slot Tecls S901 Output Slot Tec0s Documenting your PLC 209 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Documentation window The Documentation Window lets you enter descriptors short comments and long comments for cells or networks without leaving the Network Editor If Symbols is selected in system Preferences the window also displays the Symbol associated with a selected address in logic You can add documentation for 0xxxx
273. nd Line Controller M al characters Use a comma to pause the di aling for half a second Use a dash to separate the prefix and number Use a space to mark the end of the phone number Type a short description after the number so you can recognize it in the list later Separate the number and description by a lt space gt Selecting a device on the network 47 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 2 Inthe Enter Phone Number window do one of the following e Select a number from the drop down menu e In the field type a phone number then a short description for the controller you want to connect to Separate the phone number and description with a space The first space in the field marks the end of the phone number so do not use spaces in the number itself You can separate parts of the phone number with a hyphen To pause dialing for half a second type a comma Don t use any other punctuation in the number 3 Click Dial NxT connects to the controller e If you have selected Dial Up as your modem type the Select Device dialog box appears Select a Modbus device just as you would with a direct connection Type e A Modbus address 1 to 247 for a controller on the local network e Aone address Modbus routing path if your Modbus network is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a controller in Bridge Mode or a Bridge Multiplexer The controller or BM85 interprets the Modbus address
274. network is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a controller in Bridge Mode or a Bridge Multiplexer The controller or BM85 interprets the Modbus address as a routing path using its internal Address Map or Implicit Attach Addressing To close the connection and dial a new phone number click Hangup If you are using a dedicated line modem NxT automatically opens a connection The Select Device dialog box appears So To use a dedicated line modem select Line J478 or LineRTS as your modem H type in the Modbus Communications Setup dialog box te For more information see Setting up communications for your PC on page 35 Select a Modbus device just as you would with a direct connection Type e A Modbus address 1 to 247 for a controller on the local network e Aone address Modbus routing path if your Modbus network is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a controller in Bridge Mode or a Bridge Multiplexer The controller or BM85 interprets the Modbus address as a routing path using its internal Address Map or Implicit Attach Addressing To close the connection click Hangup If NxT cannot find a modem connection or if you close an old connection in the Select Device dialog NxT displays the Enter Phone Number window Enter Phone Number xi NxT stores a list of the phone num bers you enter Click to select from it description Type the phone num 9 555 1212 Remote Seco
275. ng Click to set the default addresses for new cards configured into the Traffic Cop NxT automatically increments the addresses for each new card configured 200 500 Series Traffic Cop 197 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 200 500 Series slot edit gt To configure a slot 1 4 Select the drop and rack containing the slot you wish to edit from the tree control The rack is displayed in the Edit Rack area of the window Select the slot to edit and click Edit or double click the slot Type the first address of the table associated with this input or output point For example suppose you are entering an address table for a 16 IN slot on a J290 You must associate this slot with a 16 bit table of discretes or one 16 bit register If you are entering a register enable the input binary or BCD Click OK 900 Series Traffic Cop The 900 Series I O displays the Traffic Cop screen for a motion control I O drop The Traffic Cop allows a bi directional 8 register slot for data transfer A 900 Series drop is always a remote drop and only found in conjunction with an S908 remote I O processor If the controller is running NxT Online displays the controller health status OK or in the HB field gt To edita slot 1 Oyo IASS a In the tree control select the drop to edit NxT displays the single slot for the drop the card entered if any as well as the input and output reference numbers data type and description of
276. ng 319 I O Time Slice Configuring 56 I O Tree 181 I O Words Configuring 56 I O Modicon 180 IBM 5531 to Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 367 IBM 5531 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 366 IBM 5531 to Modicon J478 Modem 367 IBM 5531 to Modicon x80 and x85 366 IBM AT Loopback Connector 368 IBM PC Loopback Connector 368 Icons for Projects 395 Importing Database Documentation 221 Importing Documentation 221 Importing logic 172 Initialize SA85 Adapter System Preference 29 Initializing Logic in a Controller 104 Input Latched Configuring 57 Insert key accessing Insert menu System Preference 30 436 Index Inserting Columns 170 Networks 170 Rows 170 Installing ProWORX NxT 3 Instruction List 121 129 Instruction Toolbar 128 Instructions Deleting in Logic 132 Editing in Logic 130 Entering into Logic 128 Assembly Register 129 Instruction List 129 Instruction Toolbar 128 Moving in Logic 132 Multiple Sub Function Instructions 131 Interbus S 193 Internal FLASH Tranfering to Controller FLASH 107 J J478 Modem 365 367 K Keyboard Commands As Menu Items 30 Keyboard Menu Options Enabled System Preference 30 Keyboard shortcuts from ProWORXPLUS 30 L Labelling a Project 403 Ladder Doctor Importing Documentation from 221 Ladder Logic Entering 113 297 Loading Blocks of 172 Saving Blocks of 171 LAN Health Monitor 322 Log Files Viewing the LAN Monitor s 323 Launching NxT from fxManager 397
277. ng the Traffic Cop data display The Data Display window is available only in the 200 900 and DCP series Traffic Cop It shows a list of all programmed references and data gt To display the programmed references and data e From the Traffic Cop window click Data The Data Display window appears Radix Reference Data Decimal Hexadecimal C ASCII O Binary Floating Point Descriptor 10001 Close Goto Doc Help LS Discretes are displayed as ON or OFF DON DOFF if disabled and registers are displayed in the selected Radix 182 Using the Traffic Cop display Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop Auto addressing in the Traffic Cop The Auto Address function lets you set default addresses to be entered when programming a new card into Traffic Cop The addresses are automatically incremented for each new card added gt To set the default addresses for new cards 1 From the Traffic Cop window click Auto Addressing The Auto Addressing window appears Auto Addressing x 00001 00512 OK Oxxxx MN Txxxx 10001 10001 10064 mE Last Used Sxxxx 30001 30001 30099 4xxxx 40001 40001 41800 Cancel These are the addresses which will be provided as the default when a new card is being programmed into the traffic cop These addresses will automatically increment for the next new card Help 2 For each reference type Oxxxx 1xxxx 3x
278. nitializing Logicin 104 Monitoring Health of 317 Networks 322 One Device 318 Viewing Status Words 321 Reading from 102 Scanning for 50 Selecting 44 Selecting Type of 16 Starting 111 Stopping 110 Type of 64 Wires for 359 Working with 102 Index 431 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Writing to 103 Converting Logic to NxT 18 Converting Older Databases 17 Copy Protection 8 Hardware key 9 Software key 8 Copying Blocks of Registers 157 Databases 21 with Back Up Function 22 Long Comments 218 Records 217 220 Creating a New Database 13 Creating a Projects 398 Cross References Printing 265 Cursor Setting Color of 119 Cursor Network Editor 120 Custom Screen Setup 117 Customer support 10 Cyclic Data Exchange Configuration Extension 97 D Data Setting Color of 119 Data Display in the Traffic Cop 182 Data Protect Configuration Extension 80 Data Watch Panel 122 Adding Items to 31 122 Disabling Forcing Discretes 123 See also Data Watch Window Data Watch Window DWW files 282 Exporting to DIF 283 Adding Items to 31 Address Contents Table 277 Assembly Register 277 432 Index Clamps 285 Data Logger View 276 288 Data Watch View 276 287 Database Path 32 Disabling Forcing Discretes 286 Displaying 278 Editing Registers 286 General Procedures 279 Graphical View 276 293 Log Files 288 PID Trend button 301 Radix 282 Setting Sample Rate 279 Spreadsheet View 276 292 System Preferences 31
279. nline Network Editor closes after the specified amount of inactive time and Monitor mode is activated e Database Path This setting determines the default directory folder in Windows 95 for ProWORX NxT database projects You can type the path name manually or click Browse to search for the folder you want NxT uses this folder as the initial directory for creating saving and loading database projects 32 Setting system preferences 3 Connecting to a Controller In this chapter Connecting to controllers Overview 34 Setting up communications for your PC 35 Configuring Modbus communications 35 Modbus communications by modem 37 Configuring Modbus Plus communications 41 Configuring Ethernet Gateway communications 42 Configuring TCP IP Communications 42 Selecting a device on the network 44 Performing a network scan 50 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Connecting to controllers Overview ProWORX NxT can communicate with controllers in several ways This chapter explains how to configure NxT for several common types of network connections Modbus Modicon s master slave protocol standard on 984 and many other controllers Select this option if your computer is connected to a controller s Modbus port either directly or through a modem Modbus through a modem Controllers in remote locations can be equipped with RS 232 modems Your computer can then connect to the controller by telephone radio or microwave systems using
280. nly The Sweep function is a powerful diagnostic tool that lets you solve logic for a set number of scans or solve logic continuously with a constant time between scans Constant sweep mode The Constant Sweep mode sets the controller to scan and solve logic and update I O continuously but with a constant time interval between scans If the actual scan time is less than the imposed scan time the controller waits for the imposed scan time to elapse before performing the next scan If the actual scan time is more than the imposed scan time the controller finishes the scan then continues on with the next scan This lets you slow the scan time to when debugging logic so that the controller doesn t solve logic too quickly for you to catch errors Locating coils from contacts 175 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To perform a Constant Sweep 1 From the Online Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Sweep The Sweep Mode dialog box appears Sweep Mode xi Sweep Mode _ Parameters ci 3 Time 10 200 ms 00 _ x10 Single Sweep Oinane Register 4xxxx OK Cancel Help In Sweep Mode click Constant Sweep 3 InTime type the target time in tens of milliseconds for each scan In Register 4xxxx type a 4xxxx register to hold the target time value The actual time taken for each scan is placed in the next register so a total of two registers are used here 5 Click OK Single sweep
281. nnections between it and your main logic LS database leaving the macro s logic behind as regular network logic This affects a single macro insertion only if the same macro appears elsewhere in the same logic network its bond remains gt To unlink all the macros from a database e From the Offline Network Editor select Unlink All Macros on the Edit menu 312 Making changes in macros Chapter 14 Working with Macros Automating macro insertions with Codegen Codegen is a separate batch utility that automates the process of appending macros to your logic To use Codegen first create a special CGF batch file that specifies which macros to insert into the database Codegen takes this batch file and appends the macros to the end of your main logic database Codegen can be used with a program consisting entirely of macros Write several macros at once create a CGF script then use Codegen to insert the macros into your main database When you build up a large enough macro library most of your programming is done main logic database It does not check to see if those macros already exist elsewhere within the main logic database Thus if you run Codegen twice on the same logic database two sets of macros are inserted at the end of your logic When Codegen runs a script file it just appends new macros to the end of the Appending a macro and database Start Codegen from either the ProWORX NxT program group or using
282. nning you re required to log on to the Server when LS opening the Project Manager For more information see Connecting to a server on page 392 The Project Manager is organized by rows and columns Each row contains information on a project The columns are described below Column Description Name Name of the project that is stored on the Server created while disconnected or stored on your computer Version The number of previous versions that exist Click the expansion icon next to the project name to list the previous versions Action Displays the last action created checked in checked out that was performed on the project Date The date and time the project was last edited and saved About the Project Manager 393 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Column Label Description The label associated with the project Comment Toolbar Displays part of a project s comment View an entire comment by generating a project history report A For more information see fxManager s main help You can perform the following commands from the Project Manager s toolbar Button Description Click to open a selected project you checked out from the Server or a project you have on your computer Click to delete a selected project on your computer Click to add a label to a selected project Click to get a read only version of a selected project stored on the
283. nsert or delete heads drops racks or slots gt Toclear or delete a slot rack or drop 1 Inthe Traffic Cop dialog box select the item to delete 2 Click Delete NxT displays the Delete Traffic Cop Item dialog box 3 Select whether you re deleting a slot rack drop or all drops in the Traffic Cop 4 Select an action then click OK e Delete Removes the item shifting the remaining items up rack or drop or left e Clear Clears the item and leaves it empty without shifting neighboring items gt Toedita slot 1 Select the slot to edit then click Edit or double click the slot to edit The Slot Edit window appears with a list of available cards 2 Select the card to insert in the slot selected in the Traffic Cop window from the drop down list Selecting a card displays the power supply loading and mechanical keying for the card 3 Inthe address field In or Out type the starting address for the address range assigned to this card then click OK For example if you are configuring a DAI340 00 card with 16 inputs In the IN address field type the initial address of a 16 address table 1xxxxx for this card The last address in the table is displayed 192 Quantum Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop address that is not on a word boundary 16 1 NxT automatically adjusts the b For some cards the table must begin on a word boundary If you type a starting address down to the nearest
284. nt Output True High B881 108 115 VAC 8 Point Protected Output Module B827 032 24 VDC 32 Point Input True High B881 508 125 VDC 8 Point True High Output Module B828 016 5V TTL 16 Point Output B882 032 24 VDC Diagnostic Output Module B800 cards 377 ProWORX NxT User s Guide B800 cards Card Description Card Description B829 116 5V TTL 16 Input Fast Response B882 239 0 30 kHz 2 High Speed Up Counter Module B832 016 24 VDC 16 Point Output True Low B883 001 0 50 kHz 2 High Speed UP Down Counter B833 016 24 VDC 16 Point Input True Low B883 101 4 kHz CAM ABS Encoder Input 8 Disc Out B836 016 12 250 VDC 16 Point Output Module B883 111 1 kHz CAM with Velocity compensation B837 016 24 VAC DC 16 Point Input True High B883 200 10 Thermocouple Input Module B838 032 24 VDC 32 Point Output True High B883 201 8 RTD Input Module B840 108 NO NC Reed Relay 8 Point Output B884 002 2 Loop PID Control Module Module B842 008 NO NC Reed Relay 8 Point Output B885 002 ASCIT BASIC Module Module B846 001 Analog MUX 16 voltage to one output B885 100 Motion Module B846 002 Analog MUX 16 current to one output B885 110 Motion Module B849 016 48 VAC DC 16 Point Input Module B886 000 High Speed Logic Solver B853 016 115 VAC 125 VDC 16 Input True High B887 000 12 Register Bidirectional B855 016 12 VDC 16 Point
285. nt changing Each entry in the log is date 05 02 1997 Cable A Receiver Error Count changing and time stamped and the 05 02 1997 Cable A Bad Drop Reception Count change described 05 02 1997 Run Light is ON 05 02 1997 Controller status word has changed The Status Bar displays the 05 02 1997 Controller Stopped current LAN Monitor log and the controller s address type TEST1 MON MB Address 0 Micro 512 01 STOPPED and state If you are viewing a previously saved log the Status Bar shows only the log Delete Close Help name and controller address Viewing a controllers health log 323 ProWORX NxT User s Guide You can do the following from the View Log dialog box e Click Close to return to the Monitor LAN window AN When you delete a log file it can t be recovered e Click Delete to delete the entire log e Select an event to see in detail then click View The View Status Words window opens 324 Viewing a controller s health log 16 Using the Compare Function In this chapter Using the compare function 326 Using the on demand compare function 326 Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically 329 Using the Compare Summary window 333 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the compare function ProWORX NxT s Compare function finds differences in logic and configuration between a database and a controller or between two databases This powerful tool lets you be sure that your control
286. ntation records within a specified range gt To delete documentation 1 On the Display menu click Documentation Utilities 2 From the Documentation Utilities dialog box click Delete 3 Type the starting address of the range of records you want to delete An ending address is automatically added The start and end range descriptor record types must be the same 4 Click OK Documentation records within the range are marked as deleted To free up disk space use the Cleanup function gt To clean up moved or deleted records e Click Cleanup to remove all data from records marked as deleted and decreasing the DDF file size Importing exporting databases NxT imports and exports database documentation in several formats The Documentation Import feature lets you bring documentation from existing files or databases into NxT without having to retype Documentation Export lets you edit documentation in a separate word processing or spreadsheet program 220 Copy documentation Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC Importing database documentation into ProWORX NxT You can import descriptors and comments from files and other databases into your current database This function does not import controller logic S For information about importing logic see Opening an existing database on page 17 or see Loading blocks of logic from disk offline only on page 172 NxT can import documentation from these types of
287. nterbus cards Appendix F I O Cards Supported Card Description Card Description AAI030 00 8 Channel Differential Input BDO356 00 24 VDC 32 Point O P Module AAT140 00 16 Channel single ended Input BDO946 50 115 to 230 VAC 16 Point O P AAI520 40 4 Channel RTD Thermocouple IBUS 0101_ DFT 1 Word Output Module AAO120 00 4 Analog Output 0 20mA IBUS 0102 DFT 1 Word Input Module AAO921 00 4 Analog Output 4 10mA IBUS 0103 DFT 1 Word Bidirectional Module ADI340 00 24 VDC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0201 DFT 2 Word Output Module ADI350 00 24 VDC 32 Point I P Module IBUS 0202 DFT 2 Word Input Module ADI540 50 120 VAC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0203 DFT 2 Word Bidirectional Module ADI740 50 230 VAC 16 Point I P Module IBUS 0231 DFT 2 Word Output Module ADM350 1X 24 VDC 16 In 16 Out IBUS 0232 DFT 2 Word Input Module ADM370 10 24 VDC 16 In 8 Out IBUS 0233 DFT 2 Word Bidirectional Module ADM390 10 24 VDC 16 In 16 Out IBUS 0301 DFT 3 Word Output Module ADM390 30 24 VDC 10 In 8 Out Relay IBUS 0302 DFT 3 Word Input Module ADM690 50 115 VAC 10 In 8 Out IBUS 0303 DFT 3 Word Bidirectional Module ADO340 00 24 VDC 16 Point O P Module IBUS 0331 DFT 3 Word Output Module ADO350 00 24 VDC 32 Point O P Module IBUS 0332 DFT 3 Word Input Module ADO530 50 115 VAC 8 Point O P Module IBUS 0333 DFT 3 Word Bidirectional Module ADO540 50 115
288. ntroller Underneath the controller NxT shows whether the controller is OK or in Dim Awareness or if the controller is stopped the Stop Code 2 To stop monitoring press ESC Clicking Monitor in the Net Scan window is not the same as selecting Monitor from the Tools menu The first only checks the status lights of controllers The second monitors the health of controllers and I O systems For more information see Chapter 15 Monitoring your Hardware on page 317 To see more or fewer devices in the Net Scan display 1 Click 4e to zoom out the view You can see up to 30 devices at a time 2 Click to zoom in the view NxT always displays at least 10 devices Performing a network scan 51 4 Configuring a Controller In this chapter Configuring a controller 54 Controller configuration General tab 55 Controller configuration Ports tab 60 Controller configuration Controller tab 64 Controller configuration User loadables tab 67 Controller configuration Loadable library tab 69 Configuring ASCII messages 71 Using configuration extensions 77 TCP IP extension 79 Data Protect extension 80 S980 Address extension 81 Quantum Hot Standby extension 82 VME Bus extension 84 Profibus extension 85 Peer Cop extension 89 SY MAX extension 96 Cyclic Data Exchange 97 Configuring the hardware or time of day clock 98 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Configuring a controller Before you can put your cont
289. ntroller changes made in it do not take effect immediately Instead when you have finished programming you write all your changes to the controller in one pass To work with a controller online you do not have to open its database The Online Editor reads ladder logic Traffic Cop information and the controller s configuration directly from the controller and writes back to it so the database is not needed However descriptors are stored in a controller s database not the controller itself so if you do not have its database open you cannot read or edit a controller s documentation For this reason it is usually a good idea to open a controller s database while working online Opening a controller s database may also help remind you that changes made in the Online Editor take effect in the controller immediately but don t appear in its database until you read the new logic from the controller For more information on reading and writing to a controller see page 102 12 Working with a database Overview Chapter 2 Working with a Database Creating a new database This section tells you how to create a new empty database from either the Online or Offline Editor You can also create a new database to contain ladder logic and configuration information as you read it from a controller To learn how see Reading from a controller on page 102 Creating a new database in the Offline Editor consists of entering summary
290. ntroller Type dialog box appears Select Controller Type x Controller Groups Controllers The controllers in the group appear in the right side of the window Select your controller you want then click OK From the list on the left select a controller group A list of controllers in the group appears on the right From the list on the right select the type of controller for the new database Click OK Depending on the controller type you select the Edit Controller Details dialog box may appear If so complete Steps 5 and 6 With the drop down menus type details about your controller Click OK NxT sets up your database For your convenience the Controller Configuration window opens so you can set up your controller For more information see Configuring a controller on page 54 To configure your controller later and return to the Network Editor click OK 16 Part 2 For the offline editor only Chapter 2 Working with a Database Opening an existing database In addition to its own databases ProWORX NxT can open databases from ProWORXPLUS v1 40 or later directly Databases from ProWORX early versions of ProWORXPLUS Modsoft or competitive products must be converted to NxT s format before they can be opened gt Ke To open an existing database 1 Do one of the following e From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the File menu click Open e In the Network Editor
291. ntroller flash 107 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 4 Compact controllers have enhanced options that may be set prior to transferring 5 Set the parameters for internal flash and PCMCIA settings Start PLC after download from Automatically starts the controller with the logic that was stored in flash memory or the PCMCIA card during a power failure e Save state RAM Saves the last state to flash memory or the PCMCIA card in the event of a power failure 6 Type the number of registers to save in the 4xxxx registers to save field The specified number of registers are saved to flash memory or the PCMCIA card in the event of a power failure 7 Click Transfer to transfer the logic to flash memory or the PCMCIA card You re prompted to stop the controller if it is currently running LE Click Clear Flash to clear the logic stored in the flash memory or the PCMCIA card Transferring the Flash RAM executive Some devices store their executive firmware the instructions that tell the device how to work in Flash RAM rather than EPROM You can copy a controller s Flash RAM Executive to and from disk as a backup to guard against potential data loss This may also come in handy if the manufacturer releases an updated version of the controller s executive Saving the executive firmware to disk is a read operation Copying an executive from a disk file to a device is a write operation Currently the only devices that contain the
292. o logic at the currently displayed reference Click Goto to return to the Network Editor and search for the address or symbol displayed in the Navigate By area From there you can select any occurrence of that address in logic Using the Documentation editor 215 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To enter Descriptors Short Comments Page Titles and Symbols 1 Click the respective field to place the cursor there 2 Type your text You can cut CTRL X copy CTRL C and paste CTRL V selected text within a field or among fields For example you can select text from Short Comment copy it then paste it into Long Comment If the text you have typed does not fit in the first line of the field text in the Descriptor and Short Comment boxes wraps onto several lines 3 Click anywhere outside the field to record your changes gt To enter long comments 1 From the Doc Editor type the reference type associated with the comment When you type the reference type in Navigate By the documentation accompanying the reference is displayed Comments can be associated with multiple references Only one long comment can be associated with a reference however a single long comment can be associated with any number of references within the database Long comments can be as many as 32 000 characters long and can be printed in network listings Ifthe Long Comment number is greater than 0 you can expand its display Click Expand to
293. o see if the specified device exists you are prompted to confirm the read operation Click Yes and the device s executive firmware is copied into a disk file gt To write a device s Flash RAM Executive from a disk file 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen on the Controllers menu click Executive Flash The Flash RAM Executive dialog box appears Click Write In the Source box type the full path and file name or Browse to the file in which to save the device s executive This file must have a BIN extension Transferring the Flash RAM executive 109 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 4 Inthe Destination box type the device number of the device whose executive you want to update Alternatively click Net Scan to scan the network for available devices Flash RAM operations are not supported over Ethernet networks only Modbus and Modbus Plus In the Device Type section select device type to which to write If you are writing to a Local Head or RIO Drop Card in the appropriate boxes type the device s Head Number and Drop Number 7 Click OK ProWORX NxT checks to see if the specified device and file exist 8 You re prompted to confirm the write operation Click Yes and ProWORX NxT begins updating the executive firmware and will remain in Kernal Mode To return the device to regular operation start If you abort a Flash RAM Executive Write operation the device will be unusable and finish a Write Fla
294. od cover IBM 5531 to Modicon x80 and x85 IBM 5531 Modicon x80 and x85 Series 1 s 2 2 3 3 4 a 3 B a 5 6 6 B 1 9 4 9 pin DBIS 9 pin DBP female connector male connector q lt q m hood cover 2 pr shielded conductor hood cover 366 IBM 5531 to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams IBM 5531 to Modicon 584 with W190 cable IBM 5531 Modicon 584 with W190 Cable 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 a a 6 6 8 a g 20 9 pin DEBIS 25 pin DB253 female connector female connector b s hood cover 2 b conductor e IBM 5531 to Modicon J478 modem IBM 5331 Modicon J478 Modem 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 a a 6 6 8 8 9 20 9 pin OBIS 25 pin DB25P female connector male connector hood cover 2 Nas conductor ihe IBM 5531 to Modicon 584 with W190 cable 367 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Loopback connectors 584 Military connector 4 oin female DBOS cn ER m 123 4 5 6 7 8 cK JL Pics M Shield LI 584 Miltary Connector Controller 9
295. odbus device or close the connection and open a new one Use a modem connection to a controller just like a direct Modbus link You can scan for and attach to Modbus devices and Modbus Plus devices if the controller supports Bridge Mode to allow you to connect to a Modbus Plus network just as you normally would Tae NxT uses the same information to configure modems as ProWORXPLUS so H users going from one program to the other can copy the settings directly gt To select and configure Modbus communications using modems 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Offline Network Editor on the Controller menu click Communications Setup These parameters affect I inter ace Modbus the PC only They must Modbus Port COM v Stop 1 z match the parameters O Modbus Plus 500 Timeout set for the controller C Ethernet Gateway 2a lsc ajaa mi TCP IP Parity None x Mode ATU C ascii eerie After you choose a com munication system from Modem Type YP the list on the left its op Initialization tions appear on the right PP 9 Dial Command ATD To select Modbus com Command Suffix 013 010 munications the Modem Hangup Command ATT Type must be set to None OK Cancel Help 2 From the Interface list on the left of the Communications Setup dialog box select Modbus 38 Modbus communications by modem A Chapter 3 Connecting to a
296. odes respectively BIT TO MODIFY If the data type is set to T bit then this value determines which bit you want to display This may be from 1 to 16 with 1 being the Most Significant Bit 16 being the Least Significant Bit Set to 0 if not a bit data type COLUMN Column number on screen to place the register Use a number between 1 and 78 If the total length of the displayed register data exceeds the available column space the starting point of the column is moved to the left so the entire column fits on the line DATA TYPE Sets the radix of the data type Use the following characters to represent the following data types Floating Point ASCII Signed Integer Hexadecimal Binary 32 bit Long Integer Integer Bit Henw ERRORFIELD Gives you the ability to report any errors on the instruction Errorfield has the same format as the Windowtable User Configurable Register editor 141 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Text Description FUNCTION XXX Begin the template with this line Within the quotations insert the name of the instruction for which the template is intended Save the template by this name with a URF extension GRAPHFIELD Allows you to graph data A Graphfield line has the following format GRAPHFIELD R C T H B O M P where R Row C Column T Type of graph 1 2 dimensional pie graph 2 3 dimensional pie graph 3 2D bar graph 4 3D bar graph
297. of the following configuration settings change e Adding editing or removing users or groups e Editing permissions e Editing groups assigned to projects and e Editing Audit Trail settings PasswordChange Logs a record each time a password is changed Audit Trail 391 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Connecting to a server Like Local Station for NxT fxManager requires you to log on This gives you access to the NxT projects that are stored on the server gt To open fxManager e Click the Start button point to Programs then click fxManager The Log On dialog box appears Type your user name SS Type your password User Password Choose an fxManager Save j Server I Work disconnected Select to work disconnected Exit Help from the Server When logging on you may be prompted to rename a project you ve created while disconnected that has the same name as one already on the Server Working Disconnected from an fxManager Server You can work on projects while disconnected from a Server For example you may want to do this when working remotely While disconnected the Project Manager lists projects that were listed when you were last connected to the Server You can only open the projects you checked out prior to logging on in disconnected mode Projects can t be checked in while disconnected Changes you make to an NxT project are stored on your local computer until the next ti
298. ogic database or access the PID display gt To view the PID monitoring displays From the online Network Editor on the Data menu click PID Summary You can switch between the Summary Tuner Face Plate and View Networks displays by clicking the appropriate buttons along the top row To return to the Network Editor click Close PID display shortcuts To open the Register Editor for a PID block select the PID and click Tune To open the Documentation Editor for a PID s process variable select the PID and click Doc PID and PID2 blocks an Overview 299 ProWORX NxT User s Guide The PID tuner face plate display Sometimes it can be difficult to predict exactly how a PID s parameters will affect its behavior Tuning a PID refers to the process of adjusting a PID s parameters until it operates the way you want Often the easiest way to determine the best PID settings is by observing changes in the PID s operation as they happen The PID Tuner display provides PID faceplates for up to three PID PID2 blocks at a time This provides fast access to features necessary to monitor control and tune each block Each PID face plate display looks like this Process Set The bar graphs indicate where the Process Variable and Set Point Variable Point are between the low engineering range and the high engineering ial pest ttre range The higher the percentage the closer it is to the high engi Auto neering range The
299. oing 404 Clamps in the Data Watch Window 285 Clock Register for 58 Setting 98 CODEGEN About 313 CGF description 315 Log File Viewer 315 Running witha CGF file 313 Coil Battery 58 Coils Duplicate Searching for 165 174 Locating 174 Colors Customizing 119 Column Width adjusting 118 Columns Inserting and Deleting 170 Communications Setup Ethernet Gateway 42 Modbus 35 Modbus Plus 41 Modems 37 Overview 34 Ports Configuring on Controllers 60 TCP IP 42 Compact Controller EEPROM 105 Compare Function 325 On Demand 326 Choosing Parameters 328 Printing Network Results 336 Printing Results 333 Viewing Details 334 Viewing Network Details 334 Viewing Results 329 333 430 Index Scheduled Comparisons 329 Choosing Parameters 331 Comparison List 330 Printing Network Results 336 Printing Results 333 Setting Start Time and Interval 332 Starting or Stopping 332 Viewing Details 334 Viewing Network Details 334 Viewing Results 333 Compare Summary Window 329 333 Printing Network Results 336 Printing Results 333 Viewing Details 334 Viewing Network Details 334 Conditional operator 236 Conditional operators and expressions 236 Configuration Extensions Adding 78 Cyclic Data Exchange 97 Data Protect 80 Deleting 79 Overview 77 Peer Cop 89 Adding Links 89 Clearing and Deleting Links 95 Editing Links 90 Global Input 91 Global Output 91 Specific Input 94 Specific Output 93 Subfields 92 Quantum Hot Standby 82 S980
300. oint The setpoint is for reference only and is drawn in the trend with a green line 5 In LoAlarm type the Y Axis value for the LoAlarm This value is for reference only and is drawn in the trend with a red line 6 In HiAlarm type the Y Axis value for the HiAlarm This value is for reference only and is drawn in the trend with a red line 290 Using the Trend view Addresses are shown in the color they are e g dots dashes is Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window 7 In Resolution type the time in ms range to display across the X axis Decreasing the Resolution value is equivalent to zooming in and increasing the value is equivalent to zooming out the display For example a 100 ms resolution 200 samples gives you an X axis range of 20 000 ms 20 seconds in width You could zoom out the view by setting the resolution higher e g 1000 ms 200 samples 200 000 ms wide b The X axis and therefore this time range is subdivided into 200 samples Reading the trend When you enter the Trend view all addresses in the Address Contents table are plotted You can also add or delete addresses on the fly LE Create setpoints and alarms from the Settings menu in the Trend Settings window You can record logged data to file directly from the Trend view Data Watch Window C PROWORX NXT TEST1 DWW 41 Eile Edit View Data Fill Settings Operations Window Help
301. oller User Loadables Loadable Library Loadable Library Source of Loadables C PROWORX NXT LOADABLE C PROWORX NXTA Select the type of file Library Type 80 C Database C Old ProwORX TLD to translate then click Type Name Opcode Modicon Exe format Browse to find the file USL CHS FF i uae USL 217 21 eee SEE USL HSBY 28 USL 214 R Loadables in the ai source file are listed here To add a load able to your library Select Library Rebuild select it then click Transfer Edit Opcode View Text Browse ansfe OK Cancel Help gt To transfer loadables from a source file into a library 1 Inthe Source of Loadables column select the type of source file the file containing the user loadables to translate to NxT format You can read loadables from an existing database a third party disk or a ProWORxX TLD library file 2 Click Browse to navigate to the source file then click OK Most often source files from other vendors come on floppy disks NxT reads the loadables in the source file then displays them in the right column 3 Select the loadables you want to transfer to a library You can select more than one loadable at a time Controller configuration Loadable library tab 69 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 4 Inthe Loadable Library column click Select Library The Open dialog box appears 5 Type the path and file name of a library or navigate to it then click OK If NxT can t
302. on menu that lists the configuration of function key levels prompts and instruction mnemonics 418 Glossary of Terms Glossary Modbus Modicon s RS 232C master slave serial communications protocol Modbus Plus Modicon s high speed peer to peer token ring communications protocol Modem Modulator Demodulator A communications device that allows a computer to transmit information usually over a standard telephone line Module An input output card Motion Control I O Drop Usually an I O drop tied to an ICC410 3220 or 3240 motion control system Network 1 A unit of ladder logic in a matrix of elements that is 11 columns wide and seven rows long It is used to group a function s ladder logic 2 Achain of interconnected computers and or programmable controllers which share data Network Comment A descriptor record assigned to a network Contains short comments a long comment a page title and descriptors Network Editor The editor in which you edit ladder logic Network Listing A printout of a group of networks of ladder logic which make up a program Glossary of Terms 419 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Network Logic A programmable controller control program or the representation of a programmable controller control program It includes logic elements networks and register contents Node A device that is connected to a network and is capable of communicating with other network devic
303. on of the and zeros fill in the blanks on the number stored at 40001 shifted left other side For example for 8 bit two 2 places Zeros are added on numbers 77 lt lt 2 means the right to fill in the gap 01001101 shifted left two digits The binary result is 00110100 or gt gt Right shift The result of 52 decimal 40001 gt gt 2 is the binary representation of the number stored at 40001 shifted right two 2 places Zeros are added on the left to fill in the gap Relational operators lt Less than These operators describe a comparison between two values or expressions lt Less than or equal to The result is always true 1 or false Equal to 0 Forexample 35 lt 42 evaluates to 1 true lt gt Not equal to Relational operators are used in Conditional expressions gt Greater than or equal to gt Greater than Mathematical operations in equation networks 235 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Conditional operators See page 236 for details Used in a conditional expression Parentheses Used to set precedence in solving equations To make sure certain operations are solved before others enclose those operations in parentheses Conditional expressions In Equation Networks conditional expressions take the following form EXPR1 RELOP EXPR2 EXPR3 EXPR4 EXPR1 through EXPR4 can be any address value or expression If EXPR2 or EXPR3 are not single values or addres
304. one of the following e If your computer is connected directly to the controller set the Modem Type drop down menu to None then click OK e If your computer connects to the controller s Modbus port through a modem set the parameters in the Modem box Modbus communications by modem You can easily configure ProWORX NxT to connect to controllers through dial up and dedicated line modems Before you begin confirm that e The controller is properly connected to its RS 232 modem e Your computer is properly connected to its modem e The modems DIP switches if they have them are set like this Modem DIP Switch Setting pip Switches seen from back Data Terminal Ready Always On Switch 1 on left Down Verbal Word Results Switch 2 Up Result Code Display Enabled Switch 3 Down Command mode local echo Switch 4 Up Auto Answer Switch 5 Up Carrier Detect Normal Switch 6 Up Load Non Volatile RAM Defaults Switch 7 Up Use AT Command Set Smart Mode Switch 8 on right Down After configuring NxT to use a modem it checks to see whether there is an active connection each time you select a device on your network e Ifit cannot find one NxT asks you for a phone number to dial or if your modem uses a dedicated line opens a connection automatically Modbus communications by modem 37 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e If it finds a connection or after opening one you can choose to select a M
305. onfig Extensions The Configuration Extensions window appears 2 Inthe Tree Control select the Global I O to edit by clicking it The Global I O fields appear in the Details area of the window 3 Do one of the following e Select the Global Output field by clicking it then click Edit e Double click the Global Output field The Global Output dialog box appears 4 In Length type the length 1 32 of the address range i e the number of registers to broadcast 5 In Reference type the starting address 5 or 6 digit for the range to broadcast 6 Ifrequired click BIN BCD to toggle between binary and binary coded decimal modes Global Input Controllers use the Global Input function to receive global data from any device communicating peer to peer on a Modbus Plus network gt To set a Global Input 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears LS Ensure the necessary Peer Cop links are defined before continuing Peer Cop extension 91 ProWORX NxT User s Guide In the Tree Control select the Global I O to edit by clicking it The Global I O fields appear in the Details area Select a Global Input then click Edit or double click the Global Input you want to edit The Global Input dialog box appears In Index type the starting point 1 to 8 of the broadcast data to read In Length type the number of words 1 to 32 to rea
306. only All addresses defined in the routine transfer table are transferred every scan There must be a minimum of 16 4xxxx registers to support the non transfer area The Routine Transfer Table is a range of discretes and registers that must be configured as a multiple of 16 Routine and Extra All addresses defined in the Routine Transfer Table and in the extra tables are transferred The range of each extra table must be a multiple of 16 The extra tables can be transferred over multiple scans All State RAM All RAM configured in the controller is transferred every scan In the Scans Needed to Transfer field type the number of scans 1 255 needed for the primary controller to transfer the extra transfer tables to the standby then click OK Quantum Hot Standby extension 83 ProWORX NxT User s Guide VME Bus extension The VME Bus extension lets a VME 424 X controller control data transfers between devices on a master slave Quantum network In a master slave protocol one device the master has control over other devices slaves As the network runs each element can lose and gain master status based on negotiations with other members of the network LE If the VME Bus extension does not appear in the Tree Control area it is not yet installed gt Toconfigure an installed Quantum VME Bus extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions d
307. ookmarks in logic Inserting and deleting network items Transferring logic blocks to and from disk offline only Making logbook entries Searching for duplicate coils offline only Displaying disabled addresses Locating coils from contacts Rebuilding a database Performing a sweep online only 7 Using the Traffic Cop Traffic Cop overview Drops racks and slots Using the Traffic Cop display 800 Series Traffic Cop DCP Series Traffic Cop Quantum Traffic Cop Micro 300 Series Traffic Cop 200 500 Series Traffic Cop 900 Series Traffic Cop A120 Series Traffic Cop Momentum M1 I O systems Using the I O Drawing Generator Displaying I O drawings 8 Documenting your PLC Documenting your PLC Table of Contents 125 127 134 136 137 137 148 152 158 158 161 164 165 168 170 171 173 174 174 175 175 175 179 180 180 181 185 187 190 196 197 198 199 199 203 204 207 208 ProWORX WNxT User s Guide 10 11 Using the Documentation window Using the One Line Documentation window Documentation summary Searching for specific documentation Using the Documentation editor Moving copying and deleting multiple records Adding 4xxxx Bit descriptors Documentation utilities Moving documentation Copy documentation Delete documentation Importing exporting databases Using Equation Networks Introduction to Equation Networks The Equation Network Editor display Equation format Equation values and data types Mat
308. or 984X 366 IBM 5531 to Modicon x80 and x85 366 IBM 5531 to Modicon 584 with W190 cable 367 IBM 5531 to Modicon J478 modem 367 Loopback connectors 368 584 Military connector 368 Appendix E DIF Files and Excel 369 Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel 370 Appendix F I O Cards Supported 375 I O cards supported in alphabetical order 376 A120 cards 376 B800 cards 377 ProWORX WNxT User s Guide Quantum cards 378 Micro cards 380 Momentum M1 and Interbus cards 381 SY MAX cards 382 Appendix G NxT and fxManager 383 How NxT works with fxManager 384 About fxManager 385 Access Control 386 Audit Trail 388 Connecting to a server 392 Working Disconnected from an fxManager Server 392 About the Project Manager 393 Working with the Project Manager 396 Checking out a project 396 Opening an NxT project 397 Creating a project 398 Configuring the controller address selection lists 399 Adding a project to an fxManager Server 400 Checking In a project 402 Getting a read only copy of a project 403 Labelling a project 403 Undoing a check out 404 Deleting a project 405 Glossary 407 Index 427 1 Welcome In this chapter Welcome to ProoWORX NxT 2 0 2 Installing ProWORX NxT 3 Starting ProWORX NxT 5 Authorizing ProWORX NxT 8 Customer support 10 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Welcome to ProWORX NxT 2 0 ProWORX NxT is the most advanced programming software available for Modicon logic controllers It gives you the power to program on
309. or click Net Scan to select a controller from a graphical display then click OK For more instructions on using Net Scan see Performing a network scan on page 50 330 Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically Select parameters to compare by clicking them Click to start the comparison Chapter 16 Using the Compare Function Click Compare All to compare all parameters or click Compare Selected to choose parameters to compare The Compare window expands File To Controller Compare Compare Settings Master Database CAPROWORX NXT TEST2 Browse O Compare All Compare To To File Hiudsz Compare Selected ntroller Micro5121 F Click the ranges to e To Controller Micro 51271 Select edit them gt X Networks E Coil Used 00001 00128 X Controller Configuration X Coil State 00001 00128 x User Loadables Input State 10001 10016 X Traffic Cop X 3xxxx Registers 30001 30001 X Segment Scheduler X 4xxxx Registers 40001 40109 M ASCII Port Parameters I Coil Disable 00001 00128 F ASCII Messages Input Disable 10001 10016 Close Select the parameters you want to compare The column of parameters on the right require address ranges to be set Click the text box of a range to edit it The Range Selection dialog box appears Range Selection x Range 1 00001 00512 Range 2 You can enter up Range 3 to four
310. or database if it is not used anywhere in your ladder logic If you try to delete a loadable that is still in use you receive an error message In the right column of the User Loadables tab labelled Loadables in Controller or Loadables in Database select the loadable to delete Click Select All to delete all loadables in a controller or database Click Delete When NxT prompts you click Yes to confirm the deletion or Cancel to exit without deleting the loadables 68 Controller configuration User loadables tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Controller configuration Loadable library tab Before you can place a user loadable into a controller or database it must be read into a loadable library A loadable library holds a set of loadables for you so that you only have to translate them to NxT format once In Loadable Library tab you read a loadable from disk translate it to NxT format and move it into a library You can read loadables from an existing database a third party disk or a ProWORX TLD library file controller or database Using a loadable is a two step process reading it into a b Reading a user loadable into a loadable library does not copy it into your loadable library then copying it from the library into the controller or database For more information see Controller configuration User loadables tab on page 67 Controller Configuration General Ports Contr
311. or out Users to be created added to or removed from a group deleted renamed and user properties to be edited Groups to be created added to or removed froma project deleted renamed and group properties to be edited Permissions to be edited and set Access Control 387 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Property EditProjectList Description Allows Projects to be added or destroyed Groups to be added to or removed from a project Controller addresses to be added or removed from the Controller Address Selection dialog box Label Allows labels to be added to a project EditEventList Audit Trail Allows Scheduler Event List to be checked in or out Events to be created added or edited Scheduler properties to be edited Scheduler to be started or stopped From fxManager you can set up the Audit Trail feature to record user operations triggered in ProWORX NxT and in fxManager When logged on to a Server Audit Trail tracks and records your actions then saves the information to an Audit Trail database file You can later view this information by generating reports You can log such actions as editing a project in Online mode logging on to a Server or creating a project In addition PrOWORX NxT allows you to add comments about the changes made to a project in an edit session These comments are also included in the Audit Trail database records LE You configure Audit Trail setting
312. or type the size of the contiguous block of addresses you want to find 4 Type the address you want to start searching from NxT allows you to start a search from any address However I O functions typically require a word boundary so you will have to manually adjust the Start Search At value to be ona 16 1 boundary 5 Click Start NxT marks the free addresses it finds with an asterisk 160 Checking for used addresses Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Global register replace offline only The Global Replace function lets you move or copy register descriptors and or register contents from a source not necessarily an active database to the active database gt To perform a Global Replace 1 From the Offline Network Editor on the Search menu click Global Replace or is The Global Replace dialog box appears Global Replace x Source Database C PROWORX NXT DEMODBANXT_DEMO Browse Source Address Range Dest Address Range Network Range Start 10001 Start fi 0001 From 0001 End 10001 End 10001 To 0034 Descriptors Discrete States Mode l Move bd Move z Continuous Reg es Forced Disabled O Step gnore z Move h X Automatic Coil Table Rebuild Start Cancel Help 2 Use the following information to set the parameters Source database Type the path and file name of the database from which you want to mo
313. ors in the equation you re returned to the Equation dialog box PCFL editor equation text format An equation is an expression composed of operands and operators 250 Editing the PCFL equation block Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Operators are the mathematical operations that you perform on values For example an asterisk is an operator representing multiplication Operands are the values that an operator works on Operands can be any valid expression Most operators require two operands the exception is negation the operator which requires one Ina PCFL equation functions are predefined calculations performed on single expressions For example ARCTAN B 3 calculates the arc tangent of three times the value stored in variable B Expressions normally refer to an operator together with its required operands It can also be a constant value a variable or a function For example 3 SIN A 2 isa valid expression as are SIN A 2 A 2 anda To ensure expressions are calculated in the correct order enclose all relevant expressions in parentheses For example 3 4 2 is calculated as 3 times 6 or 18 while 3 4 2 iscalculated as 12 plus 2 or 14 The PCFL Equation block supplies four variables A B Cand D Equation Operators You can use the following operators in your equation Operator Meaning Example Result negation 3 negative 3 subtraction B42 1 div
314. ou must install the TCP IP Configuration Extension into your controllers to set TCP IP addresses for their communication cards For more information see TCP IP extension on page 79 To select and configure TCP IP communications 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or from the Offline Network Editor on the Controller menu click Communications Setup 2 From the Interface list on the left of the Communications Setup dialog box select TCP IP 3 In Timeout enter a type that specifies the length of time the PC will wait for successful communication with a controller before displaying an error message Default is 2 seconds 4 Click OK Configuring TCP IP Communications 43 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Selecting a device on the network Before you can start programming reading or writing logic in the Online Editor you must first select or attach to the controller you want to work with Selecting a controller connects your PC to it so the Online Editor can read its ladder logic Traffic Cop information and configuration and write your changes back to it Unless you have selected Confirm Address on Entry in the database s setup opening a database in the Online Editor connects you automatically to its controller 2 For more information see Editing the setup of a database on page 19 You cannot see or edit descriptors in the Online Editor unless you open a LE controller s database as well as attach to i
315. our NxT database as a DIF file 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Import Export Select Export Type the path and file name of the file to export your database to or click Browse to navigate to it Select DIF as the File Type to create Click Start 370 Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel Appendix E DIF Files and Excel gt Step 3 Open and edit your database in Microsoft Excel 1 Open the DIF file in Microsoft Excel The spreadsheet looks like this A B C D E F a K Address 1 D Desc 1 Desc 2 Desc 3 Desc 4 oes Desc 9 Address 1 S Comment1 Comment2 Comment3 Comment 4 Address 1 L Lookup 1 Address 1 ak Page Title Address 2 D Desc 1 Desc 2 Desc 3 Desc 4 ed Desc 9 The number in Column A tells you what controller address the row describes The letter in Column B tells you what information the next cells in the row contain If the letter in Column B is The following cells in the row contain D for Descriptors descriptors 1 through 9 in columns C through K S for Short Comments short comments 1 through 4 in columns C through F L for Long Comments a long comment lookup number in column C T for Page Title the page title in column C 2 Make your changes to the documentation gt Step 4 Convert the controller addresses from numbers to text 1 Find an unused column in the spreadsheet
316. ow replaces the standard Documentation Editor at the bottom of the Network Editor Verify Device Selection When selected and when the memory protect state is toggled you re prompted to verify the device after connecting to a controller This ensures you ve attached to the right controller This feature is only available to users working with SecurWORxX or fxManager 6 Digit Addressing When On sets all addressing to six digits allowing NxT to enter and display constants greater than 9999 Auto is the default which sets addressing to five digits unless the controller has addresses configured that require six Max Decimal Value Restricts registers to a decimal value of either 9999 default or 65535 Add Watch Track Data Info This setting determines where Data Watch address and tracking request additions go either to a Data Watch Window or the Data Watch Panel These additions are done through the Watch and Track items on the Data menu For more information on the Data Watch Panel see page 122 For more information on Data Watch Windows see page 276 e Online Mode This allows you to set the default startup mode when going Online You can start up in either Program or Monitor mode Setting system preferences 31 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Auto Monitor Logout When selected with Logout the Online Network Editor closes after the specified amount of inactive time and the main menu opens When selected with Monitor the O
317. owever if an address is forced deleting it removes the force unless the address is referred to elsewhere gt To force a discrete ON 1 From the Data Watch view select the discrete you wish to force ON 2 Click Data then click Force ON gt To force a discrete OFF 1 From the Data Watch view select the discrete you want to force OFF 2 Click Data then click Force OFF gt To return control of a discrete s state back to logic 1 From the Data Watch view select the discrete that you want to enable 2 Click Data then click Enable Editing register contents You can edit the contents of a register from the Data Watch view gt To edit the register contents 1 From the Data Watch view select the register to edit 2 Click Data then click Register Contents The Edit Data dialog box appears 3 Type the new register value This value must be in the same radix as the previous value The radix is displayed beside the value in the Data Watch window 4 Click OK 286 Disabling and forcing discretes Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window Working with the views Data Watch view The Data Watch view is used for full page data display tracking and data watch operations LE You can change the radix for individual addresses by selecting Radix on the Edit menu NxT begins tracking the data for this address In this view only the current value for each address is displayed Use the Trend Data Logger o
318. ox appears Click Format The Format dialog box appears General Options imi per Item Title Page Mixed Pitch Left 0 00 Network Options Page Titles x Page Numbers Title Every Page First Page Number None Only New Titles C No Titles T Index Documentation Controller MisMatch Options Limit Number of Cross References PRINTED to per Item Page Numbers First Page Number Index OK Cancel Help The following formatting options are available e Mixed Pitch For cleaner and clearer looking printouts e Page Titles Prints a page title associated with the current network e Title Page Prints a summary of all listing options and the database configuration Page Numbering Prints the page numbers e Network Index An index of networks by their titles e Table Index An index of all tables Formatting a printout 269 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Quick picks Quick Picks let you select from a list of commonly configured print options gt To print using Quick Picks 1 From the Lister dialog box click Quick Picks The Quick Picks window appears Quick Picks x System Click here to see commonly used printing options All networks tables with full documentation x OK Cancel 2 Select a pre configured option or a user configured file see below then click OK Using custom quick picks You can save your custom print settings to a file
319. p If a drop has not been configured yet Configure is displayed in the drop overview area The Traffic Cop tree control cannot be expanded until the drop type has been chosen gt To configure a drop 1 Click the drop in the tree control 2 Click Configure The Drop Configuration dialog box appears with the previous default selections Drop Configuration x Drop 01 has not been configured Please set the interface 800 Series P J89x Remote 170 Interface Quantum Quantum Remote 1 0 200 500 J290 J291 Remote 1 0 Interface DCP DROP D908 Distributed Control Processor 900 Series Motion Control Drop IC 410 3220 3240 Y Cancel Help 3 Select the interface corresponding to your topology 4 Click OK 184 Using the Traffic Cop display Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop 800 Series Traffic Cop This Traffic Cop is used to configure an 800 series drop Racks associated with the drop and the cards configured in the racks are also displayed to the right of the tree control The racks can be displayed in two views and both allow you to edit slots e Drop Edit Displays all racks in the drop e Rack Edit Zooms in to display only the currently selected rack This view also lets you configure the rack type and size gt To configure an 800 Series drop 1 From the Traffic Cop tree control select the 800 Series drop to edit NxT displays the Edit Drop view in the right side of the window
320. p is described as single parent or child a Micro Traffic Cop E mae 1 sina 20 a Lu Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 r Edit Rack Type Card References Data DISC Micro 512 and 612 Series controllers can have A120 Series I O cards pro grammed in racks 2 to 4 Edit Data Card Help mici37 gt Toedita slot 1 From the Micro Traffic Cop select the slot to edit and click Edit or double click the slot The Edit window appears Drop 1 Rack 1 Slot 1 xi Card AETA gt Output 00001 OK Cancel In the Card field select the card to insert in the slot Selecting a card displays the power supply loading and mechanical keying for it In the address In or Out type the starting address for the address range assigned to this card then click OK For example if you configure a B828 card with 16 outputs the address field is entitled Out You must type the initial address of a 16 address table 0xxxxx for this card The final address in the table is displayed 196 Micro 300 Series Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop used that isn t on a word boundary 16 1 the address is adjusted to the nearest b For some cards the table must begin on a word boundary If starting address us boundary The address table is provided when Auto Addressing is selected Some cards have other values which are configured
321. pin 24 5in female male 4 I 368 Loopback connectors Appendix E DIF Files and Excel ProWORX NxT User s Guide Editing DIF files with Microsoft Excel NxT exports database documentation in two formats which Microsoft Excel can read dBase4 DBF Use this database format if possible as Excel reads and writes it correctly When you export a database to a DBF file each descriptor field and short comment becomes its own record Data Interchange Format DIF When Excel imports a DIF file it converts the controller addresses in the first column of the database into numerical values which NxT cannot read Excel also exchanges the rows and columns of the database in the DIF file s header Unless you correct these problems an error appears when you try to import a DIF file back into NxT after you have changed it in Excel If you prefer to use DIF files instead of DBF files and want to use Excel to edit documentation follow these seven steps gt Step 1 Set the size of your descriptor fields for Microsoft Excel 1 Open your database in ProWORX NxT For more information see Opening an existing database on page 17 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Database Setup Change the Descriptor Field Width to 15 Change the number of Descriptor Fields to 9 Click OK A dialog box prompting you to expand your database may appear Click OK gt Step 2 Export y
322. products and serial numbers listed for the key match yours then click Exit Authorizing ProWORX NxT 9 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Customer support Customer support is available to registered ProWORX NxT users If you have a question about ProWORX NxT and can t find the answer in this User s Guide or in the NxT Help system contact our Customer Service staff for assistance You can reach Customer Service department by Internet telephone fax or mail Schneider Electric One High Street North Andover MA 01845 Internet http www proworx com Email customercentral schneiderautomation com Support Hotline 888 266 8705 Telephone 978 794 0800 Fax 978 975 9301 Leave NxT running on your computer and call from a telephone near it To help us assist you as quickly as possible we suggest you have the following information ready e The version and serial number of your copy of NxT To find this information on the Help menu click About in the NxT Title Screen or Network Editor e What you were doing when the problem occurred whether you can repeat the problem and any error messages you received Information about your computer including its processor type memory hard drive size video card type and I O boards e Your version of Windows To find this information Windows 95 or NT 4 x click Start then Settings Select Control Panel When the Control Panel window opens double click System When the
323. ption of the instruction appears at the bottom of the window Configurable Mnemonics x No Function Mnemonic Normally open contact 132 Editing instructions in logic Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Select the mnemonic to edit and click Edit or double click the mnemonic to edit Type in the new mnemonic Click outside of the field or press ENTER If you try to type an existing mnemonic NxT displays a warning and will not continue the edit Click OK Editing instructions in logic 133 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Segment Scheduler The Segment Scheduler governs when each segment of logic is solved and controls which I O drops are updated after each segment is solved The number of segments in the database is set in the General tab of the Controller Configuration window By default the segments are solved in numerical order segment one first segment two next and so on The drop input output numbers correspond to the segment number gt To edit a row in the table 1 From the Network Editor on the Display menu click Segments The Segment Summary dialog box appears 2 Click Scheduler The Segment Scheduler window appears The table shows the numeric order of solve for example whichever segment is in row 1 of the table is solved first row 2 is solved second etc 3 Do one of the following e Click the row to edit then click Edit e Double click the row to edit T
324. quation Network Editor 229 Display 229 Equation Networks 228 About 228 Adding items from a list panel 229 434 Index Coils panel 230 Constants 231 Creating 228 Data Types 232 Descriptor Summary 238 Displayed in the Network Editor 240 Editing 228 229 231 Enable Contact 239 Exponential Notation in 233 Functions List Panel 231 Functions list of 237 Operators List Panel 230 Operators list of 233 Output Coils 230 Symbols List Panel 231 Used Address List 238 Value Types 231 Erasing Logic from a Controller 104 Ethernet Gateway Configuring 42 Overview 34 Excel Using with DIF Files 370 Executive Cartridge 65 Executive Flash RAM see Flash RAM Executive Exponential Notation 233 Exponentiation operator 234 Exporting Database Documentation 224 Exporting Documentation 224 Exporting logic 171 Extended Memory 65 Reading from 102 Register Editor 148 Assembly Register in 149 Documenting 149 Radix 148 Utilities for 150 Copying Blocks 151 Filling Registers 152 Moving Blocks 150 Writing to 104 Extensions Configuration See Configuration Extensions F Face Plate display 300 FIL Files Exporting 224 Importing 221 File Print to 272 Fill Single Type References System Preference 31 Filling Blocks of Registers 157 FIS Files Exporting 224 Importing 221 flash 107 Flash RAM Executive 108 Reading Into a File 109 Writing Into a File 109 FLASH RAM Transferring Controller Memory to 106 Font Changing for Printouts 273 Chan
325. r Spreadsheet view to see historical data Z Data Watch Window C PROWORX NXTATEST1 DWw Of x 41 File Edit View Data Fill Settings Operations Window Help lej x Address Symbol Data Address Symbol Data AddressiSymbol Data Click in the AR and type On 100077 OFF 401513 00000 Dec the address you want to On 100078 Oft 401514 00000 Dec track then select the cell or 100079 o 401515 00000 Dec f Of 100080 or 401516 00000 Dec where you want to display On 100081 or 401517 00000 Dec that address and press off 100082 Off 401518 00000 Dec ENTER Avoid using the Off 100083 Off 401519 00000 Dec Of 100084 Of 401520 00000 Dec Track window as your ed or 100085 or 401521 00000 Dec its will be overwritten or 100086 or 401522 00000 Dec Off 100087 Off 401523 00000 Dec Or 100088 OFF 401524 00000 Dec or 100089 OFF 401525 00000 Dec Off 100090 Off 401526 00000 Dec Off 100091 Off 401527 00000 Dec or 100092 or 401528 00120 Dec or 100093 Or 401529 00120 Dec Off 100094 Off 401530 00120 Dec or 100095 or 401531 00120 Dec There are two status bars Off 100036 OFF 401532 00120 Dec one for the Data Watch Window itself and a sec ond one for each child window 00 00 0000 00 00 00 001 Data Record 000372 000373 Trigger Disabled Clamps Disabled Quantum 213 4 Running Program You can fill a single cell or an entire column with incrementing addresses from the Fi
326. r the power flow of the output coil itself is still displayed based on the status of the Equation Network For example Result gt 0 will still show power if an Equation Network s Result is greater than 0 This may make for some strange visual effects such as an output coil that seems to be passing flow but doesn t affect anything that follows 240 Equations displayed within the Network Editor Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks The following Network Editor features are disabled when you move the cursor onto an Equation Network e Assembly Register AR operations that modify parts of an Equation Network Functions that force discrete variables will work as usual e Insert Row Column e Delete Element Row Column e Drag and drop operations from side panels Equations displayed within the Network Editor 241 10 Using the PCFL Editor In this chapter Introduction to the PCFL editor 244 Editing PCFL registers 245 Editing PCFL input output flags 246 Editing the PCFL equation block 249 Customizing the PCFL configuration file 255 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Introduction to the PCFL editor The PCFL Editor simplifies the entry of PCFL instruction block data It replaces the Register Editor for PCFL blocks The PCFL instruction block is a multi function block There are many different PCFL subfunctions that use the same basic instruction block While each PCFL instruction block uses a similar arrangement of registe
327. r an instruction from the Instruction List e Inthe Network Editor drag the instruction from the Instruction List to e A cell in logic to enter the instruction there e A button on the Instruction Bar to use that button as a shortcut for inserting that instruction later Symbol Summary panel The Symbol Summary panel displays user defined symbols and their corresponding addresses Symbols let you assign names to addresses to make them easier to remember To work with symbols the Symbols check box in System Preferences must be selected gt To display the Symbol Summary panel e Inthe Network Editor do one of the following e On the View menu click Symbol List e Click Symb in the panel toolbar 2 For more information see Symbolic addressing on page 164 Network editor panel descriptions 121 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Data Watch panel The Data Watch Panel available only in the online editor performs many of the same functions as the Data Watch Window but is displayed as a side panel next to the Network Editor With it you can monitor changes in values stored at up to 60 addresses at a time Any settings you change or addresses you add to the Data Watch Panel are saved when you leave the current database If the Add Watch Track Data Info option in System Preferences is set to Data Watch Panel operations that would normally add addresses and tracking information to the Data Watch Window will add t
328. r is stopped For instructions see Stopping the controller on page 110 2 Inthe ASCII Message window select a message to delete To delete a range of messages select the first one then hold the SHIFT key and click the last one All the messages in the range will be selected 3 Click Delete NxT prompts you to confirm the deletion Nem pic In the Online Editor click Initialize to delete all the messages in a controller In the Online Editor you can adjust the amount of memory a controller has set aside for ASCII Messages gt To change controller memory for ASCII messages 1 Inthe ASCII Message window click Resize 2 Type the amount of memory in machine words to set aside in the controller for ASCII messages then click Resize gt Toimport ASCII messages from another database 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click ASCII The ASCII Messages window appears 2 Click Import The Import Messages window appears 3 Select a database from the list type the database s path and file name or click Browse to navigate to it 4 Inthe Source area select a range of messages to import 5 Inthe Destination area type a location for the first imported message Configuring ASCII messages 75 ProWORX NxT User s Guide The other messages follow sequentially The range for this value is from 1 through the maximum number of messages your controller can support less the total nu
329. r window select the register you want to change the radix for Click Single Bit Type the bit number between 1 and 16 you want to display then click OK The value in the data field is automatically displayed in the new radix To print a screen of register contents From the Register Editor window click Print The addresses symbols and data currently displayed on the screen are sent to the default printer Printer settings can be changed with the Printer Setup dialog box in the Lister window see page 263 they cannot be changed from inside the Register Editor dialog box Creating a URF file for an instruction There is a URF file for each instruction which contains all the text and formatting information needed to display the register edit screen and the desired register values The URF file also contains the register where the operation mode is stored These URF files must be stored in the same directory as the NxT application 140 User Configurable Register editor gt Tocreate a template 1 Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Launch a text editor application and create a text file The text file usually has the instruction name for a file name and must have a URF extension Type the text and formatting information for the instruction according to the following template Text Description BASE VALUE Location of the register to display Set to T M or B representing Top Middle and Bottom n
330. race panel appears in the top right corner of the Network Editor You can drag the Retrace panel by the title bar to a different location by the title bar Once positioned the panel will remain in place until you exit ProWORX NxT Do any of the following Prev Click to move to the previous mark The network window is repositioned to this mark Next Click to move to the next mark The network window is repositioned to this mark Goto Mark Click to return to the Goto Mark dialog box to select a different mark Stay Click to close the Retrace Mark panel and disregard the remembered logic position Clear Click to clear all marks from the list Cancel Click to return to the network to the location prior to the start of the Goto Mark function The Retrace Mark panel is removed Setting bookmarks in logic 169 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 170 Inserting and deleting network items Inserting network items You can insert columns rows and networks gt To insert a column row or network 1 From the Network Editor click the location in logic where you want to insert the new item 2 On the Edit menu click Insert then do one of the following e Column Click to insert a new column to the right of the cursor e Row Click to insert a new row above your cursor e Previous Network Click to insert anew network above the current network e Next Network Click to insert a new network below the current network Del
331. ration of the Quantum Hot Standby setup This lets you set the type of state RAM transfer between the CHS110 00 modules It also lets you set the Command Register and the Non Transfer Area This area is only available on version 2 x Quantum controllers that contain the CHS loadable in the configuration If the Quantum Hot Standby extension does not appear in the Tree Control area it is not yet installed gt To configure the Quantum Hot Standby extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears Select the HSBY extension from the tree control If the HSBY extension is not in the Tree Control you have to add it by clicking Add Extension then selecting Quantum Hot Standby In the Command Register Address field type the 4xxxx address of the command register used to configure the hot standby system This register must be transferred every scan and cannot be in the non transfer area The initial command register contains the settings that are loaded into the controller when it is started If any changes need to be made while the controller is running the command register must be used and not the initial command register Settings such as port address swapping allowing an executive upgrade setting the standby s mode on a logic mismatch setting the controller s modes and overriding the key switch can be changed from the command register
332. ration values back to their original states 2 Allocate controller memory again using the values you require then click OK You re prompted to attempt a Smart Configuration 3 Click No The controller is reconfigured Logic and Traffic Cop information will be lost Controller configuration Ports tab From this tab in the Controller Configuration window you configure the controller s Modbus and ASCII ports These settings do not affect the communications setup of your PC in any way only the controller s vad The communication parameters for your PC and PLC must be the same Set tq communication parameters for your PC in the Communications Setup dialog box e For more information see Setting up communications for your PC on page 35 Some controllers support Bridge Mode which allows you to connect to a Modbus Plus network through their Modbus ports 1 If a Bridge Mode check box appears in the Controller Configuration Ports Tab dialog your controller supports Bridge Mode while its MEM DIP switch is in the MEM position Select to enable Bridge Mode Controller Configuration x General Ports Controller User Loadables Loadable Library Mode Parity Stop Data Baud Dev Addr Delay Modbus Port 1 RTU Even 1 9600 001 01 Modbus Port 2 RTU Even 1 9600 001 0 Modbus Port 3 RTU Even 1 9600 001 0 Setup Port If you have a Micro 311 411 512 or 612 controller Micro Port Assignments assig
333. rd All descriptors short comments the long comment number and the page title for one address point 412 Glossary of Terms Glossary Descriptor Table The table of addresses displayed on the screen in the descriptor module Descriptor Tables Listing A group of printouts which consist of tables of descriptors a table of short comments long comments and mismatch tables Device Any programmable unit such as a PLC numeric controller or robot or I O card Dim Awareness The state of a PLC that contains no logic configuration or traffic cop information Directory A group of files and or subdirectories A directory called the root directory is placed on each disk when it is formatted Subdirectories can be created within the root directory and within other subdirectories Files can be stored in a subdirectory or the root directory In Windows directories are often called folders Disable To stop the programmable controller s logic solving mechanism from updating the state of a coil or updating the state of a discrete input Also see force Discrete Inputs such as switches or outputs such as coils that can only be on or off Discrete inputs are usually held in 1xxxx registers Compare to analog Display A visual output device such as a monitor Glossary of Terms 413 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Distributed I O DIO One of four major architectures for input output systems also see Loc
334. re processed gt To compile a macro and database without opening Codegen 1 From the Windows Run feature click Browse to navigate to the Codegen executable Codegen exe should now appear in the Open field of the Run dialog box 2 Using the default format below type the path and file names of the macro configuration CFG and the database DCF files Codegen cgf c proworx nxt lt Filename gt cgf db c proworx nxt databasename dcf lt Filename gt contains the name of your CGF file lt ProWORX NxT database name gt contains the full path and file name of your database 3 Click OK Codegen appends the CGF and DCF files as a background task gt To display a macro s log file 1 Create a CGF file and compile it 314 Appending a macro and database Chapter 14 Working with Macros 2 Click Log View The Log File Viewer appears with information about the compiled CGF file Select an existing ProWORX Macro Processing Utility MEE CGF file NE Macro Configuration File CGF C PROWORX NXTA TEST1 CGF Browse is ProWORX Destination Database C PROWORX NXT NXT_DEMO DCF Browse Log File Viewer Select a destination CODEGEN ProWORX Macro Processing Utility database z Version 1 40 Macro Script C ProWoORX NXT TEST1 CGF ProWORX Database C ProWORX NXT NXT_DEMO Date 64 13 1999 Time 12 01 58 A D Processing Macro 1 2 Click Start to pro ERROR C DATABASE MAC
335. receiving device for the next packet The PC and con troller must use the same number of stop bits Default is 1 Baud Sets the data transfer speed of the controller s Modbus port in bits per second The PC and controller must be set to the same baud Default is 9600 3 When you are finished do one of the following e Press ESC The drop down lists for each parameter disappear e Click another port The first port s drop down lists disappear e Click another Controller Configuration tab The Ports tab closes e Click OK The Controller Configuration window closes Controller configuration Ports tab 63 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Controller configuration Controller tab This tab in the Controller Configuration window contains a summary of the hardware options you have chosen for your controller the amount of memory it has available for logic in machine words and how many User Loadable modules are currently loaded into it General Ports Controller User Loadables Loadable Library Controller Type Controller Details E Cartrid E685 904 Enhanced Current Controller Type rag each i nhance Click to change the En Extended Memory type of controller for User Logic 8K the database in the EAN Offline Editor only Terna E Micro 170 Mode Memory Pack Click to specify the hardware options for your controller Controller Summary Total Logic 05997 Modules 00 Edit Details Execu
336. rectly for data This means that the actual update rate of the Data Watch Window despite what it may be set at can only be as fast as the Update Rate set in NxT which is providing the data Typically users should maintain a higher Update Rate in NxT than in the Data Watch window Realistically the fastest update rates will approach 55 ms This is because of overhead from concurrent processes for example the operating system Power and Power State flow toggle Online only 125 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To set the update rate 1 From the Network Editor on the Edit menu click Update Rate The Screen Update Rate dialog box appears Screen Update Rate Ea Selecting a fast screen update rate may slow down system performance causing sluggish response by the system If your system is experiencing sluggish behavior slow down the screen update rate Slow Fast ae OK Cancel Help e Change the rate in the scroll bar by moving the scroll box You can move the scroll box by clicking and dragging it with the mouse clicking E gt in the scroll bar or by pressing lt or gt To slow down the update rate move the scroll thumb to the left To speed up the update rate move the scroll slider to the right 2 Click OK 126 Setting the update rate online only Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Editing instructions in logic Editing modes in the ProWORX NxT online editor There are th
337. ree editing modes in NxT Online Program Mode Allows you to edit the controller s logic and configuration in real time Monitor Mode Shows a view only display of the controller s logic and configuration Offline Edit Mode Lets you perform minor edits on one network without updating the controller in real time You can only edit logic in Offline Edit Mode if NxT is also in Program Mode gt To toggle between Program Mode and Monitor Mode From the Network Editor on the Edit menu click Program Mode or in the status bar click the Program Monitor area Program Mark About Offline Edit mode Offline Edit Mode lets you make changes e g entering instructions with undefined addresses or duplicate coils to network logic in the Online Editor without updating the controller in real time This gives you some breathing room when performing small edits without having to go offline gt To switch to Offline Edit mode From the Network Editor on the Edit menu click Offline Edit Mode While you are in Offline Edit Mode the network appears in bright blue with no power flow or state flow shown The status bar will display Offline Edit Mode in bright blue As long as you are in the Offline Edit Mode changes made to the network won t be sent to the controller Instead they will be kept in a temporary buffer until you exit the Offline Edit Mode or change networks Editing instructions in logic 1
338. register in the block Click Start When finished click Cancel to close the dialog box Generic Register editor The Register Editor is used to edit register contents in a table format Data may be typed in binary 5 digit decimal hexadecimal ASCII or IEEE floating point The data contained in the registers is displayed in all appropriate formats Na F You can edit binaries easily by just double clicking on the bit to change it or click B on it and enter a new value 152 Generic Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To edit a register value using the edit window 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor or click in the toolbar The Register Editor dialog box appears Register Editor File Register 3xxxx 4xxxx Floating Point AR Register Binary DE Hex ASCII ooooo000 o0000000 00008 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 00000000 00000000 00000 Select which register type 3xxxx 4xxxx to display Select or clear the floating point check box to display or not display floating point values 4 Select the radix of the register to
339. rently available ex cept when using TCP IP networking communication system Select Setup Cancel Help 2 Inthe Device field type the address of a controller Click to select a database Type the controller s address here For Type Modbus A Modbus address 1 to 247 for a controller on the local network a one address Modbus routing path if your Modbus network is connected to a Modbus Plus network through a controller in Bridge Mode or a Bridge Multiplexer The controller or BM85 interprets the Modbus address as a routing path using its internal Address Map or Implicit Attach Addressing Modbus Plus A Modbus Plus address 1 to 64 for a controller on the local network a five address Modbus Plus routing path to a device on another network Type the address of the bridge first followed by addresses for additional Modbus Plus networks Modbus Plus devices on those networks or Modbus devices bridged to the Modbus Plus networks Separate the addresses in the routing path with commas for example 10 3 21 0 0 Selecting a device on the network 45 ProWORX NxT User s Guide For Type Ethernet A Modbus Plus address 1 to 64 for a controller on the local Gateway network or a five address Modbus Plus routing path for a device on another network exactly as you would if your computer had a direct Modbus Plus connection TCP IP A TCP IP address for a single device
340. ress table is automatically provided if you have selected Auto Addressing Some cards have other values which are configured at this level Selecting a B863 001 4 Channel In For example lets you toggle between BIN and BCD DCP Series Traffic Cop The DCP Series Traffic Cop is a four page display showing the addresses used to transfer data to and from a D908 tied to an 5908 system The D908 is a distributed control processor available for 680 685 780 785 systems The controllers use a D908 for a remote drop to the master S908 system gt To edit DCP drops 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Traffic Cop or click in the Toolbar Traffic Cop DiseIn Disc Out Analogin Analog Gut Intell O Interface Power a 5908 Traffic Cop Gif Drop 1 800 Series Hif Drop 2 800 Series Hi Drop 3 800 Series D iRack 1 Drop 121 Drop 130 Drop 140 Drop 15 Drop 18 a r Edit Drop Hold Up Time 3 ASCII Port 0 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 eos ba oe ts a 01 0 Modules Programmed 01 0 Modules Programmed 01 0 Modules Programmed 01 0 Modules Programmed eK ocr Series DCP Series Traffic Cop 187 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Selecting a rack from the tree control displays the corresponding page where b The four pages of the drop are displayed as racks in th
341. roWORX NxT User s Guide Setting bookmarks in logic You can set bookmarks in your network logic so you can quickly return to a cell or series of cells The Set Mark Unmark Goto Marks and Retrace functions allow quick viewing of non consecutive areas of logic By marking multiple cell locations on different networks up to 42 marks are allowed you can use the mark table or the Retrace Mark panel to quickly jump between the marked locations Marks may also be set after a search gt To seta mark 1 From the Network Editor select the address or instruction you want to set the mark for 2 From the Search menu click Set Mark Going to marks gt Togo toa mark 1 From the Network Editor on the Search menu click Goto Mark The Goto Mark dialog box appears showing a list of current marks Goto Mark x Network Row Column Instruction Address 1 1 1 10001 8 1 1 IE 10001 ia 1 BLKM 40092 j Goto Cancel Help 2 Click a mark to go to then click Goto or double click the mark 168 Setting bookmarks in logic Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor Retracing marks You can use the Retrace Mark panel to quickly jump from mark to mark Mark 02 03 Prev Next This panel allows you to navigate through Stay Clear logic from mark to Goto Mark mark Cancel Help gt To retrace your marks 1 From the Network Editor on the Search menu click Retrace Marks The Ret
342. roller 103 Write Type 103 Y Y2K Compatibility 28 Year 2000 Compatibility check 28 Index 445
343. roller to work you need to configure it for your network and I O devices Most of this is done in the Controller Configuration dialog box The Controller Configuration dialog box is divided into five tabs each witha different set of options Select a tab by clicking it The options available under each tab depend on the type of controller you selected for the database gt To configure a controller 1 Inthe Network Editor from the Configuration menu click Configuration or click on the toolbar 2 Click the tab for the options you want to configure e General Configures a controller s memory including the number of coils and registers I O cards and drops the amount of memory set aside for Configuration Extensions and the number and size of the ASCII messages you want to use e Ports Configures the controller s serial and ASCII ports e Controller Configures your controller s hardware options You can also select a new controller here if needed e User Loadables Moves user loadables from your Loadable Library into your database so they can be used with a controller or removes them from the database e Loadable Library Converts user loadables into NxT format and adds or removes them from your Loadable Library Enter the new parameters Click OK to save your changes 54 Configuring a controller Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Controller configuration General tab This tab in the Controller Configurat
344. rrow keys Al though these actions appear to work on the screen they do not actually correct the error Type your password when you are prompt ed for it To correct a mistake press ENTER and type your password again when you are prompted 1 Inthe Dial Chat window carefully type your password when you are prompted for it e Do not try to correct typing mistakes with pressing the BACKSPACE or DELETE keys and do not use the cursor keys to move around the screen NxT sends each character to the modem as you type it so although these actions may appear to fix an error on the screen the modem does not understand the correction e To correct a mistake press ENTER and type your password again when you are prompted 2 Click Close when your password is accepted Selecting a device on the network 49 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Performing a network scan The Network Scan function finds controllers bridges bridge multiplexers and other devices attached to Modbus and Modbus Plus networks NxT displays the devices it finds by their address number and also shows their type mode and status gy If you use TCP IP networking to connect to your controllers the Net Scan function is unavailable gt Toscan for devices on your network 1 To start a scan at a particular point type a partial routing path here then press ENTER Click Prev LAN to scan for devices on the Local Area Network LAN one level above the
345. rs and status flags the registers and flags for each subfunction have different meanings The PCFL Editor provides a way to configure a PCFL block without concern for which register to set The PCFL Editor also simplifies editing of the PCFL Equation subfunction The PCFL Equation block stores the equation as a series of registers in a format that may not be intuitive to a database developer gt To open the PCFL Editor 1 Move the network cursor onto the PCFL block you want to edit 2 Do one of the following e On the Data menu click Register Editor e Press CTRL R e Right click the PCFL block then select Register Editor The PCFL Editor dialog box appears The title bar displays the name of the PCFL sub BEEReMnn function you are editing This diagram shows A the subfunction appears in the Network Editor This table dis plays the regis ters used by the subfunction and the type of infor mation they hold Description Raw Input 40001 00010001 11011010 Status Output 40003 00000000 00000000 Status Input 40004 00001010 00000000 High Engineering Range 40005 3000 Low Engineering Range 40007 2500 Manual Input 40009 30 Auto Input 40011 100 Scaled Engineering Output 40013 25 Input Flags Dutput Flags 40013 Close Edit Doc Radix Inst Help Help 244 Introduction to the PCFL editor Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Editing PCFL regi
346. rsor position If any text was selected it will be overwritten 238 Mathematical functions in equation networks Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks Setting up an enable contact An Equation Network s enable contact when set activates the Equation Network If an enable contact passes current the Equation Network will be solved You change settings for the enable contact in the Enable Editor display gt To select a type for the enable contact e Select the symbol of the enable contact that corresponds with your chosen type An enable contact can be a normally open contact f normally closed contact f horizontal short horizontal open ora gt To select a register address for the enable contact Inthe Enable Contact address field type the direct address in X Y numeric format or symbolic address for the enable contact coil This field is only available if the enable contact type is a normally open or normally closed contact Or Insert an address into the Enable Contact address field from the Symbols list panel Used Register Address table or the Descriptor Summary Setting up an enable contact 239 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Equations displayed within the Network Editor When you scroll to an Equation Network from the main Network Editor the display will show the text of the equation you created along with any input or output coils There are several things to keep in mind w
347. rt Export Utilities x Import Filename C PROWORX NXT NEWDATA FIL Export Descriptor Order Sequential Slow C Spreadsheet _DIF file Random Fast Symbol FIS file Export Extended Memory Doc Start Cancel Browse Help 2 Select Export 3 Type the path and file name of the file to export your database to or click Browse 4 Click the File Type to create 5 Ifyou are exporting to a ProWORX ASCII file choose how the file data will be written e Sequential writes are slower but the file may be less confusing to edit as NxT sorts the information before exporting it e Random writes are considerably faster but may be confusing to edit as the information is exported in whatever order NxT finds it 6 Click Start NxT tells you the status of the export Delete documentation 225 9 Using Equation Networks In this chapter Introduction to Equation Networks 228 Equation format 231 Using register address lists 238 Setting up an enable contact 239 Equations displayed within the Network Editor 240 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Introduction to Equation Networks An Equation Network provides an easy way to program complex math functions with values stored in register locations Equations in an Equation Network are presented in a regular left to right format technically known as infix notation You program Equation Networks and set its enable contact and o
348. ruction 1 Follow steps 1 3 for editing an instruction 2 For the bottom node for EMTH MATH and DMTH click the arrow to the right of the entry field A list of all valid subfunctions appears The PCFL instruction has its subfunctions on the top node of the instruction 3 Select a subfunction then click OK Editing instructions in logic 131 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Moving instructions You can move an instruction from one area in the network to another area by holding the ALT key down and dragging the instruction to its new destination When you select the instruction while pressing ALT your cursor changes to the instruction s icon While pressing ALT move the cursor to the cell in logic where you want to place the instruction then release the mouse button You can also cut copy and paste an instruction or a block of instructions by selecting it and clicking the Cut Copy or Paste command from the Edit menu or clicking W ES or in the toolbar Deleting instructions To delete an instruction or block of cells from logic simply select it and press the DELETE key Configuring mnemonics for instructions In NxT all instruction mnemonics are configurable so you can use mnemonics you are already familiar with gt To edit a mnemonic 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Mnemonics The Configurable Mnemonics window appears When you select a mnemonic a short descri
349. s segments networks labels and subroutines as well as all of your hardware including I O points racks power supplies drops and more These descriptions can be viewed while programming logic or configuring I O and are also included in printed output of the various parts of your control system There are four components to documentation in ProWORX NxT Documentation Window Used to edit short comments long comments and descriptors from within the Network Editor Documentation Summary Used to review symbols and descriptors as well as search for a specific documentation record Documentation Editor Used to edit all documentation components including page titles and long comment placement on printouts Documentation Utilities Used to move copy and delete some or all documentation for a selected range of references as well as clean up unused documentation records The types of documentation available are Symbols A maximum of 32 characters long They are text representations of numerical addresses Symbols are displayed in upper case and can begin with any character other than a number between 0 and 9 Descriptors Short descriptions of a reference You can have five to nine rows of 9 12 or 15 characters each Short Comments More detailed descriptions of the reference A Short Comment is four lines long and each line contains up to 48 characters Page Titles A single 64 character line Only specific types of refere
350. s displayed in the Status box NxT now shows the Profibus configuration extension in the Configuration Extensions area Editing your Profibus configuration To edit your Profibus configuration e Without changing your controller configuration start again at Step 3 e After changing your controller configuration start again at Step 2 88 Profibus extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Peer Cop extension The Peer Cop extension provides data transfer between two or more controllers on a peer to peer network as well as linking multiple networks using the S985 communication card Peer Cop configures data blocks to be continuously transferred once per scan between nodes on a Modbus Plus network Data can be broadcast to all nodes on a single link Global I O or between specific Modbus Plus nodes on a link Specific I O A maximum of 32 data registers or 512 i e 32 16 I O points can be transferred to or read from a controller at a time Peer Cop is supported by the A145 and all E Series and Quantum controllers Up to 3 Links of the Peer Cop can be configured and edited Adding links in the Peer Cop extension The Peer Cop extension can be configured for up to 3 links When you add a link you will have access to the 64 possible devices on another peer to peer network e Link 1 is the internal link all devices on the local Modbus Plus network can be accessed from Link 1 Links 2 and 3 are remote links through 5985 cards
351. s and generate reports from fxManager For more information see fxManager s main help 388 Audit Trail The ProWORX NxT audit type that occurred The date the edit session occurred The type of changes Aa made to the project Appendix G NxT and fxManager The Audit Trail dialog box automatically appears when you go Offline Online or shut down NxT It displays the audit information that occurred during the last edit session in a specific project Audit Trail Ea Property Offline dit Date 03 31 98 eet Administrator Project passenger door conveyor Edits The name of the user who made the changes M Logic T Data The project that was edited T Documentation F Asc T Configuration I Configuration Extension 18 T Traffic Cop I Extended Memory Type a description of the changes you made to Comment the project n the Message field you can enter details of your changes Carce _ The information you add in the comments section is logged to the Audit Trail database file and can be used later in a generated report Audit Trail 389 ProWORX NxT User s Guide ProWORX NxT Audit Trail settings Below are the ProWORX NxT actions you can record in an Audit Trail Set conditions to True to log a record Property Description OfflineEdit Logs a record when changes are made to a project during an Offline session and specifies the type of change made in the Event Description
352. s installed you can add ProWORX NxT projects to the fxManager Server to handle and control To work on these projects an administrator adds a group s to the project then assigns users and access permissions to the group s For more information on security see Access Control on page 386 LS ProWORX NxT databases are referred to as projects in fxManager Users can then access projects from fxManager or the Project Manager The Project Manager can be opened from the Title Screen Online Editor or Offline Editor To work on a project that s stored on the fxManager Server you first need to log on to the Server then check out the project and open it The project can be opened either in the Online or Offline Editor depending on the current mode you re working in For more information on working with the Project Manager see About the Project Manager on page 393 384 How NxT works with fxManager Appendix G NxT and fxManager About fxManager fxManager is organized into the following sections The NxT projects that are stored on the Server you re logged on to are listed in this part of fxManager From here you can assign a group s to a project then add users and grant permissions to the group ae The Projects section organizes the NxT projects stored on your local computer and on the fxManager Server This is also where you assign who has access to each project The Access Control is
353. s the frequency of segment execution and order of I O operations Each segment controls two I O channels in a 584 or 984 5901 configuration or one drop ina 984 5908 configuration Serial Port A 9 or 25 pin port used for serial communications for example Modbus Short Comment Field One of up to four lines of text which comprise a comment about an address within a PLC network logic program Typically printed beside output instructions or below the network in the network listing Short Comment Up to four lines of text which comprise a comment about an address within a PLC ladder logic program Typically printed beside output instructions in the ladder listing Slave A networked device controlled by another device Slave devices to not initiate data transactions Compare to master Slot The position of an I O module in a rack 424 Glossary of Terms Glossary State Flow In logic an instruction is highlighted if it solves true instead of only when it passes power compare to Power Flow Stop Bits Bits used to indicate the end of transmission of a data item or frame Subdirectory A directory within a directory Sweep For a PLC one cycle of scanning inputs solving logic and writing outputs TCP IP A communication protocol for computers connected through an Ethernet or Token Ring network Text A collection of ASCII characters Timeout If communications fail the program waits the specified
354. s without individual confirmation e Step Confirms every change Automatic coil table rebuild e When selected the coils are updated in the Address Used Table after the global replace is complete and a check for duplicate coils is performed e When cleared the Address Used Table is not updated and no search for duplicate coils is performed Global register replace offline only 163 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Symbolic addressing Symbolic addressing equates a numeric address with text This lets you use more meaningful symbols e g push_btn in place of numerical addresses Before working with symbolic addressing be sure that the Symbols check box in the Preferences window is selected gt To display the Symbol Summary panel In the Network Editor on the View menu click Symbol List or click Symb in the toolbar gt To add a symbol to the Symbol Summary panel 1 In the Network Editor double click the Symbol Summary panel or On the Display menu click Documentation Editor The Documentation Editor appears In the Navigate By area select Reference then type the address to be associated with this symbol You can either type the address in manually or use the arrow keys to scroll through the address list In Symbol type the new symbol text Click OK The symbol and its associated address are added to the Symbol summary panel sorted alphabetically gt To adda symbol using the Instruction Edit win
355. ser s Guide Network printing options Use this option to set how networks of ladder logic are printed gt To select the networks to print 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears 2 Click Networks The Networks dialog box appears Networks a E Network Listing Options Networks IIESTSS X Start Doc at Net 0001 One Net Per Page Symbols Cross Refs Back Refs Print Format 15 char desc 15 char desc Paper too narrow or font 15 char desc too large Descriptors will d 15 char desc be truncated 15 char desc sasas Oxxxx NOTES BELOW NETWORK OK Toggle All Cancel Help 3 Click an option to select or clear it As you select different parameters the print format area changes to show your new formatting LE Click Toggle All to select or clear all options e Type a range of networks to print The maximum range is the number of networks that have been programmed If you enter a value higher than that or that is nonsensical such as 1 123 the entry appears as 1 Max Any entry that contains spaces or is empty is set to None e Select the network number where you want to start printing documentation e Print Symbols Cross References Cross Refs and or Back References Back Refs for your logic 264 Network printing options Chapter 11 Printing Documentation tables The Documentation Tables consist of al
356. ses they must be enclosed in brackets RELOP can be any relational operator such as gt greater than or lt gt not equal to When solving a conditional expression the computer first compares EXPR1 and EXPR2 based on the relational operator If the comparison is true the value of the conditional expression is the result of EXPR3 If the comparison is false the value of the conditional expression is EXPR4 So It is especially good programming practice to enclose all expressions within a H conditional expression in parentheses even when they re not actually needed This makes the equation easier to read and ensures that operations are solved in the correct order 236 Mathematical operations in equation networks Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks Mathematical functions in equation networks The following table lists the pre defined math functions you can include in your equation Each of these functions takes one argument enclosed in brackets following the function name The argument can be any valid value or expression For example COS 35 40001 returns the cosine of 35 plus the number stored at address 40001 In this table X refers to a function s argument as in COS X ABS X Absolute value of X i e negative numbers become positive ARCCOS X Arc cosine of X radians ARCSIN X Arc sine of X radians ARCTAN X Arc tangent of X radians COS X
357. sfer speed of the controller s Modbus port in bits per second The PC and controller must be set to the same baud rate Default is 9600 Head Quantum controllers only sets the slot number on the local drop backplane where the CPU resides Dev Addr Assigns the Modbus address for the port Default is 1 Controller configuration Ports tab 61 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Parameter Description Delay Sets the amount of time in tens of milliseconds the controller waits after receiving a message before sending an acknowledgment Default is 1 10 max is 20 200 Modbus Port 2 Momentum M1 controllers only Sets the port type of Type Modbus Port 2 to either RS232 or RS485 3 When you are finished do one of the following e Press ESC The lists for each parameter disappear e Click another port The first port s lists disappear e Click another Controller Configuration tab The Ports tab closes e Click OK The Controller Configuration window closes gt To change Micro port assignments for 311 411 512 or 612 controllers e Select port settings from the Micro Port Assignments drop down list The assignments in the list are combinations of the controller s COM1 COM2 and I O Expansion Link port The assignments available depend on which Micro I O Mode you set in the Edit Details section of the Controller tab in the Controller Configuration window For more information see Editing a control
358. sh RAM executive operation from the beginning Stopping the controller This function stops a controller from solving logic or performing I O functions The controller remains in the ready state Stopping a controller may have a major impact on your process Always consider fully the possible consequences of stopping a controller that is is it performing a critical operation before proceeding gt To stop a controller 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Start Stop If you re in a procedure which requires the controller to be stopped you may be prompted with a dialog box to stop the controller In this case you can select Stop from the dialog box 2 Click Stop NxT displays a Controller Stopped prompt to tell you the operation was successful Click OK to clear the prompt If the operation is unsuccessful an error message displays the problem 110 Stopping the controller Chapter 5 Working with Controllers Starting the controller gt To start the controller 1 From the ProWORX NxT Title Screen or the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Start Stop Optional If you are using a 984 controller select whether to start in Optimized Mode In the optimized mode the ability to edit or show power flow is disabled You may have to stop the controller to make logic changes The 685E and 785E controllers have a 2k buffer allowing editing during op
359. show the Long Comment dialog box To find the next unused Long Comment number click Next Available Coil 00033 in the 685 sets the model in a manual control mode Station number 1 and conveyor belt 2 can be controlled manually from QuickPanel 7 216 Using the Documentation editor Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC 2 Enter your changes references associated with this Long Comment Deleting the text of the comment b If you are deleting a Long Comment be aware that there may be other may also affect other references As an alternative you can set the Long Comment number to zero This breaks the association of the current reference with the Long Comment while leaving the text of the comment intact Click OK The edit box is updated to the next blank Long Comment and the text in the Long Comment dialog box is cleared Select where in the Lister printout the Long Comments are to appear e Leading The comment printed before the network Trailing The comment printed after the network Moving copying and deleting multiple records All documentation for a single reference is stored in a database record There are four operations you can perform on a record Copy Record Copies all documentation except the Symbol and MMI fields Cut Record Copies all documentation except the Symbol and MMI fields and deletes the record Paste Record Pastes all documentation fields from the most recent Copy Recor
360. slots gt To move a card from one slot to another Drag the card from its current slot to the destination slot gt Toedita slot 1 Selecting a card displays the power supply loading and mechanical keying for the card Select a card from the drop down list then click OK From the Traffic Cop display select a slot and click Edit or double click the slot The Slot Edit window appear Slot Edit Drop 1 Rack 1 Slot 2 Card OK eee B853 016 115 YAC 125 VDC xl IN 10017 10032 Cancel Yoltage Keying Card 5 43 5 e Current mA gt 40 1 15 8 Help Select the card to insert in the slot selected in the Traffic Cop window from the drop down list Selecting a card displays the power supply loading and mechanical keying for the card In the address field In or Out type the starting address for the address range assigned to this card then click OK 186 800 Series Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop For example suppose you are configuring a B828 card with 16 outputs The address field will be entitled Out and you must type the initial address of a 16 address table 0xxxxx for this card The final address in the table is automatically displayed The table must begin on a word boundary If you type a starting address that is LE not on a word boundary 16 1 NxT automatically adjusts the address down to the nearest boundary The add
361. splay Traffic Cop Used is selected the table displays information on used or unused addresses in the Traffic Cop Below are the marks for each address Mark Meaning x Address appears in logic u Address appears in logic as an output coil Address does not appear in logic X Address appears in the traffic cop and in logic U Address appears in the traffic cop and in logic as an output coil t Address appears in the traffic cop but not in logic When Display Peer Cop Used is selected you can check for the currently used and discrete addresses in the Peer Cop Below are the marks for each address Mark Meaning p Address appears only in the Peer Cop C Address appears in the Peer Cop in logic and as an output coil P Address appears in the Peer Cop and in logic M Address appears in three or more different locations T Address appears in the Traffic Cop and in Logic 158 Other Network Editor functions Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To type an address into the assembly register 1 From the Network Editor on the Display menu click Used Table The Address Used table appears Display Traffic Cop Used tec e Mont Display Peer Cop Used pafa aea eT er eT TTT Ts 2 2 3 4 s 7 e s o i 2 3 4 s e 7 s aye a 2 3 4 s e 7 s se i 2 3 s s e 7 e syo i 2 3 4 s e 7fel slo ja 69008 juuu 60050 ju u 00100 90150 00200 u 60258 juu u 06300 u uu 00350
362. sses You can have a total of 200 parameters in your macro database 50 for each address type 308 Editing a macro Chapter 14 Working with Macros Adding and removing macros from your logic database You insert macros into your logic network while working in the Network Editor You can only insert macros while working offline gt To insert a macro into a database 1 On the Edit menu click Insert then click Macro 2 Select the name of the macro you want to insert The Macro Parameters dialog box appears D TESTING NXTDB MACRO1 Parameters x Type the register address you want mapped to each macro parameter This column lists the sym bolic name if any assigned Parameter Symbol Name Parameter Address to the macro parameter from the Macro Editor Click to insert the macro into your database When the macro is inserted all oc currences of each parameter 3 4 Insert Cancel are replaced with its 3 For each macro parameter in the Parameter Symbol Name column type a Modicon address in the Address column You can enter the same address for more than one parameter if needed 4 When all the parameters have been mapped to Modicon addresses click Insert ProWORX NxT checks each address to ensure it s valid for the macro parameter s address type and range If invalid addresses are found you are returned to the Macro Parameters dialog box Otherwise the macro s logic is inserted into your logic da
363. ssor Head 2 Head 3 ee Head 6 Power Do 3 MB address 64 Supply e CPU Head 6 Modbus Plus Coaxial Drop 1 o mn Rack Racka n 800 Series RIO s TT Rack Drop 2 Head 3 Drop 1 MB address 1 Quantum RIO Head 2 Only 1 rack allowed fac lt MB address 2 RIO RIO Processor Drop 2 31 drops maximum Head 2 Quantum DIO MB add 30 Drop 3 rk api 1 rack drop permitted Head 2 MB address 4 Drop 4 x gt Head 2 DIO 63 drops maximum gt To configure the Quantum Series Traffic Cop 1 Inthe Traffic Cop tree control select the Quantum Series drop to edit DIO drops connected to a DIO processor occupying Head 2 slot 2 of the local Quantum backplane All of those drops belong to Head 2 The DIO drop connected to the CPU which is in the sixth slot of the 6 slot back plane is designated as Drop 64 Head 6 NxT displays the Edit Drop display in the right side of the window 2 In Hold Up Time type the amount of time in seconds for this 1 O drop to scan its I O if communication from the 984 is lost 3 In ASCII Port type the ASCII Port used for ASCII messaging on this drop If the racks haven t yet been configured for the drop click Configure and select an interface then click OK to continue 190 Quantum Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop 3xxxx Status Register When using the Quantum Series Traffic Cop you can set a 3xxxx Status Register for your drop gt To set the 3xxxx St
364. sters The PCFL Editor dialog box contains a table showing a PCFL function s register addresses along with their labels and current values A register s current value is displayed in an appropriate radix the base of anumber system used by ProWORX NxT to refer to a value s data type The radix of each data item can be changed to allow display in a variety of number formats Depending on the specific PCFL instruction up to three buttons might also appear to the left of the register table e Input Flags Click to view and edit a PCFL instruction block s input flags Output Flags Click to view a PCFL instruction block s output flags e Eqn Edit Click to edit the equation in a PCFL Equation instruction block These functions are covered further later in this chapter gt Tochange the displayed data type of a PCFL register 1 In the table click the Description Address Symbol or Data of the register you want to reformat The selected register s Address Symbol and the first line of its Descriptor if any appear at the bottom of the register table 2 Click Radix 3 Select the desired radix from the Radix Options box and click OK gt To edit the value of a register 1 In the table click the Description Address Symbol or Data of the register you want to change The selected register s Address Symbol and the first line of its descriptor if any appear at the bottom of the register table 2 Click Edit
365. stings 214 Using the Documentation editor Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC gt Todisplay the Doc Editor you toggle between navigating by Ref erence in sequen tial order or by Symbol in alpha betical order Navigate By wen number 1 and conveyor belt 2 can be controlled manually From the Network Editor on the Display menu click Documentation Editor or click from the tool bar The Documentation Editor window appears Documentation Editor 10001 x Descriptor Symbol PELT_2 _HIGH _ MMI Short Comment Conveyor belt number 2 forward motor control This conveyor transfers parts to and from load station number 1 Motor forward control moves parts to the roll and punch station belt Page Title Conveyor Belt 2 Control and Station 1 Load Unload Control Long Comment 3 Next Available Leading Trailing Expand Coil 99033 in the 685 sets the model in a manual control mode X Copy Record Cut Record Paste Record Delete Record Add Bits Help Navigate By Reference Symbol Cancel Summary Search The Entry field control lets you type a These buttons display reference or symbol NxT automatically records relative to the takes you to the selected record current record When you click a or type a reference or symbol to move to a new record changes made in the previous record are automatically saved gt Togo t
366. stored in register address 40001 as a 16 bit signed integer Everything to the right of the assignment operator also constitutes an expression An expression is any part of an equation that can be evaluated to a single value This can be a single constant or register address or a complete mathematical operation For example 35 is an expression as are LOG 10 and 40002U COS 40003UL Complex expressions can contain other expressions within them asin 3 40002U COS 40003UL For the most part any operator or function can be performed on any expression no matter how complex Se It is good programming practice to enclose all expressions in parentheses even a when they re not actually needed This makes the equation easier to read and ensures that operations in an equation are solved in the correct order 232 Equation values and data types Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks Exponential notation Floating point numbers are normally specified in exponential notation as in 1 35E 4 This represents 1 35 times 10 to the 4th power or 1 35 times 0 0001 Thus we would shift the decimal place four places to the left to get 0 000135 The 4 part is called the exponent note the preceding E and can be a positive or negative number In the Equation Network Editor you must also indicate e That these numbers are constants and e Their data types For example integers or floating point numbers The
367. t VARA variable A n a VARB variable B n a VARC variable C n a VARD variable D n a About Postfix notation Postfix notation differs from regular infix notation in that the operator is placed after the operands The operator is a symbol indicating a specific mathematical operation multiplication division and so on The operands are the elements that the operator acts on the actual values to be added or multiplied The equations you re probably familiar with are written in infix notation When using infix notation the operator is placed between the two operands on which it works For example suppose you want to multiply the numbers 24 and 11 In the two notations this would look like 24 11 in infix notation 24 11 in postfix notation 254 Editing the PCFL equation block Chapter 10 Using the PCFL Editor Postfix equations are evaluated using a stack The computer reads the equation from left to right in the PCFL instruction block from lower numbered registers to higher numbered registers When it reaches a value it adds the value to the top of the stack When it reaches an operator it removes the top one or two items from the stack applies the operator to those items and adds the result to the top of the stack In the following example the underlined portion in the Equation column indicates the section of the equation being evaluated Equation Stack Comments 4 21 33 Stack is
368. t Also changes made to a controller s logic as you work online do not appear in its database until they are read into it e For more information see Reading from a controller on page 102 You do not have to select a device to work in the Offline Editor because the controller s information is already stored in its database You need to attach to a controller only when you want to read its ladder logic write changes to it monitor its health or compare its logic to a database If your computer connects to your network through a Dial Up or Dial Chat modem and you do not have an active connection NxT asks you for a phone number to dial when you select a device If your computer has a direct connection to your network the Select Device dialog box appears immediately Ensure your communications setup is configured correctly before trying to select a device For more information see Setting up communications for your PC on page 35 44 Selecting a device on the network Chapter 3 Connecting to a Controller gt To select a device with a direct connection to a controller or network 1 Do one of the following e From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen on the Controller menu click Select Device e From the Network Editor on the Controller menu click Change Device NxT displays the Select Device window This title and some options change depending on your Click to see which devices are cur
369. t Parameters window If your PC is not connected to a BM85 or is connected incorrectly press ESC to return to the Network Editor 4 Click Routing The BM85 Address Routing Map window appears The BM85 reroutes messag es addressed to the Modbus Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4 Address to the associated Addr Routing Addr Routing Addr Routing Addr Routing Modbus Plus device E E Help You can see the first 18 routing paths of the 64 available for each Modbus port Modbus Modbus Plus Address Device 14 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 16 16 16 0 0 0 0 rae eam 344 Editing a BM85 s address routing map Chapter 17 Configuring a BM85 The Edit Address Routing dialog box appears when you do one of the following e Select a routing path to delete then click Delete e Select a routing path to edit then click Edit e Double click a routing path to edit Port 1 Table Index 1 Address fo Routing Path 1 0 0 0 0 OK Cancel In the Address field type the reference Modbus address In the Routing Path field type the Modbus Plus address to which the message will be rerouted then click OK The Edit Address Routing dialog box closes Select another address to edit then click OK You re returned to the BM85 Port Parameters dialog box When you are satisfied with your changes click OK It may take ProWORX NxT a few moments to configure the BM85 s
370. t radix field For example don t type a decimal value in the AR then drag it to the hexadecimal field Doing so will enter the value as hex not decimal gt To edit documentation for registers 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Register Editor The Register Editor dialog box appears Select which register type 8xxxx 4xxxx to display Select the register for the documentation you want to edit Click Doc The Documentation Editor dialog box appears ae SN Type your documentation 154 Generic Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor To display a specific register 1 From the Register Editor dialog box click Register then click Goto The Goto Register window appears 2 Type the register 0001 maximum you want to display 3 Click OK NxT displays the register To search for a register value 1 From the Register Editor dialog box click Register then click Search The Search for Data window appears 2 Type the five digit decimal value to search for 3 Click OK NxT searches down from the currently selected register for the data value 4 To search for the next occurrence of the value press F3 To print a screen of register contents e From the Register Editor dialog box click Print The addresses symbols and data currently displayed on the screen are sent to the default printer Printer settings can be changed with the Printer Setup dialog box in the Lister dialog box
371. t to make changes in logic to a single macro insertion without changing the original macro database In this case you ll have to unlink that macro insertion Unlinking a macro removes its connection to the original macro database the logic in that macro insertion becomes part of the regular main database logic Once a macro insertion has been unlinked it cannot be re linked Changes made to the macro database will no longer be detected by the Network Editor gt To update a macro in a database 1 While in the Network Editor move the cursor onto a macro that needs to be updated The Macro Overview screen appears with a status that reads Macro Has Changed If the macro status reads Rec xxx where xxx is a series of numbers then you don t need to update it From the Edit menu select Update Macro The macro s logic is reinserted into the logic network and the status changes to Rec xxx Making changes in macros 311 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To unlink a macro from a database A Once you ve unlinked a macro s you can t relink it 1 While in the Network Editor move the cursor onto the macro you want to unlink The Macro Overview screen appears 2 From the Edit menu select Unlink Macro A confirmation dialog box will appear 3 Click Yes The macro is unlinked The Macro Overview display disappears and you are returned to the Network Editor Unlinking a macro removes all co
372. ta Watch Window configuration addresses entered clamp settings etc A The window called Track is updated automatically by NxT Avoid defining data in the Track window because NxT will overwrite your edits as soon as the cursor is placed on a new cell in logic To create a new Data Watch Window file 1 From the Data Watch Window click File then click New 2 Type a path and file name with a DWW extension then click OK To open an existing Data Watch Window file 1 From the Data Watch Window click File then click Open 2 Select a file to open then click OK To save a Data Watch Window file 1 From the Data Watch Window any view click File then click Save 2 Type a path and file name with a DWW extension then click OK To save a file to a different path or with a new name 1 From the Data Watch Window any view click File then click Save As 2 Type a path and file name with a DWW extension then click OK 282 Changing the radix Chapter 12 Using the Data Watch Window gt Toclose a child window e Select the window to close then click File then click Close gt Toexit the Data Watch Window application e From the Data Watch window any view File then click Exit Exporting a DWW file to a DIF file You can convert a Data Watch Window log file DWW into a Data Interchange Format DIF file for importing into a third party spreadsheet or database application gt To
373. ta Watch view Using the Data Logger view Using the Trend view Using the Spreadsheet view Using the Graphical view Working with PID PID2 blocks PID and PID2 blocks an Overview The PID tuner face plate display Adjusting a PID s set point Tracking PID values in the Data Watch Window PID Summary display PID View Networks display Table of Contents 269 270 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 276 277 277 278 279 279 280 281 281 282 282 283 284 285 286 286 287 287 288 290 292 293 297 298 300 301 301 302 303 ProWORX WNxT User s Guide 14 15 16 17 Working with Macros Introduction to macros Editing a macro Using macro parameters Adding and removing macros from your logic database The Network Editor s macro overview display Making changes in macros Automating macro insertions with Codegen Appending a macro and database CGF batch file descriptions Monitoring your Hardware Monitoring the health of your hardware Monitoring the health of one device Checking the health of all controllers on a network Viewing a controller s health log Using the Compare Function Using the compare function Using the on demand compare function Scheduling comparisons to repeat automatically Using the Compare Summary window Configuring a BM85 Configuring a BM85 Bridge multiplexer Reading or loading a BM85 configuration Configuring the Modbus ports of a BM85 Editing a BM85 s address routing m
374. tabase and you are taken to the Macro Overview screen ER You can automate macro insertions with CODEGEN a batch file utility included H with ProWORX NxT For more information see Automating macro insertions with Codegen on page 313 Adding and removing macros from your logic database 309 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To remove a macro from a database 1 While in the Network Editor move the cursor onto the macro you wish to delete The Macro Overview screen appears 2 On the Edit menu click Delete then click Macro A confirmation dialog box will appear 3 Click Yes and the macro will be deleted from the logic database Deleting a macro from a database doesn t erase the macro file from your hard drive it just removes an inserted macro s logic from your main logic database To remove a macro completely from your hard drive first remove it from the database as described above then delete its associated files with Windows Explorer or some other file manager The Network Editor s macro overview display The Macro Overview display appears in the main Network Editor when you move the cursor onto an inserted macro It also appears just after inserting a macro into a database This display gives the macro s file name description a very long description as entered from the documentation editor status and a list of its parameters and the Modicon addresses or symbols to which they are mapped
375. tch Panel All other addresses are ignored To make changes to a discrete address from the Data Watch Panel 1 Click the discrete address you want to change in the Data Watch Panel Three buttons appear at the bottom of the panel Force On Force Off and Enable You can also right click on a discrete address and select Force On or Force Off from shortcut menu This shortcut menu is available with or without a database open 2 Make the changes you want Force On Click to force the discrete state to on This disables the address e Force Off Click to force the discrete state to off This also disables the address e Enable Click to re enable the address To make changes to an analog address from the Data Watch Panel 1 Click the analog address you want to change in the Data Watch Panel Two buttons appear at the bottom of the panel Edit and Radix 2 To edit the value stored at the address click Edit To edit the radix of the address value click Radix Addresses can be viewed as Decimal Hexadecimal Binary ASCII Floating Point Long Integer 32 bits Signed Integer and BCD Network editor panel descriptions 123 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Traffic Cop Display panel The Traffic Cop display enables you to place addresses from the I O cards in the Traffic Cop into your network logic You can browse through the cards in your Traffic Cop 800 A120 or Quantum series gt To display the Traffic Cop panel
376. ted to your computer e None default setting for direct Modbus connections between the PC and controller without a modem This setting disables the other modem options e Dial Up For standard modems which do not require a password If you are unsure try this setting first When you select a device NxT asks you for a number to dial e Dial Chat For password protected modems After the connection is established a terminal window opens so you can enter text When you select a device NxT asks you fora number to dial e Line J478 For modems with a dedicated telephone line to the controller You do not have to type a number to dial This setting disables the other modem options LineRTS For radio or microwave modems with a dedicated link to the controller You don t have to type a number to dial This setting disables the other modem options e Initialization Some modems require special initialization commands such as ATZ before they can be used Type a sequence of Hayes modem commands in this field for NxT to send to your modem Check your modem s manual for the commands to turn off error correction compression and software flow control and turn on verbal word results e Dial Command Type ATDT for tone dialing default or ATD for pulse dialing This prefix is sent to the modem along with the phone number you type in the Select Device dialog To instruct the modem to pause for half a second type a comma e Com
377. terrupt level is Enabled The controller responds to any messages sent on that interrupt e Disabled The controller ignores them 9 Click OK Profibus extension The Profibus configuration extension allows you to communicate with a Profibus network In order to successfully install and configure the Profibus configuration extension you will have to use a total of three separate utilities e The NxT Profibus utility e Softing s PROFI KON software included with the Profibus hardware e Modicon s SPU931 utility also included with the Profibus hardware PROFI KON and SPU931 are not ProWORX NxT products While every effort LE has been made to ensure the accuracy of these instructions users of PROFI KON and SPU931 do so at their own risk Installing the Profibus configuration extension Step 1 Ensure your database is configured properly for your Quantum controller by checking e Your controller has Revision 2 xx or later executive Flash RAM Enough controller memory is set aside for configuration extensions If you do not have enough configuration extension memory available you will receive an error when you transfer your Profibus configuration into your NxT database Step 5 e Your Profibus DP or Profibus FMS card is configured in the Traffic Cop Profibus extension 85 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Step 2 Start the NxT Profibus Utility and create a Profibus Station from your NxT database s MDF f
378. that require a destination Browse Browse Select a new database for the destination Click to convert E he dalabace s am a 2 Select one of the following e Update an old ProWORxX database to NxT e Convert a Modsoft database to NxT e Convert an Updoc database to NxT e Convert an NxT database to ProWORX e Convert an NxT database to a macro 3 Type the path and file name of the source database or click Browse to navigate to it 4 Ifthe conversion requires a destination type the path and file name of the destination or click Browse to navigate to it 5 Click Start The database or macro is converted 18 Converting an older ProWORX database Chapter 2 Working with a Database Editing the setup of a database At times you may need to change the setup of an existing database because of a change in the address of the database s controller for example or to add additional descriptor fields You can easily modify the summary controller and descriptor field information of a database gt Toedit the setup of a database 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Database Setup The Database Setup dialog box appears Description ProW ORX NxT Sample Database Page Header Sample Database Summary information Project Client Author Controller Address 45 Descriptor Field Width 15 M 0001
379. the Windows Run command If an error occurs while inserting a macro Codegen skips that macro and jumps to the next macro entry The information about what it did is saved to the file codegen log and can be viewed with the Log File Viewer a text editor like Microsoft s Notepad gt To create a CGF file for Codegen 1 Click Start point to Programs then select ProWORX and click J Codegen Codegen appears Select an existing CGF ZE ProWORX Macro Processing Utility Mel E3 file or create a new one Macro Configuration File CGF Browse i ProWORX Destination Database Browse Select a destination data CGF Script Editor base Click Start to process the selected CGF file and database Click Save CGF to save nl the current CGF data to Start Save CGF View Log Close Help Automating macro insertions with Codegen 313 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 2 Inthe Macro Configuration File CFG field type the path and the name of the macro or click Browse to navigate to it 3 Inthe ProWORX Destination Database type the path and file name of the database or click Browse to navigate to it 4 Inthe CGF Script Editor type your macro using the following format lt Mode gt MacroName PathToMacro Paramet rName Address Param rName Address Macro ame PathToMacro Param Paramet rName Address rName Address 5 Click Start The CGF file and database a
380. the card Select the slot and click Edit or double click the slot NxT displays the Edit dialog box with the drop rack and slot shown in the title bar In Input type the starting register reference number In Output type the starting register reference number Click the proper Data Type binary or BCD Click OK 198 900 Series Traffic Cop Chapter 7 Using the Traffic Cop A120 Series Traffic Cop This Traffic Cop Series is used with A series compact and new Micro series controller The Slot Edit function for the A120 Series Traffic Cop allows you to edit a configured card or type a new card into a slot gt To edit the card 1 Click the 4 to the right of the card entry box A list of valid cards for the drop type you are using appears Select a card from the drop down list In Input or Output type the starting address of the address table associated with the I O points on this card Momentum M1 I O systems Momentum I O systems differ from those of other Modicon controllers A Momentum I O system grows froma single Momentum I O base unit An M1 Processor Adapter for example a controller is mounted on a Momentum I O base If a Momentum Option Adapter is used it is mounted between the Processor Adapter and the I O base I lt wE a a Option Adapter Processor Adapter optional controller Momentum I O base card Option Adapters add a time of day clock and one or two additional Modbus ports
381. the editor s icon A second minimized program appears in the Program Manager when you e Open a database in the Offline Editor in which case the minimized program is called NxT Startup e Connect to a controller in the Online Editor in which case the minimized program is called NxTOn Startup NxT requires the Graphics app 39 This icon shows the Offline Editor Server Do not force it to close vi sal dll 2 t you minimize either NxT editor manually double click its icon to maximize Graphics NxT Startup ProwWOR NxT restore the window Server The Offline and Online editors require their respective Startup programs Do not force either minimized program to close as NxT requires them to operate They close automatically when you exit NxT Starting ProoWORX NxT 5 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 x Once ProWORX NxT is installed start the application in one of these ways e Click Start then Programs Select the folder where you installed NxT ProWORX by default then select the editor you want Click to see JIC and Process drawings if you installed them B DXF Viewer Click to convert NxT from a demo to a full version iS Accessories iS StartUp r MS DOS Prompt id Product Authorization QJ Windows Explorer GR ProwORX NT gi ProwORX NT Online FS Programs aoe Click to launch NxT Documents j Offline E Settings gt 2 Eind
382. then displays meter2 bmp when the data value is 2 and so on Text enabled Below are descriptions of the text properties Text box Type the text you want to appear Alignment Select where you want the text to appear in the cell Background Click to select the background color of the text Foreground Click to select the color of the text Watch enabled Below are descriptions of the data value properties Address Type the Modicon address of the value you want to monitor Alignment Select where you want the value to appear in the cell Background Click to select the background color of the text Foreground Click to select the color of the text Window setup Click Background to change the color of the entire window background Using the Graphical view 295 13 Working with PID PID2 blocks In this chapter PID and PID2 blocks an Overview 298 The PID tuner face plate display 300 Adjusting a PID s set point 301 Tracking PID values in the Data Watch Window 301 PID Summary display 302 PID View Networks display 303 ProWORX NxT User s Guide PID and PID2 blocks an Overview PID and PID2 blocks are software programming blocks that allow a process to be controlled with no changes or additions to hardware PID stands for Proportional Integral Derivative While the PID2 is a more advanced version of the PID both operate in the same manner Unless indicated operations given in this chapter t
383. timized mode Once this buffer is full no further changes can be made until the controller stops Click Start NxT displays a Controller Running prompt to tell you the operation was successful Click OK to clear the prompt If the operation is unsuccessful an error message displays the problem Starting the controller 111 6 Using the Network Editor In this chapter Using the Network Editor 114 Customizing the network display 117 Network editor panel descriptions 120 Power and Power State flow toggle Online only 125 Setting the update rate online only 125 Editing instructions in logic 127 Using the Segment Scheduler 134 Moving networks insegments 136 Editing register contents 137 User Configurable Register editor 137 Extended Memory Register editor 148 Generic Register editor 152 Other Network Editor functions 158 Checking for used addresses 158 Global register replace offline only 161 Symbolic addressing 164 Searching logic 165 Setting bookmarks in logic 168 Inserting and deleting network items 170 Transferring logic blocks to and from disk offline only 171 Making logbook entries 173 Searching for duplicate coils offline only 174 Displaying disabled addresses 174 Locating coils from contacts 175 Rebuilding a database 175 Performing a sweep online only 175 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Network Editor The Network Editor is used to enter logic elements edit register values displa
384. tive OK Cancel The controller tab also allows you to change your hardware options and controller type if needed LE You can only change your controller type in the Offline Editor 64 Controller configuration Controller tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Editing a controller s hardware details Many Modicon controllers accept executive cartridges or optional upgrades such as memory packs These hardware options should be specified in the Edit Controller Details dialog box so that NxT can adjust your database for them gt To specify hardware options for a controller Offline Editor only 1 Inthe Controller Tab click Edit Details NxT displays the options that your controller supports 2 Select a new value from the drop down lists Parameter Description Executive Cartridges which determine the controller s instruction Cartridge set Select the one installed in your controller Memory Pack The amount of both Extended and User Logic memory in the controller Select the amount installed in your controller Extended Additional memory providing 6xxxx registers Select the Memory amount installed in your controller User Logic Memory available for ladder logic Select the amount of memory you want to use for ladder logic from the total amount available in your controller 908 Select either 512 or 1024 1k input and output points per drop Micro I O Micro controllers
385. to print e For all miscompares except Networks this option prints the same information that is displayed by the View button e For Networks this option prints a brief list of miscompares To print the details of Network miscompares including networks of logic click Print in the Network Compare window 2 For more information see page 336 2 Click Print Selected The summaries print to your default printer Using the Compare Summary window 333 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To view the details of any miscompare except Networks The contents of this window change depending on the parameter you select to view in the Compare Sum mary window NxT provides descriptions of the miscompares to help you either correct them or locate additional informa tion in your controller s manual In the Compare Summary window select a miscompare and click View or double click the miscompare The View Results window appears View Results x NJ Controller Configuration Word Description Master Compare 0035 Number of Oxxxx configured 00128 01600 003A Number of 1xxxx configured 00016 00256 003E Number of 3xxxx configured 90001 00099 0031 Config Extension Size 00345 00000 0031 Config Extension Size 00345 00000 Config Extension Changed Help gt To view the details of Network miscompares Information about the master database is in the left of the column the second database or controller
386. to the flag descriptions in the Input Flags and Output Flags dialog boxes The Input Output flag diagram format line in the PCFL DAT file consists of a string of 16 digits Each digit indicates how a line should be drawn for the bit in that position The possibilities are 2 Draw a line from this bit to its label 3 Draw a line from this bit to the line coming from the following bit 4 Leave this spot blank For example the Input Flags diagram format line for the PCFL Analog Input block is 4443333222244444 The Input Flags diagram looks like this MSB LSB 0000 0000 0000 0000 L Extended Range lt No gt Manual Auto Mode lt Auto gt Process Square Root lt No gt Module Output Format lt Res 0 4096 gt Customizing the PCFL configuration file 259 11 Printing In this chapter Printing 262 Printing a network 262 Printing selected data Lister 263 Network printing options 264 Documentation tables 265 Controller tables 267 Mismatch tables 268 Formatting a printout 269 Quick picks 270 Using custom quick picks 270 Print preview 271 Print to file 272 Changing the printout font 273 Changing the print setup 274 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Printing In general NxT has three methods of sending information about your database or controller to a printer Online with no active database Prints the currently displayed network only Online with an active database Prints the currently displayed network and
387. tor When you insert a macro in your main logic database you map the parameters to real addresses You can insert the same macro in several places with different sets of mapped addresses each time The addresses change but the logic stays the same The main logic database retains its link to the inserted macros This means ProWORX NxT notices if you make changes to a macro and informs you when you view it in the Network Editor Creating a new macro Macros can only be created while offline and working in the Network Editor or from the ProWORX NxT startup screen Macro creation is similar to database creation except you select New Macro instead of New on the File menu Amacro s controller selected from the Select Controller Type dialog box should bie have the same logic instruction set as the controller used by the main logic database It isn t necessary for the controller type to be identical as long as the instruction sets matches 2 For information on creating a new logic database see Creating a new database on page 13 Introduction to macros Chapter 14 Working with Macros Opening an existing macro You must be offline and working in the Network Editor or be at the ProWORX NxT startup screen to open an existing macro database gt To open a previously created Macro 1 From the File menu select Open Macro 2 Navigate to and select the file name of the macro database you want to open You are ta
388. tor if you have such a computer 358 Using other computers Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams ProWORX NxT User s Guide Cable wire diagrams These drawings illustrate needed cable connections for connecting a PC compatible computer to a Modicon controller or associated device 25 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 25 pin female DB255 ES eitafebereler YY 11 1 1 to Computer Os ooo ooe ooon o ara T T 4576820 23 3 2 1 495 7 6 86 20 Shield L LI eee eeeeeoccooit 26 pin male DB25F 25 pin 25 pin temale male 4 h a 9 Pin Serial Port to Modicon 984A 984B or 984X 9 pin female B95 con ea Po TL A 7 8 1 6 ta T 4 th ba h 1 465 6 8 20 Shield LI LI er ee ieeeeeeeeccooon Controller 19 Nooo GoCeOCOOC ss O 25 pin male DB25F 9 pin female male 360 Cable wire diagrams Appendix D Cable Wire Diagrams 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 25 pin female DB 255 OCCCOSS C8 CE5 Computer O SACO OG OM OOOO OO a O a i mg m T 1234576820 123465798 L L Controller OEA 9 pin male DBSP 25 pin 9 pin female male 9 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 9 pin female DESS cna FREER D T 12 5 3245678 L LI arae ER g pin male DB9P 4 6 TE Bi 1 9 pin 9 pin female male _ 4 _ _ 25 Pin Serial to Modicon 984 x80 and x85 361 ProWORX NxT User
389. ts Bridge Plus Links together two Modbus Plus networks Byte A group of eight bits A byte stores a value from 0 to 255 Cell A single location in ladder logic Channel In an 901 I O subsystem a group of 128 inputs and 128 outputs assigned to a segment The ladder logic in the segment usually controls all I O operations of the corresponding channel Characters per inch The number of characters a printer prints in one inch also called horizontal pitch Checksum A calculation that sums a range of data and compares it to a pre calculated value This determines if the data is in error or has changed Coaxial Cable A round cable containing two conductors one inside the other separated by an insulator The inner conductor transmits a signal while the outer conductor is a shield Commentary The descriptors short comments long comments and page titles within a database 410 Glossary of Terms Glossary Controller An industrial control computer also called a programmable logic controller or PLC CPI Characters per inch CPS Characters per second Cross reference A list of the networks in which a particular address can be found Current Element The cell or ladder logic element being edited The Network Editor s cursor is always on the current element Current Network The network being edited The network displayed in the Network Editor is always the current network Cursor A b
390. tum Controller you have the option of editing the head number for the second or third link The first link is internal therefore it cannot be edited Global I O Global I O is one of two communication methods used by the Peer Cop extension the other is Specific I O Global I O is a broadcast communication method where a message is broadcast made available to all controllers on the Modbus Plus network Global I O data transfers do not require an acknowledgment from the receiving controller so there is no immediate overhead placed on the receiving controller There are two components to Global I O e Global Output broadcasts the specified range of discretes or registers to the devices on the Modbus Plus network Each device used to access the data must also be configured to accept Global Input from the broadcasting device 1 32 90 Peer Cop extension Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Global Input is used to receive global data from any device ona Modbus Plus network One entry line is available for each device 1 64 Each device s global data can also be received in pieces determined by Subfields Global Output Global Output broadcasts the specified range of discretes or registers onto the Modbus Plus network Each device used to access the data must also be configured to accept Global Input from the broadcasting device gt To edit the Global Output 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click C
391. tween 200 microseconds us and 19 8 ms in 200 us increments The module samples each input every 200 us and uses the time window associated with the input to determine the input state If the scanned input state is OFF the input state is set OFF If the scanned input state is ON the input state is set based on a history queue If the input was ON one time window ago the input is set ON if the input was OFF the input state is set OFF e The inputs are divided into four groups The Settling Time of each can be configured separately e Group 1 Inputs 1 4 e Group 2 Inputs 5 8 Group 3 Inputs 9 12 e Group 4 Inputs 13 16 Controller configuration General tab 57 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Parameters General tab Right side of window Battery Coil Type the control address for the controller s battery Timer Register Type the register used to store the controller s timer value Time of Day Clock Type the register used to store the controller s clock value Watch Dog Timer Type the timeout delay for the Watch Dog Timer in tens of milliseconds The controller adds 250 ms to the value you enter The default is 0000 which represents 250 ms Configuration Extension Size Type the amount of memory in machine words to be set aside for Configuration Extensions Use the following information to calculate the minimum Configuration Extension size e Configuration Overhead 1 word
392. u can select a printer and choose a paper type and orientation in the Print Setup dialog box gt To change the Print Setup 1 2 On the File menu click Print Setup The Lister dialog box appears Click Print Setup The Print Setup dialog box appears Print Setup 1271 xi i Lo ic currently HP LaserJet 4M Net Adobe PS on Rey ceal C Specific printer Options zl Network Orientation r Paper l n Portrait Size fletter81 2x11in F C Landscape Source AutoSelect Tray Select the Printer Paper type and paper Orientation you want then click OK 274 Changing the print setup 12 Using the Data Watch Window In this chapter Using the Data Watch Window 276 Displaying the Data Watch Window 278 General procedures 279 Working with the views 287 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Using the Data Watch Window The Data Watch Window lets you examine register contents and discrete values as they change over time This powerful analysis tool provides four different views of your data and lets you record the displayed data to a file for future reference You can adjust the sample rate set triggers and condense data by clamping the sample within or outside a value range Together these features help you zero in and isolate sporadic problems in your process or step back and see the whole picture You can display up to ten child windows simultaneously inside the Data Watch window ProWO
393. uation values and data types Each value can refer to a constant register address or symbol The Equation Network Editor determines which one it is based on the following format Format Meaning Example Default Register address 40001 no sign or single quotes Prefixed by Constant 123 Enclosed in single quotes Symbol HEIGHT Equation values and data types 231 ProWORX NxT User s Guide The actual data type of a value is determined by its suffix as shown in the following table Suffix Meaning Example None 16 bit signed integer 38 U 16 bit unsigned integer 40001U L Long 32 bit signed integer 123L UL Long 32 bit unsigned integer HEIGHT UL F 32 bit floating point real 4 1 45E 4F Typically you d first indicate the register address where the calculated result is to be stored followed by an equal sign the assignment operator followed by the calculation itself For example 40001 40002U COS 40003UL 1 35E 4F HEIGHT L e 40002U is an address of a 16 bit unsigned integer e COS 40003UL calculates the cosine of a long 32 bit unsigned integer value stored at address 40003 e 1 35E 4F is the floating point value of 0 000145 given in exponential notation e HEIGHT Lis a symbol of the name HEIGHT representing the address of a long 32 bit signed integer e 40001 indicates that the result of the calculation is to be
394. umber type the number of the drop that the selected RIO card controls Type 1 if the RIO card has no drop to control In Backplane Slot type the slot number that the RIO card inhabits on the local rack If set to 0 the SY MAX extension assumes that no card exists In Retry Count type the number of times the controller will try to communicate with the RIO card before it gives up In Timeout type the number of 10s of milliseconds the controller will wait for communications from the RIO card before it gives up Click OK Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller gt Toremove an RIO card from the SY MAX extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears Select the SY MAX extension from the Config Extensions tree In Card Number select the number of the RIO card you want to remove In Drop Number type 1 In Backplane Slot type 0 then click OK Cyclic Data Exchange The Cyclic Data Exchange CDE extension for provides data transfer between two or more M1E controllers on a TCP IP network CDE allow you to simultaneously configure up to 64 communication transactions Because the TCP IP connection is established only once and remains connected during an entire session it makes this type of cyclic communication very efficient gt Toconfigure the Cyclic Data Exchange extension 1 From the Network Editor on the Config
395. umentation Tables Printing 265 Documenting a Database 207 Descriptors 208 Documentation Editor 208 214 Adding 4xxxx Bit Descriptors 218 Entering 216 Goto Address 215 Moving Text Between References 217 Documentation Summary 208 211 214 Table of Reference Types 209 Documentation Utilities 208 219 Copying 220 Deleting 220 Moving 219 Removing Deleted Records 220 Documentation Window 208 Using 210 Exporting Documentation 224 Importing Documentation 221 Long Comments 208 218 Copying its Number 218 Moving Copying Deleting Records 217 One Line Documentation Window 211 Page Titles 208 Searching 213 by Blank Descriptor 214 by Descriptor 213 by Reference 213 by Symbol 214 Short Comments 208 Index 433 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Symbols 208 Drops 180 Configuring number of 56 Duplicate Coils Searching for 165 174 DWW Files 282 Exporting to DIF 283 DXF Files 204 E Editing Bridge Multiplexer 339 Address Routing Map 344 Database Setup 19 DIF Files with Excel 370 Instructions in Logic 130 Multiple Sub Function Instructions 131 Modes 127 Editors Extended Memory Register 148 Generic 152 Network 113 297 Online and Offline 113 297 User Configurable Register 137 EEPROM Memory Transfer to 105 Emulate ProWORXPLUS Hotkeys System Preference 30 Enable Contact 239 Enter Phone Number dialog 47 Entering Instructions into Logic 128 Entering Ladder Logic 113 297 Equation Editor PCFL See PCFL Equation Editor E
396. uration Controller tab Chapter 4 Configuring a Controller Controller configuration User loadables tab User loadables are instructions that do not come with a controller Instead they are supplied by Modicon or third party vendors and must be copied into a controller or database to be used loadable is a two step process reading it into a loadable library then copying it b You can only copy loadables that are already part of a loadable library Using a from the library into the controller or database To read a loadable from a disk translate it into NxT format and place it into a library For more information see Controller configuration Loadable library tab on page 69 Select a loadable from the list and click Load to copy it into your database Of fline or controller Online Click Select Library to switch to another library In the User Loadables Tab you copy user loadables from a loadable library into a controller or database You can also delete loadables from your controller or database if needed Controller Configuration x General Ports Controller User Loadables Loadable Library Loadable Library Loadables in Database D LOADABLE COMPACT C PROWORX NXT DEMO Loadables in the controller Online Editor or database Offline Editor are listed here Library Type 80 Type Name Opcode Name Opcode USL 216 FF USL 217 FF USL MOT 24 USL DS1
397. uration General tab Controller configuration Ports tab Controller configuration Controller tab Controller configuration User loadables tab Controller configuration Loadable library tab Configuring ASCII messages Using configuration extensions TCP IP extension Data Protect extension 5980 Address extension Quantum Hot Standby extension VME Bus extension Profibus extension Peer Cop extension SY MAX extension Cyclic Data Exchange Configuring the hardware or time of day clock 5 Working with Controllers Working with the controller Reading from a controller Writing to a controller Initializing logic in a controller Transferring memory contents to controller EEPROM Transferring memory contents to Flash RAM Transfer internal flash or PCMCIA to controller flash Transferring the Flash RAM executive Stopping the controller Starting the controller 6 Using the Network Editor Using the Network Editor Customizing the network display Network editor panel descriptions Power and Power State flow toggle Online only 111 113 114 117 120 125 Setting the update rate online only Editing instructions in logic Using the Segment Scheduler Moving networks in segments Editing register contents User Configurable Register editor Extended Memory Register editor Generic Register editor Other Network Editor functions Checking for used addresses Global register replace offline only Symbolic addressing Searching logic Setting b
398. uration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears 2 Inthe Config Extensions tree right click on Config Extensions and select Add Extension 3 Select Cyclic Data Exchange The parameters for the CDE appear in the details area Master IP Address Slot Health Block 1X 3X 1 z 30001 IP Address UnitID Health Rep Rate Read Ref Write Ref Timeout Master Master Click this scroll bar to view all of the parameters Cyclic Data Exchange 97 ProWORX NxT User s Guide 4 Inthe Health Block field type a 1xxxxx or 3xxxxx address All 1xxxxx addresses are based on a 16 bit boundary For example 100001 100017 100033 etc 5 Double click on an empty transaction to add a new transaction or double click on an existing transaction to edit it The Transaction dialog box appears Server IP Address 000 000 000 000 Unit ID 0 255 Health Timeout 0 50000 Repetition Rate 0 50000 00000 ms 00000 mS Function Read Write z Read Ref Master Read Ref Slave Read Count 1 125 40001 40001 001 Write Ref Master Write Ref Slave Write Count 1 100 40001 40001 001 Cancel Help 6 Configure the transaction parameters Configuring the hardware or time of day clock Many controllers have a built in Time of Day clock You can set these clocks if e You have configured its starting register in the General tab of the
399. ut device by clicking it 4 Click Edit The Specific Output window appears with the selected controller shown in the Device field 5 Inthe Length field type the length of the data block 1 32 to be sent to the destination controller 6 Inthe Reference field type the starting address for the block of data to be sent to the destination controller Click OK to close the Specific Output window If required click BIN BCD to toggle between binary and binary coded decimal 9 Click OK Peer Cop extension 93 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To edit a specific input 1 From the Network Editor on the Configuration menu click Config Extensions The Configuration Extensions dialog box appears LE Ensure the necessary Peer Cop links are defined before continuing 2 Inthe Tree Control click the Specific I O to edit The Specific Input and Specific Output fields appear in the Details area of the window 3 Inthe Specific Input list select a destination controller for example the input device and click Edit The Specific Input dialog box appears with the selected controller shown in the Device field 4 In Length type the length of the data block 1 32 to be received from the source controller 5 In Reference type the starting address of the block of data to be placed from the source controller 6 Click OK to close the Specific Input dialog box If required click BIN BCD to toggle between binary and bin
400. utput coil s in the Equation Network Editor Equation Networks were introduced in Quantum Rev 2 controllers not all controllers support Equation Networks The easiest way to see if your controller supports Equation Networks is by trying to create a new one if your controller doesn t support it the Equation Network option on the Insert menu won t be available gt To create a new Equation Network 1 Inthe main Network Editor move to the logic network where you want the new Equation Network Each Equation Network takes up an entire network s worth of logic 2 Click Edit then from the Insert menu click Equation Network The Equation Network Editor display appears and a blank Equation Network is inserted into your logic gt To edit an existing Equation Network 1 Inthe main Network Editor move the cursor to the top row of the Equation Network you want to edit 2 From the Edit menu click Edit Equation Network When the cursor is onan Equation Network this option replaces Edit Instruction in the Edit menu Or Double click anywhere in the Equation Network 228 Introduction to Equation Networks Chapter 9 Using Equation Networks The Equation Network Editor display The Equation Network Editor display looks like this Each element of an 4 equation takes up a certain amount of space measured in nodes This text tells you how much space you have left You select an enabl contact and its
401. value to be placed into the register using the appropriate radix then click OK If you are typing a binary value you cannot type in the new value directly Instead set the state of individual bits by selecting one and clicking either Set 1 or Reset 0 You can also click Select All to set all bits to 1 or Reset All to set all bits to 0 148 Extended Memory Register editor Chapter 6 Using the Network Editor gt To edit a register value using the Assembly Register amp 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Extended Memory The Extended Memory Register Editor dialog box appears 2 Click in the AR field 3 Type the new register value You can t use the AR to type values in binary Instead use the edit window described above If you try to type an AR value into the binary field it will be treated as a decimal value 4 Do one of the following e Select the radix field in the register where the value is to be placed then press CTRL ENTER e Click the AR label beside the entry box and drag the cursor to the appropriate radix of the destination register Be careful to drop the value in the correct radix field For example don t type a decimal value in the AR then drag it to the hexadecimal field Doing so will enter the value as hex not decimal To edit documentation for extended memory registers 1 From the Network Editor on the Data menu click Extended Memory The Extended
402. ve or copy descriptors and or register contents or click Browse to navigate to it Source address range Set the block address range e In Start type the starting address of the block to copy or move e InEnd type the final address of the block to copy or move The following registers can be used as source addresses Oxxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx and 4xxxx registers can be used when copying or moving addresses Global register replace offline only 161 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Oxxxx 1xxxx 3xxxx or 4xxxx registers can be used when copying or moving descriptors e Only 4xxxx registers can be used when copying or moving register contents Dest address range Type the starting address of the block in the active database to be overwritten by the copy move operation in Start NxT calculates the ending address of the block based upon the size of the block you specified in the Source Address Range area Network range Set the block network range e Type the starting network of the block to be copied moved in From Type the final network of the block to be moved in To Descriptors Select whether the descriptor contents are to be moved copied or ignored e Move Register contents are transferred into the destination block in the active database If this is an internal move moving only within the active database the source contents are deleted e Copy Register contents are transferred into the destination block in the activ
403. vents users from accessing the function e ALT P Function Active Monitor Program Mode If selected the user can switch to Program Mode in the Online Editor e Online Logic Editing If selected the user can modify logic while in the Online Editor Start Stop Controller If selected the user can start or stop a controller 24 Keeping NxT secure 7 Chapter 2 Working with a Database Read From Controller If selected the user can read information from a controller This option also affects operations that require NxT to read from the controller such as comparing databases Write To Controller If selected the user can write information to a controller This option also affects operations that require NxT to write to a controller such as initializing logic Traffic Cop Editing If selected the user can configure I O with the Traffic Cop If this option is cleared the user can view Traffic Cop information but can t change anything Controller Configuration If selected the user can save changes in configuration to the controller If this option is cleared the user can view the configuration but can t make any changes Enable Protected Registers If cleared the user has read and write access to all register addresses If selected the user has read only access to addresses within the list of Protected ranges The user still has both read and write access to addresses outside of those ranges To change the
404. within the range of addresses you want to delete 2 From the Data Watch Window click Edit then click Delete Multiple 3 Do one of the following e Column Click to delete the entire column e Row Click to delete the entire row e Down Click to delete all addresses beneath the cell down the column e Up Click to delete all addresses above the selected cell up the column e Page Click to delete the entire page of 60 addresses Setting the font size You can change the font size for the cell display The default display uses the maximum font size 6 75 pt available You can reduce this size to 6 or 5 points to use a smaller portion of your screen for the display gt To set the font size 1 From the Data Watch window click Font Size on the Settings menu 2 Select either 5 6 or 6 75 point Deleting addresses from the Address Contents table 281 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Changing the radix You can set the radix in which data values will be displayed for individual registers in the Data Watch window gt To change the radix of an individual cell e From the Data Watch Window click Edit then click Radix then select the radix to display Creating and using Data Watch Window files Each time you open the Data Watch Window from the Network Editor NxT creates a new untitled window You can create new windows then save them as a file Later you can record a stream of data to this file and save the Da
405. would be set to BOTTOM for the EMTH function OFFSET Offset of base value for displaying implied registers OFFSET Use this line if the function contains subfunctions If the subfunction is defined by the contents of an implied register the offset is set to the register s implied address For example if the bottom node has 40001 entered but the actual subfunction is in the implied register 40003 then the OFFSET would be set to 3 OPERATION FIELD Allow you to change the mode of operation within the Register Editor Operationfield is formatted the same as Errorfield and Windowtable PAGE This defines the beginning of a new editor page The number corresponds to the page number There must be an equal number of page number lines as defined in the NUMPAGES line and they must appear in sequential order An END PAGE must mark the end of each page PAGETITLE XXX You may give each page a unique title If you wish to leave the title blank put nothing between the quotes REGISTERINFO Marks the beginning of register definitions for the page An END marks the end of the REGISTERINEFO definitions User Configurable Register editor 143 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Text Description ROW Row number on screen to place the register Use a number between 1 and 18 SCREENINFO Marks the beginning of user defined screen text An END must mark the end of SCREENINFO text lines
406. writing any existing data overlay the new information onto your existing data overwriting it where necessary or replace all existing data with the new information Traffic Cop TEF Importing a TEF file overwrites the existing Traffic Cop data Exporting creates a TEF file of the current Traffic Cop data NxT requires both the TEF and DEF files to successfully import the documentation If a mismatch occurs between the database and the import file a message box appears displaying the mismatch in yellow 222 Delete documentation Chapter 8 Documenting your PLC gt To import database documentation 1 From the Network Editor on the File menu click Utilities then click Import Export The Import Export Utilities dialog box appears Import Export Utilities x Import Filename C PROWORX NXT NEWDATALFIL Export File Type ProwORX ASCII FIL gt Add Imported Descriptors to Database Overlay Imported Descriptors Create New Database using Imported Descriptors Start Cancel Browse Help Click Import Type the path and file name of the database to import or click Browse to navigate to it Select the File Type of the database to import from the drop down list 5 If you re importing a ProWORX FIL or dBaselV DBF file choose how the new data will enter your database e To add the imported descriptors to the database without changing any of its existing descriptors
407. xT User s Guide Coils panel You set addresses for the output coils in the Coils panel There are five possible output coils for an Equation Network Solved OK is set when the equation is being solved without errors Result lt 0 is set when the equation result is less than zero Result 0 is set when the equation result is equal to zero Result gt 0 is set when the equation result is greater than zero Error is set when errors have occurred while solving the equation While online if the Error coil receives power an error message will appear under the coil describing the error 9 19 9 gt To change an address for one of the output coils e From the Equation Network Editor click the appropriate text box in the output coils panel and type the register address for that coil You can enter either the direct address in X Y numeric format or a symbolic address You can also insert addresses from the Symbols list panel Used Register Address table and the Descriptor Summary So If you don t want to use a particular output coil leave the address for that coil 4 blank or erase one already typed in That coil will not be included in the Equation Network Operators list panel The Operators list panel contains a list of mathematical operators recognized by the Equation Network Editor This includes operators for addition multiplication exponentiation boolean and comparison operations You can insert an
408. xit NxT Windows 95 or Windows NT 4 x 7 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Authorizing ProWORX NxT Until you authorize your copy of ProWORX NxrT it runs in demonstration mode You have access to all NxT features but are limited to 25 networks of logic per database When you authorize your copy you can use up to 5 000 networks of logic per database You can authorize NxT with either a software or hardware key gt To authorize NxT with a software key 1 Have the serial number for your copy of NxT ready If you don t know your serial number start NxT then select About on the Help H menu to find it 2 The Product Authorization window appears when you do one of the following e Start NxT then on the Help menu click Authorize Product e From the Windows 95 or NT 4 x Desktop click Start point to Programs then select the folder where you installed NxT ProWORX by default Select Product Authorization e In Windows 3 1 or NT 3 51 double click ea in the Program Group where you installed NxT ProWORX by default 3 Click Software Keys A list of registered products appears Click Add to start the Product Authorization Wizard 5 Do one of the following e If you have already received a Key Code on a 31 2 disk select Authorize by Disk then click Next e If you do not yet have a Key Code select Authorize by Phone Fax then click Next 6 Follow the instructions as they appear on your display 8
409. xxx 4xxxx type the default starting address 3 Click Last Used to recalculate the next available address for a Traffic Cop card This prevents duplicate addresses from being used 4 Click OK Displaying the terminal block 800 Quantum A120 The Terminal Block dialog box displays the card currently selected with programmed references data values symbols if selected and their descriptors If Symbols are turned on in Preferences then an additional column containing all the symbols is displayed If you re working Online I O points are monitored and updated gt To display the terminal block for a programmed card 1 In the Traffic Cop click the card you want to display 2 Click Terminal The Terminal Block window appears with the location drop rack slot of the selected card displayed in the title bar e Next Click to display the terminal block of the next card in the currently selected rack Using the Traffic Cop display 183 ProWORX NxT User s Guide e Prev Click to display the terminal block of the previous card in the currently selected rack e Doc Click to edit the documentation for the currently selected address in the Doc Editor e Goto Click to search for an address in logic that corresponds with the I O point If a match is found you can exit the Traffic Cop and go directly to the Network Editor where a complete address search of the logic is performed Configuring a dro
410. y input output data and add descriptors and comments to a network The Online Network Editor gathers its data from the controller instead of a database as Offline does a In the Online editor each instruction is sent to the controller as it is entered whereas in the Offline editor an entire network is saved at a time W ProwORX NxT File Edit View Search Data Controller Configuration Display Tools Help You can select instruc tions for your logic from N the Instruction bar 1 NETWORK 0001 network 1 page title afar IPI INI ske L 1OPER ia Inici Reset Paine boa arr or eat ea ISHRT SHRT UCTR DCTR T1 0 T01 Hove r On ti Tew The Documentation Window lets you type descriptors short com ments and long com ments directly from the Network Editor Descriptor onoff Switch The Status Bar dis plays information aboo i NXT_DEMO the active database CLEE 5a saraa Len F 8 ranz 1 ine jH f oaoa 9933 1 anaa poe or b Bele arr TEE page belt arr bigas n a CLEE SC Conveyor belt number transfers parts past a forward direction Symbol START_PRESS thepaint station The moter can only operate in alaz feagal boaa a 1 motor control This belt the welding station and 984 41 45 About the toolb
411. you select the communication system your computer uses to connect to your network of PLCs You also set communication parameters for your PC Configuring Modbus communications The Modbus Communications Setup dialog box is divided into two parts Modbus parameters top and Modem settings bottom Set the Modbus parameters if your computer is connected directly to a controller s Modbus port or if it connects to a controller s Modbus port through a modem Modbus parameters for your PLC with the Ports tab of the Controller b The controller must have the same Modbus settings as the computer Set Configuration window or with its DIP switches e For more information see Controller configuration Ports tab on page 60 Setting up communications for your PC 35 ProWORX NxT User s Guide gt To select and configure Modbus communications 1 From the ProoWORX NxT Title Screen or the Offline Network Editor on the Controller menu click Communication Setup The Communications Setup dialog box appears These parameters affect menace opera the PC only They must Modbus Port COM Stop 1 x match the parameters C Modbus Plus X s set for the controller C Ethernet Gateway Boie fiocco j itisena pu TCP IP _ Parity None z Mode RTU C ascu eae After you choose a com munication system from Modem Type YPY the list on the left its op Initialization tions appear on t
412. ys Fit Display Option 118 Arithmetic operators 234 ASCII Exporting FIL Files 224 Importing FIL Files 221 Importing Updoc 221 ASCII Ports Configuring 57 Simple 62 Assembly Register 129 in Extended Memory Register Editor 149 in Generic Register Editor 154 in the Data Watch Window 277 in User Configurable Register Editor 139 Assignment operators 233 Attaching toa Controller 44 Network Scan 50 with a Direct Connection 45 with a Modem Connection 46 Audit Trail 388 fxManager Settings 391 ProWORX NxT Settings 390 Authorizing ProWORX NxT 8 Hardware key 9 Software key 8 Auto Addressing 183 197 AutoCAD 204 B B984 Controller Configuring 57 Back Referencing Panel 120 Back Referencing Setting Color of 119 Backing Up a Database 22 Bars Instruction 128 Status Bar 116 Toolbar 114 Battery Coil Configuring 58 Bitwise operators 235 Blocking Operations Loading 172 Saving 171 Blocking operations in Equation Networks 240 BM85 See Bridge Multiplexer Bookmarks 168 Going to 168 Retracing 169 Setting 168 Bridge Mode Enabling 60 Bridge Multiplexer Address Routing Map Editing 344 Configuring 339 Modbus Ports Configuring 342 Reading or Loading from 340 C Cable 584 Adaptor Module 356 680 Adaptor Cable 356 9 Pin Adaptor 356 Cable Wire Diagrams 359 CGF batch file descriptions 315 Channels Remote Configuring 56 Checking In a Project 402 Index 429 ProWORX NxT User s Guide Checking Out a Project 396 und
413. zoom in the view to see the trend over a shorter length of time by adjusting the value in the Resolution field in the Trending Settings window You can adjust the minimum and maximum values displayed in the y axis by adjusting the values in the YAxisMin and YAxisMax fields in the Trending Settings window Using the Spreadsheet view Use the Spreadsheet to show data similar to the Data Logger view but in the form of a spreadsheet for example more than one data sample is shown at a time This lets you view timestamped historical data for several addresses at a time gt To display the Spreadsheet View e From the Data Watch Window click View then click Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet view appears Z Data Watch Window C PROWORX NXTATEST1 DWw Of x 41 Eile Edit View Data Fill Settings Operations Window Help 14 34 02 766 09 05 1997 14 34 03 150 09 05 1997 14 34 03 535 09 05 1997 14 34 03 919 09 05 1997 14 34 04 306 03 05 1997 14 34 04 752 09 05 1997 14 34 05 129 09 05 1997 14 34 05 516 09 05 1997 14 34 05 900 03 05 1997 14 34 06 285 09 05 1997 14 34 06 669 09 05 1997 14 34 07 056 09 05 1997 14 34 07 443 09 05 1997 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On On On On On Of Off Off Off Off Off Off OFF Off Off Off Of Off 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 00008 Dec 0000

User`s Guide - Schneider Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents